Suprema Manual GB Rev 4.00

SUPREMA Fire and Gas Warning Unit
Operation Manual
From SUPREMA software version 2/06/01
Order No.: 10088495 / Edition 4.0 / September 2007
MSA
Content 1.
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
Safety Regulations
Correct Use Liability Information Areas of Installation and Use of the SUPREMA Sensors Which Can Be Connected to the Unit Software Status
1-1
1-1 1-1 1-1 1-3 1-4
2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
System Concept
Introduction Features of the System Construction of the Unit Safety Concept
2-1
2-1 2-1 2-2 2-3
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 3.6.5 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 3.7.4 3.7.5
Description of the System

Structure of the System (module descriptions) Expansion Stages System Design Variants Data Exchange between the Modules Bus Protocol Descriptions of the Modules Measurement Value Input (MDA/MAI/MAR/MPI/MFI/MSI/MCI Module) Data Processing/MCP Module (Central Processing Unit) Display + Operation/MDO Module (Display + Operating Unit) Digital + Analog Output: MGO/MRC TS/MRO/MRO TS/MAO Modules Power Supply, Bus Connections, Connecting Technique System Power Supply EXT Terminals (External Power Supply, 24 VDC) INT Terminals (MSP Module, 24 VDC, 150 W) BAT Terminals (Backup Battery Power Supply) Features of the System Power Supply Power Supply Plans
3-1
3-1 3-1 3-2 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-14 3-14
4.
4.1 4.1.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.3.1 4.3.3.2 4.3.3.3 4.3.3.4 4.3.3.5 4.3.4 4.3.4.1 4.3.4.2
Operation of the System

Operation General Integrated Operation/Display unit MDO General Displaying and cancelling messages Entering System Parameters Operation menu structure Access authorisation Menu Measure Menu Setup Submenu Measure Points Submenu Relay outputs Submenu System Submenu Sensors Submenu Printer Menu Maintain Submenu Calibration Submenu Interface Tests
SUPREMA
4-1
4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-8 4-9 4-15 4-19 4-20 4-28 4-30 4-30 4-33
0-1
MSA
4.3.4.3 4.3.5 4.3.5.1 4.3.5.2 4.4
Submenu IBR (current bridge) Menu Diagnostics Submenu Logbook Measure Data PC Operation
4-35 4-36 4-36 4-39 4-40
5.
5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2
Installation
5-1
5-1 5-1 5-1 5-3 5-4 5-4 5-5 5-5 5-7 5-7 5-10 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-16 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-21 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-26 5-27 5-27 5-29 5-30 5-31 5-32 5-32 5-36 5-37 5-42 5-44 5-46 5-48 5-48 5-48
General Information Installation Instructions for Following the EMC Directives Instructions on Meeting the EMC Requirements on the SUPREMA Control System 5.1.3 Standards and Guidelines 5.2 Installation, Step by Step 5.2.1 Unpacking 5.2.2 Installation Site 5.2.3 Cabling 5.3 Module Configuration 5.3.1 Configuration of MIB Module 5.3.2 Configuration of the MAI Module 5.3.3 Configuration of MCI/MCI BFE Module (active sensors) 5.3.4 Configuration of the MAT Module 5.3.5 Configuration of MAT TS Module 5.3.6 Configuration of the MRO 8 Module 5.3.7 Configuration of the MRC TS Module 5.3.8 Configuration of the MRO 8 TS Module 5.3.9 Configuration of the MRO 16 TS Module 5.3.10 Configuration of the MUT Module 5.3.11 Configuration of the MAR Module 5.3.12 Configuration of the MST Module 5.3.13 Configuration of the MAO Module 5.3.14 Configuration of the MGO Module 5.3.15 Configuration MGO-20 module 5.3.16 Configuration of the MCP Module 5.3.17 Configuration of the MDO Module 5.3.18 Configuration of the MDA Module 5.3.19 Configuration of the MFI Module 5.3.20 Configuration of the MSI Module 5.3.21 MRD Dummy Relay 5.4 System Configuration (Hardware) 5.4.1 Slot Assignments 5.4.2 System Requirements 5.4.3 Maximum Loads 5.4.4 Configuration Examples 5.5 Systems Consisting of Several Racks 5.5.1 Systems with Central Recording of Measuring Values 5.5.2 Systems with Decentralised Recording of Measuring Values (Satellites) 5.5.2.1 SUPREMA CAN Bridge CBM 5.5.2.2 Programming of the CAN Bridge CBM 5.5.3 Systems with peripheral data logging (satellites) and LWL converters 5.5.3.1 SUPREMA CAN LWL Converter 5.6 Connection of the Sensors 5.6.1 General Instructions 5.6.2 Notes for the Operation With Catalytic Combustion Sensors
0-2 SUPREMA
MSA
5.6.3 5.6.4 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.2.1 5.7.2.2 5.7.3 5.8 5.8.1 5.9 5.10 5.10.1 5.10.2 5.10.3 5.10.4 5.10.5 5.10.6 5.10.7 5.10.8 5.11 5.11.1 5.11.2 5.11.3 5.12 5.12.1 5.12.2 5.12.3 5.12.4 5.12.5
Note for Operation with Active Sensors (0/4 ... 20 mA) Overview of the Terminal Assignment Connection of the Relay Outputs MRO 8 Module Relay Output Unit Common Alarms Additional Relay Outputs Relay Inhibit Relay monitoring System Failure Relay Connection of the Switching Outputs MHD TS Module (High Driver) Connection of the Analog Outputs System Ports (MST Module) CAN Bus Ports (CAN-A/CAN-B) PC/Laptop Port (System Operation, RS 232A) Printer Port (Printer, RS 232B) Diagnostics / Service (RS 232C) Reset Terminal (Reset Latching Alarms) Acknowledge Terminal (Reset Horn Relay) LOCR Terminal Password Terminal Connection for the System Power Supply Calculation of the Required Power Supply Connection of the DC-Voltage Supply (MIB Module) Connection of the Internal Rack Power Supply Unit (MSP Module) Labelling Concept Plug-In Modules Slots in the Rack Connection and Terminal Modules on the Rack Connection and Terminal Modules in Rail-Mounted Installation MAT (TS) Connector Plug
5-49 5-49 5-52 5-53 5-54 5-55 5-58 5-58 5-59 5-61 5-62 5-64 5-65 5-66 5-67 5-68 5-68 5-68 5-68 5-68 5-68 5-68 5-70 5-71 5-72 5-72 5-73 5-73 5-74 5-74
6.
Startup
6-1
6-1 6-2 6-2 6-2 6-2 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-6 6-7 6-9 6-9 6-10 6-12 6-12 6-13 6-13 6-14 6-14
0-3
6.1 Turn On the Supply Voltage 6.2 System Configuration 6.2.1 PC program SUPREMA ServicePack 6.2.2 Installation 6.2.3 Creating a system configuration 6.2.4 Sending a system configuration 6.3 Start the Sensors 6.3.1 Presetting of passive sensors 6.3.2 Auxiliary Equipment Required 6.3.3 MAI Module Status A and B 6.3.3.1 Adjust the Sensor Current 6.3.3.2 Preadjust the Zero Point/Sensitivity 6.3.4 MAI Module C and Order No 10050713 6.3.4.1 Setting the Sensor Current 6.3.4.2 Presetting of Zero/Sensitivity 6.3.5 Preadjust the Active Sensors (MAI Module) 6.3.6 Configure the Sensors 6.3.6.1 Set the System Parameters 6.3.6.2 Set the Input Parameters 6.3.6.2.1 Information Menu 6.3.6.2.2 Sensor Data Menu
SUPREMA
MSA
6.3.6.2.3 Alarms Menu 6.4 Configure the Relay Driver Outputs (Switching Outputs) 6.4.1 Configure the Relay Driver Outputs 6.4.2 Behaviour of the Relay Outputs 6.5 Preliminary Calibration 6.5.1 Passive Sensors 6.5.2 Presetting of Passive Sensors 6.5.3 Active Sensors 6.6 Completing Startup
6-15 6-15 6-16 6-18 6-19 6-19 6-20 6-22 6-22
7.
7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.2 7.2.1 7.3 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.5 7.6 7.6.1 7.6.2 7.7 7.7.1 7.7.2 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.11.1 7.11.2 7.11.3
Maintenance and Service

Maintenance and Adjustment Passive Sensors Active Sensors Separate Zero Adjustment Sensor Simulation Modules Description of Function of Sensor Simulation Module 4 ... 20mA, Catalytic Combustion, Semiconductor Replacement of Sensors Replacement of Modules Plug-In Modules Connection Modules Changing the Password Plug-In Modules Status LED MCP, MDA, MGO, MAO Modules MAI Module Diagnostic Functions Logbook Functions Measurement Data System Failure Messages Display of Digital Messages LED Test Instructions for system configuration Configuration during initial installation Varying or manual selection of a configuration Removal of entries from a configuration
7-1
7-1 7-1 7-3 7-7 7-8 7-8 7-9 7-10 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-12 7-13 7-14 7-14 7-15 7-16 7-17 7-19 7-20 7-20 7-20 7-20 7-21
8.
8.1 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.3
System Expansions
Connection of Additional Sensors Connection of Additional Relay Driver Outputs Additional Relay Connections Additional Switching Outputs Connection of Additional Analog Outputs
8-1
8-1 8-2 8-2 8-3 8-3
9.
9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.2 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2
Connection of Peripherals
Connection of a PC/Laptop Operating Software Display Software Protocol Printer Bus Connection SUPREMA Gateway CAN/MOD-Bus RTU (PKV30) SUPREMA-Gateway CAN/Profibus DP
9-1
9-1 9-2 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-4 9-6
0-4
SUPREMA
MSA
10.
10.1 10.2 10.3 10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6 10.3.7 10.3.8 10.3.9 10.4 10.4.1 10.4.2
Redundant Systems
Application/Function Safety Function of Redundant Systems Design of the Redundant System Components of the Rack Installation of the MAR Module Installation of MCP and MDA Module Output Drivers/Relay Outputs Installation MGO Module Connection MRO 8 TS Module Connection MRO 16 TS Module MAO Module logic extension MLE10 (with SIL-3 Approvals) Startup Configuration Tool Function Check
10-1
10-1 10-1 10-2 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-4 10-5 10-5 10-6 10-7 10-7 10-8 10-8 10-8
11.
11.1 11.2 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 11.2.5 11.2.6 11.2.7 11.2.8 11.2.9 11.2.10 11.2.11 11.2.12 11.2.13 11.2.14 11.2.15 11.2.16 11.2.17 11.2.18 11.2.19 11.2.20 11.2.21 11.2.22 11.2.23 11.2.24 11.2.25 11.2.26 11.2.27
Technical Data
System Data Module Data MCP Module: Central Processing Unit MDA Module: Data Acquisition Unit MDO Module: Display + Operation Unit MGO Module: General Output Unit MHD TS Module: Modular High Driver MAI Module: Analog Input Unit MPI WT100 Module: Passiv Input Unit MPI WT10 Module: Passiv Input Unit MPI HL8101 Module: Passiv Input Unit MPI HL8113 Module: Passiv Input Unit MCI/MCI BFE Module: Current Input Unit MRO 8 Module: Relais Output Unit MRC TS Module: Relais Connector MRO 8 TS Module: Relais Output Unit (Rail-Mount Installation) MRO 16 TS Module: Redundant Relais Output Unit (Rail-Mount Installation) Relay Contact Data MAO Module: Analog Output Unit MIB Module: Interconnection Board MAT Module: Analog Terminal Unit MSP Module: System Power Unit MST Module: System Terminals MFI Module: Fire Input Unit MSI Module: Switch Input Unit MAT TS 320 Module: Flammable/Toxic Adapter MAT TS 330 Module: Fire Input (Qatar Version) MRD Module: Dummy Relay MAR Module: Analog Redundant
11-1
11-1 11-2 11-2 11-2 11-2 11-3 11-3 11-4 11-4 11-5 11-5 11-6 11-6 11-7 11-7 11-8 11-8 11-9 11-9 11-10 11-10 11-11 11-11 11-12 11-12 11-13 11-13 11-14 11-14
12.
12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4
SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheets

SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7010 (3-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7010 (5-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7100 (3-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7100 (5-wire)
SUPREMA
12-1
12-2 12-4 12-6 12-8
0-5
MSA
12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9 12.10 12.11 12.12 12.13 12.14 12.15 12.16 12.17 12.18 12.19 12.20 12.21 12.22 12.23 12.24 12.25 12.26 12.27 12.28 12.29 12.30 12.31 12.32 12.33 12.34 12.35 12.36 12.37 12.38 12.39 12.40 12.41 12.42 12.43 12.44 12.45 12.46 12.47 12.48 12.49 12.50 12.51 12.52
SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7400 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7600 (3-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7600 (5-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7602 (3-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7602 (5-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7606 (3-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7606 (5-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7711 K/D-7711 K-PR (3-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7711 K/D-7711 K-PR (5-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7152 K (3-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7152 K (5-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-715 K (3-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-715 K (5-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Series 47K-ST, -PRP (3-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Series 47K-ST, -PRP (5-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-8101 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-8113 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-8201 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet DF-7010 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet DF-7100 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet DF-8201 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet DF-8250 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet DF-8401 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet DF-8501 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet DF-8502 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet DF-8510 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet DF-8603 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet DF-9200 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet DF-9500 EX SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet DF-9500 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet DF-9500 Tr (Current Separator) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet FlameGard SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet GD 10 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet IR-3600 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Contact SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet SafEye Type 2xx SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet SafEye Type 4xx/UV SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Type 410 WT (3-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Type 451 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Type 460 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Type 490/O2 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet UltimaX (2-wire for Tox and O2) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet UltimaX (3-wire for Explosive Gases/Tox and O2) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet UltimaX IR SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Ultima-XI SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Fire Detector Apollo Series 65 (not explosion-proof) Internal Power Supply (without safety barrier) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Fire Detector Apollo Series 65 (not explosion-proof) External Power Supply (without safety barrier) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet for Push-Button Detector (not explosion-proof) Internal Power Supply (without safety barrier)
12-10 12-12 12-14 12-16 12-18 12-20 12-22 12-24 12-26 12-28 12-30 12-32 12-34 12-36 12-38 12-40 12-42 12-44 12-46 12-48 12-50 12-52 12-54 12-56 12-58 12-60 12-62 12-64 12-66 12-68 12-70 12-72 12-74 12-76 12-78 12-80 12-82 12-84 12-86 12-88 12-90 12-92 12-94 12-96 12-98 12-100 12-102 12-104
0-6
SUPREMA
MSA
12.53 12.54 12.55 12.56 12.57 12.58 12.59 12.60 12.61 12.62 12.63 12.64
SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet for Push-Button Detector (not explosion-proof) External Power Supply (without safety barrier) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Explosion-proof Push-Button Detector with Barrier Z 787 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Ex-Fire Detector Apollo Series 60 with Barrier Z 787 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Explosions-Proof Fire Detector CERBERUS DO1101EX/DT1101EX with Barrier Z 787 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Explosion-Proof Push-Button Detector with Barriers MTL 728 and MTL 710 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Explosion-Proof Fire Detector Apollo Series 60 with Barriers MTL 728 and MTL 710 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Explosion-Proof Fire Detector CERBERUS DO1101EX/DT1101EX with Barriers MTL 728 and MTL 710 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Contact SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet SafEye Xenon 700 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Flame Gard XI SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Series 47K-HT (3-wire) SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Series 47K-HT (5-wire)
12-106 12-108 12-110 12-112 12-114 12-116 12-118 12-120 12-122 12-124 12-126 12-128
13.
13.1 13.2 13.2.1 13.2.2 13.2.3 13.2.4 13.2.5 13.2.6
Dimensions
Rack Rail-mounted Modules MRO 8 TS Module MRO 16 TS Module MRC TS Module MGT 40 TS Module MHD TS Module MAT TS Module
13-1
13-1 13-2 13-2 13-2 13-3 13-3 13-4 13-4
14.
14.1
Marking, Certificates and Approvals according to the Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)

Special Conditions for Secure Use According to EG Type Test Approval DMT 03 ATEX G 003 X
14-1
14-3
15.
15.1 15.1.1 15.1.2 15.2 15.2.1 15.2.2 15.2.3 15.3
Special conditions to comply with the requirements of DIN EN 61508 for SIL 13 according to TUEV Certificate
Conditions for configuration, installation, operation and maintenance Common Conditions for safety operation Permitted system expansions over CAN BUS Listing of the permitted Hardware Modules and Software Versions Permitted Hardware Modules Permitted Software Versions Possible Configurations and Acquirable SILs TUEV-Certificate
15-1
15-1 15-1 15-2 15-6 15-6 15-7 15-7 15-9
16.
16.1
Special conditions to comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 for a SUPREMA Fire and Gas Warning System
Safety Conditions
16-1
16-1
17.
17.1
Ordering Information
Modules and Accessories
17-1
17-1
SUPREMA
0-7
MSA
Tables
Table 1-1: Table 1-2: Table 3-1: Table 4-1: Table 5-1: Table 5-2: Table 5-3: Table 5-4: Table 5-5: Table 5-6: Table 5-7: Table 5-8: Table 5-9: Table 5-10: Table 5-11: Table 5-12: Table 5-13: Table 5-14: Table 5-15: Table 5-16: Table 5-17: Table 5-18: Table 5-19: Table 5-20: Table 5-21: Table 5-22: Table 5-23: Table 5-24: Table 5-25: Table 5-26: Table 5-27: Table 5-28: Table 5-29: Table 5-30: Table 5-31: Table 5-32: Table 5-33: Table 5-34: Table 5-35: Table 5-36: Table 5-37: Table 7-1: Table 7-2: Table 7-3: Table 7-4: Table 7-5:
0-8
Sensors available for connection Software status ATEX and TV SIL 3 Voltage Changeover Overview of operator keys Allowed Conductor Cross Sections Cable Specifications Maximum Allowable CAN Bus Length CAN BUS Bit Rate Settings/* MS = measuring point (input) Rack-CAN Node Number CAN Bus Terminating Resistors MGO Module, Configuration of turn-on behaviour and failure behaviour MAO Module, Configuration of turn-on behaviour and failure behaviour MCI 10 Module configuration Types of MPI Modules Assignment of the Connection Modules System Configuration/Maximum Loads MGO Module/Maximum Loads CAN Bus Connection Elements Baudrate at the Central Rack Baudrate at the Satellite Rack Calculation of the Node ID CAN-ID Assignment Technical Data CAN-Bridge CBM MAT/MAT TS Module, Terminal Assignment, Sensor Connections MGT 40 TS Module, Terminal Assignments for Connection of the Sensors MGT 40 TS Module/Allocation MAT MGT connections MRO Module, Contact Load Capacity MRO 8 Module, Relay Assignment MRO 8 Module, Terminal Assignment MRO 8 TS Module, Common Alarm Relay Assignment MRO 8 TS Module, Terminal Assignment MIB Module, System Fail Relay, and Terminal Assignment MGT 40 TS Module, Terminal Assignments of the Switching Outputs MAT/MAT TS Module Terminal Assignment, Analog Outputs MGT 40 TS Module Terminal Assignment, Analog Outputs MST Module, Pin Assignment, CAN Bus Ports RS 232A Terminal Assignment RS 232B, Pin Assignment Power Requirement of the Sensors and Cables Power Requirements of the System Modules MSP Module, Terminal Assignment MCP, MDA, MGO, MAO Modules, Function Status LED MAI Module, Function Status LEDs System Failure Message ID Rack Assignment in decimal and hexadecimal figures Display of the digital messages
SUPREMA
1-3 1-4 3-15 4-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-8 5-9 5-9 5-10 5-12 5-13 5-30 5-31 5-31 5-35 5-38 5-38 5-39 5-39 5-44 5-49 5-50 5-51 5-52 5-53 5-53 5-56 5-57 5-58 5-60 5-63 5-63 5-66 5-66 5-67 5-69 5-69 5-71 7-13 7-14 7-17 7-19 7-19
MSA
Table 9-1: Table 9-2: Table 10-1: Table 10-2: Table 14-1: Table 17-1:
Technical Data Suprema Gateway CAN/MOD-Bus RTU Technical Data Suprema Gateway CAN/Profibus DP Modules of the Rack Terminal Connections MRO 16 TS Module Modules tested according to DMT 03 ATEX G 003 X Order No., Modules and Accessories
9-6 9-7 10-3 10-6 14-4 17-2
SUPREMA
0-9
MSA
Figures
Figure 2-1: Figure 4-1: Figure 4-2: Figure 4-3: Figure 4-4: Figure 4-5: Figure 4-6: Figure 4-7: Figure 4-8: Figure 4-9: Figure 4-10: Figure 4-11: Figure 4-12: Figure 4-13: Figure 4-14: Figure 4-15: Figure 4-16: Figure 4-17: Figure 4-18: Figure 4-19: Figure 4-20: Figure 4-21: Figure 4-22: Figure 4-23: Figure 4-24: Figure 4-25: Figure 4-26: Figure 4-27: Figure 4-28: Figure 4-29: Figure 5-1: Figure 5-1a: Figure 5-2: Figure 5-3: Figure 5-4: Figure 5-5: Figure 5-6: Figure 5-7: Figure 5-8: Figure 5-9: Figure 5-10: Figure 5-11: Figure 5-12: Figure 5-13: Figure 5-14: Figure 5-15: Figure 5-16: Block circuit diagram of a system layout (non-redundant) Integrated operation/Display unit-MDO Module Menu list and input menu List display (with a measuring point in Alarm) Bar display Display as LED Field Measure Point Setup menu Sensor data submenu Alarms submenu Relay output assignment menu Relay output menu System menu Header parameter submenu Submenu Status texts Submenu Gas names Submenu Measuring ranges Submenu Units Submenu Lin. tables Submenu Assignment Configuration submenu Printer submenu Start calibration submenu End calibration submenu Test of the analog outputs Test of the serial interfaces Test of the digital driver interfaces Calibration gateway tests IBR Logbook selection menu Calibration history Modules submenu MAT Module, connection of the screening SUPREMA shielding and grounding concept MIB Module, DIL Switch (BGT = Rack No.) MAI Module, position of adapter modules 18 MAT Module, position of the terminals for input 18 MCI 10 Module, solder bridges Configuration of MAT Module Configuration of the MAT TS Module Configuration of the MRO 8 Module Configuration of the MRC TS Module Configuration of the MAO Module Configuration MAO Module, Layout version 6 Configuration of the MGO Module MGO Module, as from layout version 15 MCP Module, standard configuration MDO Module, standard configuration MDO Module Memory Chip Assignment H/L 2-3 4-1 4-3 4-7 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-16 4-19 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-28 4-31 4-32 4-34 4-34 4-35 4-35 4-36 4-37 4-39 5-2 5-3 5-7 5-11 5-11 5-12 5-14 5-15 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-21 5-22
0-10
SUPREMA
MSA
Figure 5-17: Figure 5-18: Figure 5-19: Figure 5-20: Figure 5-21: Figure 5-22: Figure 5-23: Figure 5-24: Figure 5-25: Figure 5-26: Figure 5-27: Figure 5-28: Figure 5-29: Figure 5-30: Figure 5-31: Figure 5-32: Figure 5-33: Figure 5-34: Figure 5-35: Figure 5-36: Figure 5-37: Figure 5-38: Figure 5-39: Figure 5-40: Figure 5-41: Figure 5-42: Figure 5-43: Figure 5-44: Figure 5-45: Figure 5-46: Figure 5-47: Figure 5-48: Figure 5-49: Figure 5-50: Figure 5-51: Figure 6-1: Figure 6-2: Figure 6-3: Figure 6-4: Figure 6-5: Figure 6-6: Figure 7-1a: Figure 7-1b: Figure 7-2: Figure 7-3: Figure 7-4: Figure 7-5:
Configuration of the MDA Module View of the MFI Module View of the MSI Module View of the MRC Module View of MRD Module Slots and Positions on the rack Rear of the Rack Configuration example 1 Configuration example 2 Configuration example 3 Configuration example 4 Connection CAN-Bridge CBM SUPREMA CAN-Bridge CBM MAT Module/MAT TS Module, Connector Plug MGT 40 TS Module MRO 8 Module, Terminal Assignment Connection diagram of the MRC TS and MRO 8 TS Modules MRO 8 TS Module MIB Module, connection terminals for the system failure relay Principle circuit diagram, connection of the switching outputs MGT 40 TS Module MHD TS Module Connection (Switching outputs inverted) MHD TS Module MAT Module/MAT TS Module, connector plug MST Module ports, Connections MST Module Connections as from Module version 8 SUB-D pin assignment Protocol Printer, Data Structure MIB Module, supply voltage terminals Connection diagram of the MSP Module Labelling field, plug-in Modules Labelling of the slots in the 1st rack Labelling of the connection and terminal Modules in the rack Labelling of the rail-mounted connection and terminal Modules Labelling of the MAT (TS) connector plug Create new database Configuration Display and operating elements of the MAI Module Status A and B Equivalent sensor circuit for the MPI WT100/MPI WT10 Module Equivalent sensor circuit for the MPI HL8101/MPI HL8113 Module Display and Operation Elements of the MAI Module Status C Sensor simulation Module with bold switch Sensor simulation Module with rocker switch MCP, MDA, MGO, MAO Modules, Status LEDs MAI Module, Status LEDs MDO Module, Switch for LED Test System Configuration Message
5-23 5-23 5-24 5-26 5-27 5-28 5-29 5-31 5-32 5-32 5-32 5-37 5-37 5-49 5-52 5-54 5-54 5-57 5-58 5-59 5-61 5-62 5-62 5-63 5-64 5-65 5-65 5-67 5-70 5-71 5-72 5-73 5-74 5-74 5-74 6-3 6-3 6-6 6-6 6-7 6-9 7-8 7-8 7-13 7-14 7-20 7-21
SUPREMA
0-11
MSA
Figure 9-1: Figure 9-2: Figure 9-3: Figure 9-4: Figure 9-5: Figure 9-6: Figure 10-1: Figure 10-2: Figure 10-3: Figure 10-4: Figure 10-5: Figure 15-1: Figure 15-2: Figure 15-3: Figure 15-4: Figure 15-5: Figure 15-6: Figure 15-7:
MDO Module, RS 232 port MST Module, RS 232-A port MST Module, RS 232-B port Protocol printer, Data Structure Connection Suprema Gateway CAN/MOD-BUS RTU Connection Suprema Gateway CAN/Profibus DP Circuit Diagram Rack System (redundant) MAI Module with MAR Module Connection MRO 8 TS Redundant Module Connection MRO 16 TS Module MRO 16 TS Module System expansions with CAN BUS and single-channel-configuration System expansions with CAN BUS and redundant configuration In case of a single-channel-configuration the MLE Modules can not be used Configuration without MLE 10 Modules Configuration with MLE 10 Modules Configuration without MLE 10 Modules Configuration with MLE 10 Modules
9-1 9-2 9-3 9-3 9-6 9-7 10-2 10-4 10-5 10-6 10-7 15-2 15-3 15-3 15-4 15-4 15-5 15-5
0-12
SUPREMA
Safety Regulations
MSA
1. Safety Regulations
1.1 Correct Use
It is imperative that this operating manual be read and observed when using the system. In particular, the safety instructions, as well as the information for the use and operation of the apparatus, must be carefully read and observed. Furthermore, the national regulations applicable in the user's country must be taken into account for safe use. Danger! This product is supporting life and health. Inappropriate use, maintenance or servicing may affect the function of the device and thereby seriously compromise the user's life. Before use, the product operability must be verified. The product must not be used if the function test is unsuccessful, it is damaged, a competent servicing/ maintenance has not been made, genuine MSA spare parts have not been used. Alternative use, or use outside this specification will be considered as non-compliance. This also applies especially to unauthorised alterations to the apparatus and to commissioning work that has not been carried out by MSA or authorised persons.
1.2 Liability Information

MSA accepts no liability in cases where the product has been used inappropriately or not as intended. The selection and use of the product are the exclusive responsibility of the individual operator. Product liability claims, warranties also as guarantees made by MSA with respect to the product are voided, if it is not used, serviced or maintained in accordance with the instructions in this manual.
1.3 Areas of Installation and Use of the SUPREMA

The AUER SUPREMA is a stationary gas warning system with multiple measurement sites, which operates continuously to monitor work sites for the presence of combustible, explosive, and toxic mixtures of gas and/or vapour with air and to monitor the ambient air for oxygen content. The system supplies power to the sensors, displays the measured concentrations, and monitors the limit values, but it also actuates alarm devices. The various functions of the gas warning system, that is, the acquisition of the measurement values, the evaluation of the signals, the actuation of the alarm devices, etc., are performed by the various modules of the SUPREMA. The SUPREMA can process the standardised current and voltage outputs of various types of sensors. This means that the system can display and evaluate not only gas measurements but other measurement variables as well (e.g., temperature and pressure).
SUPREMA
1-1
MSA
Safety Regulations
Typical areas where the SUPREMA can be used include: The chemical and petrochemical industry The paint and solvent-processing industry The gas-processing industry The steel-processing industry Municipal areas Production Warehousing Distribution Shipping The processing of gases and vapours Explosion monitoring for the protection of industrial plant and the workers. Continuous monitoring of the atmosphere to detect the formation of explosive gas/ vapour-air mixtures and to give early warning, long before the lower explosion limit is reached (LEL). Toxicity monitoring for the protection of the workers. Continuous monitoring of the atmosphere to detect the formation of toxic gas concentrations. Early warning prior to or on reaching the limit values. Oxygen monitoring for protection of the workers. Continuous monitoring of the atmosphere to detect oxygen enrichment or deficiency. Early warning prior to or on reaching the limit values. Oxygen monitoring for protection of industrial plant. Continuous monitoring of inerted atmospheres to detect the presence of oxygen. Early warning prior to or on reaching the limit values.
Monitoring functions are called for in the following areas:
1-2
SUPREMA
Safety Regulations
MSA
1.4 Sensors Which Can Be Connected to the Unit

The following types of active and passive MSA sensors can be connected to the SUPREMA system:
Designation 500S DF-7100 DF-7010 DF-7500 DF-9500 DF-9500C DF-9200 DF-8510 DF-8501 DF-8502 DF-8401 DF-8603 DF-8201 DF-8250 GD10 IR-3600 D-7010 D-7100 D-7600 D-7602 D-7606 D-7400 D-7711 D-715 D-7152 Series 47K D-8101 D-8113 D-8201 D-8213 Type 410 Type 451 Ultima Ultima IR Ultima XE Ultima XI Ultima X IR FlameGard Module Type MPI-WT100 MCI MCI MCI MCI MCI MCI MCI MCI MCI MCI MCI MCI MCI MCI MCI MPI-WT10 MPI-WT100 MPI-WT100 MPI-WT100 MPI-WT100 MPI-WT100 MPI-WT100 MPI-WT100 MPI-WT100 MPI-WT100 MPI-HL8101 MPI-HL8113 MPI-HL8101 MPI-HL8113 MPI-WT100 MCI MCI MCI MCI MCI MCI MCI infrared catalytic infrared infrared infrared Measuring Principle catalytic catalytic catalytic catalytic electrochemical electrochemical electrochemical electrochemical semiconductor semiconductor semiconductor semiconductor semiconductor semiconductor infrared infrared/ultraviolet infrared catalytic catalytic catalytic catalytic catalytic catalytic catalytic catalytic catalytic catalytic semiconductor semiconductor semiconductor semiconductor catalytic electrochemical EX EX EX EX/TOX/OX TOX/OX TOX/OX TOX/OX Fire Detection Fire Detection Fire Detection TOX TOX TOX EX EX EX/TOX CO2 EX EX EX EX EX EX EX EX EX EX TOX/EX TOX/EX TOX/EX TOX/EX EX TOX EX EX EX EX EX Flame X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Use Active Passive X
SafEye 2 and 4 MCI
Table 1-1: Sensors available for connection
(EX: Explosive gases or vapors; TOX: Toxic gases; OX: Oxygen; Fire Detection: Smoldering Fire Detection; Flame: Flame Detector) Attention! Other types of sensors may be operated in conjunction with the SUPREMA only after consulting with MSA.
SUPREMA
1-3
MSA
Safety Regulations
1.5 Software Status

The operation manual refers to the following software status:
M o d u le M CP 10 M DO 10 M DA 10 M DA 20 M A O 10 M G O 10 M G O 20 M A I 20 M A R 10 S o ftw a re ve rsio n F la sh re sp . EP R O M 2.0 6.0 1 2.0 6.0 1 1.0 2.0 2 2.0 1.0 1 2.0 2.0 1 2.0 2.0 6 3.0 1.0 1 M A I E A 03
___
S o ftw a re v e rsio n CP LD
___ ___
M D A M A 01
___
M A O M A 01 M G O M A 01
___
M A I M A 01 M A I M A 01
Table 1-2: Software status ATEX and TV SIL 3
1-4
SUPREMA
System Concept
MSA
2. System Concept
2.1 Introduction
The SUPREMA control system, which is used in the area of gas measuring technology, is characterised by the following properties: modular system design compact construction highly flexible minimal installation work (bus system) high availability
At the maximum degree of expansion, 256 sensors can be connected. The system can drive up to 512 relay outputs. For higher safety levels, the system can be built with redundancy. Via a CAN bus interface, an industrial PC can be connected to tie the system into the company communications network, for example.
2.2 Features of the System

19 rack system for the connection of up to 256 sensors. Output of up to 512 alarm messages. Complete system for up to 64 sensors with common alarm in one 19 rack. Modular system. Compact construction. High flexibility. Minimal installation work (bus system). External voltage operation (85 ... 265 VAC) no switching necessary. Power supply unit on the rack, 150 W. For higher power requirements, external power supplies can be connected. Battery connection for emergency power operation. Operating voltage of the modules = 24 VDC; voltage controller for 5 V, etc., on the modules. The system is laid out so that card coding is no longer necessary. Operating voltage range of the system modules: 19.2 VDC ... 32 VDC. Operation of passive catalytic-/semiconductor-sensors (D-7600, D-7100, D-7010, etc.), 3- or 5-wire. Automatic pre-setting of passive sensors in first calibration Operation of active sensors with 4 ... 20 mA output, 2- or 3-wire (DF-7100, DF-9500, etc.). Maximum number of sensors in the system: 256. Maximum number of sensors in one rack: 64.
SUPREMA
2-1
MSA
System Concept
Maximum number of switching outputs in the system: 512. System operation via a graphic display screen with a resolution of 240 x 64 pixels, cursor keys and individual function keys. self-explanatory error messages System operation optionally via laptop (Windows-oriented user interface). Option for connection of an external PC (data evaluation, data display, etc.). Key switch connection or 3-level password for access control. Key switch connection for relay inhibiting. Common alarm LEDs for 1st to 4th alarm, signal failure (sensor), horn, inhibit, power supply failure. Protocol printout of status changes + system operations (standard ASCII, 80 CHR). 3 x RS 232 interfaces for data transfer to an industrial PC/laptop/printer. RS 232 interfaces are electrically isolated. RS 232/RS 485 converters used for longer transmission distances. The 8 MRO Module common alarm relays supplied by the rack power supply unit. External relays are supplied with power separately.
2.3 Construction of the Unit

The modules of the SUPREMA are mounted in a rack. For expanded systems, additional modules can be placed in a second rack or installed on top hat rails in a switch box. Data is exchanged between the modules over a CAN bus, which makes it possible to transmit data over distances of up to 1,000 m. For measurement tasks that require redundant signal input and processing, additional modules can be added at any time to expand the gas warning system. The installation site of the modules must be outside Explosion Zones 0, 1, and 2 and be free of ignitable, explosive, or corrosive gases. The sensors must have the type of protection against ignition prescribed for the installation site. The connection between the input module of the SUPREMA and the sensors is established by a screened remote-measurement cable of the 2-, 3-, 4- or 5-wire type. The SUPREMA system must be operated at a voltage in the range of: 19.2 VDC to 32 VDC. For servicing, the sensors can be electrically isolated from the SUPREMA by mechanically disconnecting the plug-in connection (MAT, MAT TS modules). The following block circuit diagram shows the possible layout of a non-redundant system.
2-2
SUPREMA
System Concept
MSA
Figure 2-1: Block circuit diagram of a system layout (non-redundant)
2.4 Safety Concept

The individual functional modules are connected to each other by a CAN bus. The CAN bus is designed to be virtually error-proof. Every module can detect errors on the bus and handle them appropriately. The probability of an undiscovered communications error on the bus is 4.7.10-14. Error states on the CAN bus are indicated on the DISPLAY + OPERATION unit (MDO module). Each module with a microcomputer module has a watchdog timer, which actuates a wired OR signal line when the module fails. As a result, the SYSTEM FAILURE common relays on the interconnection board (MIB module) are de-activated. This common failure signal is monitored by the DISPLAY + OPERATION unit . All the modules are checked for signs of life at fixed, periodic time intervals by the CENTRAL PROCESSING unit (MCP module) via the CAN bus. The failure of a module can thus be recognised, and the appropriate messages will be generated. These messages are displayed on the MDO module and, parallel to it, the System Failure is activated by the relevant modules. The operating voltages of the connected voltage supply units (EXT, INT and BAT) are monitored by special inputs of the DATA ACQUISITION unit (MDA module). If a malfunction occurs here, the POWER-FAIL common relay is released.
SUPREMA
2-3
MSA
System Concept
For gas warning systems with higher safety requirements according to EN 61508 SIL 3 the system can be provided with redundancy by the use of additional modules. Redundant signal processing has the same structure and functions the same way as standard non-redundant processing. Communications between the modules proceed over an internal connection, which is designed as a redundant CAN bus. If one of the two signal processing routes malfunctions, an error message to this effect appears on the DISPLAY + OPERATION unit (MDO module) (SYSTEM FAIL). The remaining signal processing channel takes over all of the necessary functions until the defective module can be replaced. The failure of individual modules does not lead automatically to the failure of the entire system. Only the functions assigned to the specific module in question are not available. In the simpler expansion stages of the safety requirements according to EN 61508, the gas warning system can be operated via one of the two possible CAN bus connections. Starting with SIL 3, both CAN bus connections are generally required. In this case, at least two CENTRAL PROCESSING units (MCP modules) are present and all of the input and output signals important for system operations are available over additional modules on both CAN buses in parallel. If one of these CAN bus connections fails, an error signal is generated by the SYSTEM FAIL message. The system still remains functional by using the remaining CAN bus connection. The message SYSTEM FAIL is leading to flash up the SYSTEM FAIL LED and the system failure relays change to the failure condition. A permanent lasting System fail message indicates a urgent needs of service (for example the malfunction ones module). Therefore the connection of the switching outputs of the system failure relays must be that way that the message triggering comes prompt.
2-4
SUPREMA
MSA
3. Description of the System

3.1 Structure of the System (module descriptions)
The modular control system contains two different types of modules. Each type is equipped with a microcomputer and is connected to the CAN bus. Modules with complex tasks and multitasking: MCP Module: MDO Module: CENTRAL PROCESSING Module (system control and signal processing) DISPLAY + OPERATION Module (system status display + operation) DATA ACQUISITION Module (measurement signal input + preliminary processing) GENERAL OUTPUT Module (driver outputs for system messages) ANALOG OUTPUT Module (0 ... 20 mA outputs)
Modules with simple tasks and multitasking: MDA Module: MGO Module: MAO Module:
In addition, the following modules without microcomputers and without direct access to the CAN bus are present: MAI Module: MCI Module: ANALOG INPUT Module (signal processing + digitisation for 8 measuring sites) CURRENT INPUT Module MCI (signal processing for 0 ... 20 mA) MCI BFE (BFE = Smoldering Fire Detection) (Signal processing for 0 ... 20 mA especially for DF 8501, DF 8502, DF 8510 fire detectors) MPI Module: PASSIVE INPUT Module (power supply + signal processing for catalytic and semiconductor sensors) RELAY OUTPUT Module (2 models, 8/16 relays) INTERCONNECTION BOARD Fire Input Module (Power supply and signal processing for automatic and push-button fire detectors) Switch Input Module (Power supply and signal processing for external switches)
MRO Module: MIB Module: MFI Module: MSI Module:
Connection modules etc.
3.2 Expansion Stages

In the minimal version for 8 inputs, the following units are to be used: MDA Module MAI Module MCI and/or MPI Module Data Acquisition Module Analog Input Module (maximum of 8 on one MAI module)
SUPREMA
3-1
MSA
MCP Module MGO Module MRO 8 Module MDO Module MFI Module MSI Module Rack Supply Voltage
Central Processing Module General Output Module Relay Output Module (Common Alarms) Display + Operation Module Fire Input Module Switch Input Module
By integrating additional units of the type listed above, a system can be expanded to handle as many as 256 sensors and as many as 512 relay driver outputs. Redundant systems for higher safety classes are realised by adding up to two more CENTRAL PROCESSING units (MCP modules), a double set of the appropriate data acquisition (MAR and MDA) and alarm control modules (MGO), a second CAN bus and a second or third voltage supply. (see section Redundant Systems)
3.3 System Design Variants

19 racks for 8, 16, 24, 32, or 64 sensors System modules installed in racks and wall assembly
3.4 Data Exchange between the Modules

The field bus for the gas warning system has the following features: Defined standards (ISO, OSI) Secure transmission Supportive manufacturers and users Readily available hardware and software components Widespread acceptance and use Rapid data exchange Low cost per network node in future expandable
The CAN bus satisfies all these criteria. It is therefore obvious that this bus is a safe decision for the future. An increasing number of applications in other branches of industry demonstrates that the CAN bus is being recognised as an economical platform for nearly any type of communications in mobile systems, industrial automation, and measurement technology. The data is exchanged between the modules over the CAN bus. All modules use standardised device profiles according to CANopen (CiA-DS 301, CiA-DS 302, CiA-DSP 401 and CiA-DSP 403). Two CAN bus connections are provided, which are operated in parallel in the redundant system design.
3-2
SUPREMA
MSA
3.5 Bus Protocol

On layers 1 and 2 of the ISO/OSI model according to ISO Standard 11,898, the CAN bus protocol 2.0A is used with 11 bit long identifiers. On the Interconnection Board (MIB module), the DIL switch can be used to set the transfer speed to 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500 or 1,000 kBits/s for all of the connected modules. All modules on one bus must operate at the same bit rate; if one of the modules uses a different rate, an error state occurs on the bus. This is detected, and appropriate messages are displayed. Each module receives a code (Node ID) in the range of 1 ... 127 by the use of the DIL switch of the MIB module board on the basis of its slot in the rack. Each of the modules on one bus must have its own code. If duplicate codes are detected, an error message is generated.
3.6 Descriptions of the Modules

3.6.1 Measurement Value Input (MDA/MAI/MAR/MPI/MFI/MSI/MCI Module)
The measurement values are acquired by means of the following units: MAI Module: MAR Module: MPI Module: MCI Module: ANALOG INPUT Module (signal processing + digitisation for 8 inputs) ANALOG REDUNDANT UNIT (redundant signal input, digitisation) PASSIVE INPUT UNIT (signal processing for passive catalytic and semiconductor sensors) CURRENT INPUT UNIT MCI (signal processing for 0 ... 20 mA) MCI BFE (BFE = Smoldering Fire Detection) (Signal processing for 0 ... 20 mA especially for DF 8501, DF 8502, DF 8510 fire detectors) MFI Module: Fire Input Module (Power supply and signal processing for automatic and push-button fire detectors) Switch Input Module (Power supply and signal processing for external switches) DATA ACQUISITION UNIT (measurement signal processing)
MSI Module: MDA Module:
MAI Module: Analog Input Unit The MAI module is provided to operate 8 sensors and to process the input signals of those sensors. The power supply outputs for the sensors and the signal inputs are protected against short-circuits and overloads in the 24 VDC power system. An MCI or an MPI module can be plugged into the MAI module for each input to ensure that each sensor is supplied with the correct power and that the associated signals are evaluated correctly. The bridge current, zero point, and sensitivity of the MPI modules can be adjusted by the use of the display and the adjusting elements on the MAI module (Attention: required only when a sensor is replaced and with manual presetting). Instead of sensors, switching contacts can also be connected to the MCI module for signal input via the sensor power supply terminal and the signal input. The signal to be evaluated now changes between the closed circuit state (approximately 4 mA) and the alarm signal state (approximately 15 mA).
SUPREMA
3-3
MSA
Functions: 8 slots for MPI, MCI, MFI or MSI modules. 1 slot for the MAR module (redundancy). Display and operating elements (bridge current, zero, sensitivity) 12-bit ADC, 11 channels, measurement of the signal voltage + sensor supply (24 VDC). Connection terminals for the sensors are on the MAT module (power supply, signals). Status LEDs for supply voltage, AD conversion, adjusting procedures. Sensors are monitored by evaluation of the measurement signals on the MDA module. Data transfer to the MDA module over the SPI bus. Euro card with a 96-way connector.
Up to 8 MAI modules can be installed in one rack for the evaluation of 64 input signals. MCI Module (Current Input Unit) When the following input signals are to be processed, one of these modules must be plugged into the MAI module for each input signal: MCI MCI BFE 0 ... 20 mA (BFE = Smoldering Fire Detection) (Signal processing for 0 ... 20 mA especially for DF 8501, DF 8502, DF 8510 fire detectors)
The module must be configured for the specific application. (see section 5.3.3 Configuration of the MCI/MCI BFE Module) Functions: Current/voltage source for active sensors with outputs of 0 (4) ... 20 mA Short-circuit current limitation for the power supply to the sensors (0.7 ... 2 A) Current limitation for the 0 ... 20 mA signal input (approximately 30 mA) Multiplier resistor, 100 Ohm (0 ... 20 mA = 0.0 ... 2.00 V) Signal input, 0 ... 20 mA, contact, or 0 ... 24 V
MPI Module (Passive Input Unit) Functions: Current/voltage source for passive sensors (constant current) Signal processing for passive catalytic or semiconductor sensors Sensor specific pre-adjustment of the zero point Preliminary setting of the signal amplification Setting of the constant current
MFI Module (FIRE INPUT UNIT) One MFI module must be plugged into the MAI module for each automatic or manual fire detector being monitored.The module must be configured for the relevant application. (see section 5.3.18 Configuration of the MFI Module)
3-4
SUPREMA
MSA
Functions: Power supply for up to 20 fire detectors. The output voltage of the module is limited to approximately 22 V and the output current is limited to approximately 42 mA. Evaluate the status of each fire detector. In normal operation, the module output voltage (UA) is approximately 0.4 V. In an alarm situation the output is approximately 1.6 V and for fault approximately 0 V. In an alarm situation the module is non-latching. If a latching function is required, it must be programmed in the SUPREMA settings.. The fire detectors connected have a latching function included.
Line monitor At the last fire detector, an END OF LINE resistor must be installed. In the case of short-circuit or failure, the output voltage (UA) of the module switches to approximately 0 V. Connection of a zener barrier or current separator is optional. Operation by an external power supply is optional. Earth current fault monitor of the line. An earth current fault is reported if the current is >100 mA between the terminals 3 and 4 at one side and terminal 5 at the other side. If there is an earth current fault, the output signal is approximately 0 V. Output for earth current fault The output terminal S1 has an open-collector transistor. The emitter of the transistor is connected with S5. If there is no failure, the pull-up resistor between S_1 and S_2 In the case of failure, the open-collector transistor is conducting. The maximum current is 250 mA, and the output is protected against current, voltage and temperature. Reset of the Latching Alarms The fire detectors connected can be reset by a separate RESET button. The RESET button is short-circuiting terminals 3 and 4, this makes the supply voltage of the fire detectors drop below the holding level.
MSI Module (SWITCH INPUT UNIT) One MSI module must be plugged into the MAI module for each external switch being monitored. The module must be configured for the relevant application. (see section 5.3.19 Configuration of the MSI Module) Functions: Power supply for the switches. The output voltage of the module is limited to approximately 14 V and the output current is limited to approximately 8 mA. Evaluate the status of the switches.
SUPREMA
3-5
MSA
In normal operation, the output voltage (UA) of the module is approximately 0,4 V, in an alarm situation approximately 1.6 V, and at failures approximately 0 V. In an alarm situation the module is non-latching. If a latching function is required, it must be programmed in the SUPREMA settings.
Line control At the last switch, an END OF LINE resistor must be installed. In addition, each switch must be provided with a resistor connected in series. If there is a short circuit or a failure, the output voltage switches to approximately 0 V. Operation by an external power supply is optional. MAR Module (Analog Redundant Unit) This module is used for the redundant processing of input signals in conjunction with a second, redundant MDA module. It is plugged into the MAI module. The analog output signals of the MPI or MCI module are digitised in parallel with the MAI module by a 12-bit ADC and transmitted over a separate SPI bus to the second MDA module. The function here is identical to that of the MAI module. MDA Module (Data Acquisition Unit) This module accepts the measurement values generated by the preceding Analog Input modules (MAI modules), of which there can be a maximum of 8. This provides the signal processing (calculates the mean) for a maximum of 64 sensors and the results are passed to the MCP module via the CAN bus. Measurement values from the preceding MAI modules are read via the SPI bus. automatic presetting of the bridge current, zero point and sensitivity in passive sensors with MPI module through the SPI-Bus (possible only in connection with MDA20) Measurement signals are processed in 100-ms cycles; the mean value is calculated over a period of 1 sec. Data is transmitted to the MCP module over the CAN bus. All supply voltages are monitored (EXT, INT and BAT). (A Power-Fail relay is activated when the operating voltage is < 19.2 V or when the status becomes different from that of the power-on condition) function at the moment not available. System Failure relay is activated when a processor error occurs. Euro card with a 96-way connector.
3.6.2 Data Processing/MCP Module (Central Processing Unit)

The data is processed by the Central Processing Unit (MCP Module). This module controls all system functions. The CPU communicates with the other system modules over one or more CAN buses. The measurement values are acquired via the MDA module, and the results of the signal evaluation are output via the MGO module (relay driver outputs) and the MDO module (Display).
3-6
SUPREMA
MSA
For higher safety requirements a second additional MCP modules can be integrated into the system for redundant processing and signal evaluation. Monitoring and control of all system functions Evaluation of the signals from up to 256 sensors Control of up to 512 switching outputs (relay driver outputs) Storage of the system parameters. Data output (MDO module, Graphic-LCD, MAO module 4 ... 20 mA, MGO module, relays, printer, etc.) Communication with the other modules over the CAN bus Storage of the history of the calibration data, measurement values, and temperature values Sensor calibration Linearisation of characteristic curves System Fail relay activated when a system malfunction occurs Euro card with a 96-way connector
3.6.3 Display + Operation/MDO Module (Display + Operating Unit)

The Display + Operation Unit (MDO module) is used to display information and for entering commands by hand. The system is operated from the MDO module; status messages are displayed (common alarm LEDs) and alarm messages are shown in plain text. The system is operated with cursor keys in conjunction with a Windows like user interface (configuration, performance of calibrations, etc.). Graphic display (240 x 64 pixels) with backlit LCD screen System operated from a keypad with 4 cursor keys, ESC and ENTER Individual function keys for horn acknowledgement and alarm reset Plain text messages for alarms and malfunctions at the sensors Graphic display of alarm and failure states (LED field) Bar graphs of the measurement values Display of the system status (common LEDs for alarms, signal failure, system failure, inhibit) PC control (data display, printer control) System clock (RTC) with backup battery 3 x RS 232, electrically isolated (laptop/PC/printer interface) System Failure Relay is activated when a system malfunction occurs Log file memory for diagnostics purposes with backup battery, divided into Calibration (4 calibration entries as well as 3 presettings per measuring point), System and signal occurrences (2000 entries in all), Changes (5000 entries), Supply voltage (200 entries) and Processor temperature (10 entries)
SUPREMA
3-7
MSA
3.6.4 Digital + Analog Output: MGO/MRC TS/MRO/MRO TS/MAO Modules

MGO Module: MRO 8 Module: MRC TS Module: MRO 8 TS Module: MRO 16 TS Module: GENERAL OUTPUT UNIT (40 switching outputs, 24 V/0.5 A) RELAY OUTPUT UNIT (rack relay module, 8 relays, 230 VAC/3 A contacts) RELAY CONNECTION Module (5 x MRO, 2 x 40 channels, ribbon cable) RELAY OUTPUT Module (rail-mount relay module, 8 relays, 230 VAC/3 A contacts) RELAY OUTPUT Module (rail-mount relay module, redundant, 16 relays, 230 VAC/3 A contacts) ANALOG OUTPUT Module (source 0 ... 20 mA/500 Ohms load/electrically isolated from system power supply)
MAO Module:
MGO Module (General Output Unit) The MGO module is provided to display alarm messages or other control signals. It receives the switching data for the relay output drivers from the MCP module via the CAN bus. The output is protected against short-circuits and overloads. Driver outputs 18 of the first MGO module present in the system are used to control the 8 common alarms (Alarms 14, horn, signal failure, inhibit, power). In redundant versions of the system, each of the two MGO modules controls 8 relays on the MRO 16 TS module (16 common alarm relays/redundant), the working contacts of these relays are connected in series. 40 relay driver outputs for relays, contactors, magnetic valves, lamps, or LEDs (24 V/0.3 A). The data is transmitted via the CAN bus from the MCP module. The System Failure Relay is activated when a system error occurs. Euro card with a 96-way connector.
MRC TS Module (Relay Connection) / MRO TS Module (Relay Output) The output signals of the MGO module are sent over a 40-way ribbon cable from the MUT module to the MRC TS module and from there over 20-way ribbon cables to the MRO TS relay modules. MAO Module (Analog Output) This module is used when analog outputs (max. 128) are installed in the system. Each MAO module has 8 analog signal outputs for 0(4) ... 20 mA current loops. The outputs are assigned directly to the signal inputs. (measuring point 17 = analog output 17). 0 ... 20 mA output drivers, measurement signal outputs (galvanic isolated from system) Measurement signal output: 4 ... 20 mA Measuring range overshoot: 22 mA INHIBIT: 3.0 mA Signal failure: 3.2 mA Fail dependent of Free A/Free B (see Tab. 5-8) Maximum load: 500 Ohm
3-8
SUPREMA
MSA
Data transmitted from the MDO module via the CAN bus A The System Failure Relay is activated when a processor error occurs Euro card with a 96-way connector
3.6.5 Power Supply, Bus Connections, Connecting Technique

MSP Module: MIB Module: MST Module: MAT Module: MAT TS Module: MUT Module: System Power Unit (power supply unit, 85 ... 265 VAC/24 VDC) Interconnection Board (rack, bus circuit board) System Terminals (RS 232, RES, ACK, LOCK, CAN) Analog Terminal Unit (terminals for sensors on the rack) ANALOG TERMINAL UNIT (terminals for sensors on mounting rail) Universal Terminals (40-way ribbon cable connection)
MSP Module (System Power Unit) Rack power supply unit, 150 VA Wide range input, 85 ... 265 VAC Output voltage, 24 VDC
MIB Module (Interconnection Board) This circuit board handles the system wiring of the rack. There are 15 slots for modules. Some of these slots are reserved only for certain module types. The modules installed in the rack can be connected by plugging in terminal modules (MAT module, MUT module, etc.) at the rear of the rack. Each rack clearly indicates which module can be used in each slot. Rack rear-panel wiring for 3 x MCP modules, 2 x MDA modules, 8 x MAI modules, and 2 x MGO modules Power supply for all modules (EXT, INT and BAT) Connections for 3 x 24 VDC power supplies, screw terminals (4 mm2) Provision for uninterruptible 24 VDC system power supply Data transfer between the modules over the CAN bus or the SPI bus System Failure Relay, 1 changeover contact, 3 connection terminals DIL switch for CAN rack ID and Baudrate 5 dedicated slots for 3 x MCP, 2 x MDA modules 10 undedicated slots for MAI, MAO, or MGO modules etc. Electrical connection of the inserted modules Terminal modules (MST, MAT, MUT etc.) are plugged into the rear of the MIB module
SUPREMA
3-9
MSA
MST Module (System Terminals) Connection module for system expansions. Installed at the rear of the rack. Ports: 2x CAN A, 2x CAN B, RS 232-A (PC operation), RS 232-B (serial printer, output from messages), RS 232-C (unprotected), alarm reset (RES), horn reset (HACK), relay inhibit (LOCR), password key switch (PSW).
MAT Module (Analog Terminal Unit) Terminals for sensors, 0 ... 20 mA outputs, etc. (1.5 mm2). 8 inputs, each with 5 terminal connections. Solder bridges for the 3-wire connection of passive catalytic sensors. Up to 4 MAT modules can be provided for the connection of up to 32 sensors.
MAT Module TS (Analog Terminal Unit) Similar to the MAT module but for installation on C-type or top-hat rail separate from the rack. A 40-way ribbon cable and a MUT module are required to connect it to the rack. MUT Module (Universal Terminals) This module is used to connect modules which are separate from the rack (MRC TS module, MAT TS module, etc.) to the module inserted in the rack by means of a 40-way ribbon cable. (Adapter plug, 96-way to 40-way.) Relay Outputs Up to 512 switching outputs can be controlled by the system via MGO modules (40 open collector drivers each). These switching outputs can be used to drive relays, magnetic valves, contactors, lamps, LEDs (24 VDC/0.3 A). If relay outputs are required, various relay modules can be used: MRO 8 module: MRC TS module: MRO 8 TS module: MRO 16 TS module: 8 common alarm relays on the rack relay connection, actuation of 5 relay modules 8 relays, installed on mounting rail 16 relays, redundant layout, installed on mounting rail
MRO 8 Module (Relay Output Unit: Common Alarms) This module must be used when relays alone are required for actuating common alarms and installation is to be accomplished directly in the rack. The module can be plugged directly into the MIB module (rear of the rack). It then makes the 8 common alarm relays available. If more relay outputs are to be provided, then MRO 8 TS modules are to be used together with the MRC TS module (installed on the mounting rail). Each relay has a changeover contact connected to screw terminals. Function of the Module The module is plugged into the rear of the rack. It is driven by the MGO module in the rack. 8 relays for giving common alarms, i.e., 1st alarm, 2nd alarm, 3rd alarm, 4th alarm, failure horn, inhibit, power supply. One changeover contact, connected to screw terminals, is provided for each relay.
3-10
SUPREMA
MSA
Standard design: Relay energised = no alarm. The relay is de-energised when an alarm is triggered at one or more measuring point (normally energised). Custom design: (not allowed for relevant safety applications) Relay de-energised = no alarm. The relay is energised when an alarm is triggered at one or more measuring point (normally de-energised). The relays can be inhibited via the MST module (to prevent alarms).
MRO 8 Module: Relay Assignment Relay 1: 1st Alarm Relay 2: 2nd Alarm Relay 3: 3rd Alarm Relay 4: 4th Alarm Relay 5: signal failure (sensor) Relay 6: horn Relay 7: Inhibit Relay 8: power supply failure MRC TS Module (Relay Connection Module) This module is used when relay modules separate from the rack are installed on a mounting rail. An MRC TS module is used to connect up to 5 TS Relay modules. The relay power supply and the ribbon cable, which are required for the control of the relays by the MGO module, are attached to this MRC TS module. It is possible to control 5 MRO modules (with alternatively 8 or 16 Relays each). The MRC TS module is connected to the MGO module over a 40-way ribbon cable (2 for the redundant version) and a rack mounted MUT module. In the redundant version each 2 MGO module are connected via 2 MUT modules and 2 ribbon cables to the MRC TS module. Connections for the relay power supply (3 x 24 VDC) Connections for relay inhibiting Bridge (BR1) for the selected type of inhibit (normally energised/normally de-energised)
MRO 8 TS Module (Relay Output Unit: Non-redundant) This module is provided when not only common alarms but also other messages are required. Each relay has a changeover contact (230 VAC/3 A). The module makes 8 relays available, each with its own changeover contact. The relays are controlled by an MGO module, operating via the MRC TS module. MRO 8 TS Module: Function of the Module The module is controlled by an MGO module operating via the MRC module. 8 relays for alarms or control functions. 1 changeover contact per relay (230 VAC/3 A) connected to terminals. The relays can be inhibited by the LOCK function (no alarm). The LOCK function can be controlled via the MRC TS module.
SUPREMA
3-11
MSA
MRO 8 TS Module: Relay Assignment The first 8 outputs of the system are allocated to the common alarm signals. The other outputs can be assigned to any desired signal. Relay 1: Relay 2: Relay 3: Relay 4: Relay 5: Relay 6: Relay 7: Relay 8: 1st Alarm 2nd Alarm 3rd Alarm 4th Alarm signal failure (sensor) horn Inhibit power supply failure
MRO 16 TS Module (Relay Output Module (Redundant)) For systems that are designed for redundancy, the MRO 16 TS module is used. To transmit a message, the working contacts of 2 relays are connected in series and connected to 2 terminals. The relays are controlled by different MGO modules and are configured in such a way that the relay is de-energised when an alarm is triggered (normally energised). MRO 16 TS Module: Module Function Relay module for a redundant system. 2 x 8 relays for alarms or control functions. The module is controlled by 2 MGO modules, operating via the MRC module. The two working contacts of 2 relays are connected in series on the MRO 16 TS module and connected to 2 terminals. In an alarm situation, one or both contacts open. Relays energised = no alarm. The relays are de-energised when an alarm is triggered at one or more measuring points. Controlled by 2 separate MGO modules. Relays can be inhibited via the MRC TS module (no alarm).
MRO 16 TS Module: Relay Assignment The first 8 outputs of the system are allocated to the common alarm signals. The other outputs can be assigned to any desired signal. Relay 1: Relay 2: Relay 3: Relay 4: Relay 5: Relay 6: Relay 7: Relay 8: 1st Alarm 2nd Alarm 3rd Alarm 4th Alarm signal failure (sensor) horn Inhibit power supply failure
3-12
SUPREMA
MSA
3.7 System Power Supply

The system is supplied with 24 VDC Three pairs of terminals are provided, so that the power can be taken from 3 different sources (redundancy). The supplies are functionally equivalent, but the power draw is prioritised as follows: 1st = EXT, 2nd = INT, 3rd = BAT. The changeover from one source to another is accomplished by hardware means in the system modules. When an external power pack or battery supply is used, the power should be filtered through an appropriate EMC [electromagnetic compatibility] filter. The EMC and low-voltage guidelines should be followed. During the operation of SUPREMA Systems with UPS or battery back-up, care should be taken to ensure that no undefined low voltage operation (U < 19V DC) can arise or else it can have adverse effects on the System Functions. If, for example, a battery is connected directly to the SUPREMA and the normal 24 VDC supply unit fails, then the battery become the power supply of the system. If the 24 VDC supply unit is not restored promptly and no external action is taken, there is the danger of - deep discharge of the battery - permanent damage and destruction of the battery. In order to protect the battery and the SUPREMA against damage, an additional deep discharge contactor component is required in the corresponding 24V feeder (e.g. deep discharge contactor C1900-TLS, Mentzer or similar).
3.7.1 EXT Terminals (External Power Supply, 24 VDC)

Connection for voltage supply from an external power supply unit; power is sent to all units in the rack. Required when a redundant power supply is provided or when the internal rack power supply is not sufficient to operate all of the sensors. Maximum supply current of 20 A for one rack.
3.7.2 INT Terminals (MSP Module, 24 VDC, 150 W)

Connection for voltage supply from an internal rack power supply or an external power supply unit. Power supplied to all rack units and the sensors. The internal power supply unit (MSP module) has a supply voltage input of 85 ... 265 VAC (47 ... 63 Hz) or 120 ... 330 VDC. If the rack power supply unit cannot supply enough power, the sensors, modules or relays must be supplied by external power supply units. The internal rack power supply can be omitted if, because of a high power requirement or a redundant design, the power is being supplied by an external power supply via the INT terminals. Maximum supply current of 20 A.
SUPREMA
3-13
MSA
3.7.3 BAT Terminals (Backup Battery Power Supply)

Backup battery power supply for all units of a rack (20 ...28 VDC). If the internal and/or the external power supply fails, the system receives its power here. Maximum supply current of 20 A.
3.7.4 Features of the System Power Supply

The customer is responsible for providing a safety cut-out (maximum rack power, 480 W). The 85 ... 256 VAC is supplied via screw terminals directly on the power supply unit. The system is supplied with an operating voltage of 24 VDC (19.2 ... 32 VDC). 3 pairs of terminals for the connection of three 24 VDC power supply sources (EXT, INT, BAT) are provided on the Interconnection Board (MIB module). The EXT, INT and BAT voltages are supplied to each system module. If all three voltages (EXT, INT and BAT) are being supplied, only one of them is allowed through to supply the module. The prioritisation of this connection is as follows: 1st = EXT, 2nd = INT, 3rd = BAT. Example: If the EXT, INT and BAT voltages are all present, it is the EXT voltage that is passed through. The voltages required for the individual modules are obtained in the modules themselves from the 24 V. The power requirement that must be met is derived from the type and number of sensors connected and from the components installed in the system. The maximum power provided for one rack is 480 W (maximum current of 20 A). The MDA module measures all the input voltages and can generate error messages, which can be shown on the display unit. In addition, a POWER FAIL relay is deenergised when the status of the system power supply changes.
3.7.5 Power Supply Plans

Three (functionally equivalent) pairs of terminals (EXT, INT, BAT) are provided on the MIB module card for supplying power to the system and the sensors. All of the system cards and the sensors can be supplied from each of these connections. A voltage changeover switch is provided on each system card, which ensures that only one of the voltages being applied is actually accepted. Various power supply plans are available to suit the number and type of sensors and/or the required degree of redundancy in the power supply. If the internal rack power supply unit is not sufficient to power all the sensors, an external unit must be provided. The internal unit must then be disconnected. A redundant power supply is then provided by external units via the BAT or INT terminals. Supply Plan A: Internal Power Supply Unit All of the units of the system and the sensors are supplied by the rack power supply unit (INT terminals). This variant is used when no power supply redundancy is required and the power which can be supplied by the unit installed in the rack (150 W) is sufficient to supply all of the rack modules and the connected sensors.
3-14
SUPREMA
MSA
Supply Plan B: External Power Supply Unit All modules of the system housed in the rack and the sensors are supplied by the external power supply unit (EXT terminals). This variant is used when no redundancy is required in the power supply and the power of the unit installed in the rack (150 W) is not sufficient to supply all of the system modules and the connected sensors. A maximum of 20 A can be supplied across the terminals (480 W system power). Supply Plan C: Internal Power Supply Unit + Battery All units of the system and the sensors are supplied by the rack power supply unit (INT terminals) or by the backup power supply (BAT terminals). This variant is used when there must be redundancy in the power supply and the power of the unit installed in the rack (150 W) is sufficient for all rack modules and the connected sensors. Supply Plan D: External Power Supply Unit + Battery All modules of the system and the sensors are supplied by the external power supply unit (EXT terminals) or by the backup power supply (BAT terminals). This variant is used when the power supply must be redundant and the power that can be supplied by the unit installed in the rack is not sufficient to supply the system modules and the connected sensors. A maximum of 10 A can be supplied across the terminals (240 W system power). Voltage Change-Over Each module has a switch, which allows one of the available voltages (EXT, INT, BAT) through to the module. The electronic components of the card and possibly the sensors connected to it are supplied with this voltage. Function: If all the voltages are present, EXT is passed through. If EXT fails, INT is connected. If INT fails, BAT is connected.
The voltage change over is delay free.

Power Supply Type A B C D E BAT F G EXT EXT INT INT BAT EXT EXT EXT BAT BAT EXT INT BAT EXT Voltages Present INT Voltage Passed Through INT EXT INT
Table 3-1: Voltage Changeover
SUPREMA
3-15
MSA
Overload Control If the 24 V power supply collapses because of excessive demand from the connected sensors, the power supply to the heads is cut off. The switching threshold for the shutoff of the sensor supply is approximately 19.2 V. The system modules (MCP module, MDA module, MDO module etc.) can work on a minimum operating voltage as low as approximately 12 V. The supply to the sensors is turned on in a staggered manner based on slot locations. As a result, the power supply during the power-on phase is not overloaded as a result of the relatively large initial current taken by the sensors.
3-16
SUPREMA
MSA
4. Operation of the System

4.1 Operation
4.1.1 General
The modular control systems user interface is the integrated operation/display unit (MDO module see section 4.2). This unit displays alarms and warnings as well as system parameters. Connecting the operating unit to a PC permits a user friendly operator interface. Both the PC program and the SUPREMA system use window-based operating platforms. The input fields are set up as selection fields as much as possible, with all known inputs displayed. Selection is cursor-controlled, which makes use of the integrated operation/display unit very easy.
4.2 Integrated Operation/Display unit MDO

4.2.1

General
The integrated operation/display unit includes the following display and operation components: LCD with 240 x 64 resolution 8 keys 8 LEDs
The LCD screen has 8 rows with 40 characters per row. Character height is approximately 4 mm. The menus and output lists are structured so that operation is similar to that on a PC.
Figure 4-1: Integrated operation/Display unit-MDO Module
SUPREMA
4-1
MSA
4.2.2
Displaying and cancelling messages
The messages displayed using LEDs are divided into messages that affect the whole system (SYSTEM) and messages that affect the measurement signals (SIGNAL). SYSTEM: POWER: FAIL: INHIBIT: on: blinking: SIGNAL: AL 1AL 4: FAIL: collective messages for the input alarms (each input can trigger up to four alarms) collective message for specific input problems (measurement values that are over the full-scale range, measurement values below the measurement range and signal failures) Alarm types are latching or non-latching (also see Measure Points). Non-latching alarms: As soon as a new alarm is triggered, the corresponding LED flashes at a frequency of 0.5 Hz. Pressing the ACKNL key makes the LED change to steady state. When the signal is within the limits again, the LED will be extinguished, regardless of whether the alarm has been acknowledged or not. For non-latching alarms, the RESET key has no effect. Latching alarms: As soon as a new alarm is triggered, the corresponding LED flashes at a frequency of 0.5 Hz. Pressing the ACKNL key makes the LED change to steady state. When the signal is within the limits again, the LED remains at steady state if the alarm has been acknowledged, or in the flashing state if the alarm has not yet been acknowledged. If the signal is within the limits again and the alarm has been acknowledged, the LED is extinguished by pressing the RESET key. If the signal is still beyond the limit, or if the alarm has not yet been acknowledged, pressing the RESET has no effect. Signals that are above full-scale or signal failures, are latched alarms. All signals that have exceeded the limit values are latching alarms. Signals below the measurement range are nonlatched. If an audible alarm device is connected to the system, it sounds as soon as a new alarm is triggered. It continues to sound even when the alarm condition no longer exists. Pressing the ACKNL key silences the horn, regardless of whether or not the alarm condition still exists. The RESET key has no effect on the horn. Note: When a redundant system is used, the RESET resp. ACKNL buttons have to be pressed for at least 1 second. one or more inputs is/are inhibited or require calibration one or more output(s) is/are locked power supply on/off system-specific error (e.g. defective CPU)
4-2
SUPREMA
MSA
4.2.3
Entering System Parameters
Establishing the Operator Dialogue The following keys on the front of the control system are used to establish the operator dialogue through the LCD screen: Back Forward Up Down ESC Cancel Execute
At the top of the screen is a menu list, in which a menu item can be selected using the or cursor keys and then pressing the key. Press ESC to return to the higher level menu. If the menu bar contains more entries than can be displayed on the MDO, this is shown with additional arrows in the first ( ) and last positions ( ) in the menu bar. There are three types of menu options: Display a submenu Returns to the previous menu Opens an input menu
A menu can contain input fields, output fields, and buttons. Buttons are enclosed in square brackets for easy recognition (e.g., [OK]). The , , and cursor keys are used to navigate between the elements of a menu.
MeasurePoints RelayOutputs System Sen A Language: English Date/Time: 09/20/2007 08:16:09 Config.-PW: ________ Confirm.: ________ Param.-PW: ________ Confirm.: ________ Maint.-PW: ________ Confirm.: ________ Signal if Inhibited pass [OK] [Cancel]
Figure 4-2: Menu list and input menu
To open an input field for data entry, select it using the cursor keys and then press the key. If the field is write-protected, it cannot be opened. There are two ways to leave the field: pressing to accept the changed field contents or pressing ESC to cancel them. Pressing buttons initiates an action. To press a button, select it with the cursor keys and then press the key. Press ESC to return from a menu back to the menu list. The following types of fields can displayed: Selection Fields Selection fields contain lists of possible values that can be selected using and .
SUPREMA
4-3
MSA
Number Fields Number fields can contain integers or decimal numbers. The number values can be increased or decreased by pressing or . For decimal numbers, and can be used to change the position of the decimal point. For integers, the value can be multiplied with and with 10 and divided by 10. Text Fields In text fields the operator can enter text and choose between overwrite and insert mode. When the field is opened, it defaults to overwrite mode. In this mode, and move between the character positions and and select the desired characters. Pressing and simultaneously switches to insert mode. In this mode, pressing inserts a space at the cursors position and moves the character under the cursor and all characters to the right of the cursor one position to the right. Pressing moves the character under the cursor and all characters to the right of the cursor one position to the left. Pressing or leaves insert mode. Text fields can be horizontal "rolling", if the maximum possible text length is greater than the displayed field length. Display Fields Display fields simply display information and are not affected by the cursor keys. Check Boxes Check boxes represent options that can be enabled or disabled. Pressing the key switches between enabled and disabled. [x] [ ] enabled check box disabled check box
Option Fields An option field represents an individual choice within a set of mutually exclusive choices. Pressing in a disabled option field enables it and disables the previously enabled field. List Displays List displays simply display information. No parameters can be entered The cursor keys can be used to scroll through list displays. Press ESC to leave the list display. In some lists (e.g. System-Event-List), additional information on the selected item can be displayed with . Overview of Operator Keys
Key Name Back Function in an input field Move back one character position, move decimal point to the left Forward Move forward one field Move forward one character position, move decimal point to the right Up Move to field above Previous selection value or higher number value Down Move to field below Next selection value or lower number value Cancel Without changing the menu list Leave field without changing Execute Open current field to change, Accept changed field contents execute field function (button) and leave field Function in a menu Move back one field
ESC
Table 4-1: Overview of operator keys
4-4
SUPREMA
MSA
4.3 Operation menu structure

The operation menu is divided into four submenus: Measure Setup Maintain Diagnosis
These submenus can be called up by selecting the corresponding menu item. The Measure submenu is automatically activated at system startup. If another menu is active and there is no operator activity for 5 minutes, the system returns to menu mode. If an alarm occurs, alarm mode is automatically activated.
4.3.1
Access authorisation
In the Setup and Maintain submenus, data can be displayed and entered and certain actions can be initiated by pressing buttons (e.g., starting a calibration procedure). However, the last two items require satisfactory access authorisation by entering a password or introducing a key into a switch, if so equipped. If the user wishes to change a value and press a restricted access button and when the required authorisation is not yet issued, he must enter an appropriate password or activate the key switch. Password authorisation remains in effect until measurement mode is activated either through operator input or automatically due to inactivity. Pressing the key switch will be requested for each data input. The system is delivered with the default password AUER for all three password levels. We recommend that the customer changes the passwords immediately. All of the operator functions are available through both control units, the integral operation/ display unit and the PC, if connected. However, certain actions such as changing parameters or calibration cannot be performed simultaneously through both control units. Therefore, to perform an action of that type, modification authorisation will be required and verified. It will remain exclusive for that control unit until measurement mode is activated either through operator input or automatically due to inactivity, after which it will again be possible to switch between the control units. If modification authorisation is at the PC and there has not been any communication between the PC and SUPREMA system for more than 5 minutes, modification authorisation will be released automatically. In the Measure and Diagnosis submenus, data is only displayed, and so there is no access control.
4.3.2
Menu Measure
When system configuration is complete, the Measure menu for displaying measurement data will appear automatically when the system is started. For display of measurement values, it is possible to choose from three display types in the menu list: List Bar LED
Displayed measurement data and state values are updated at intervals.
SUPREMA
4-5
MSA
If the operator is in the menu list and does not hit any key for 5 seconds, the value display will cycle to a picture. To scroll through the picture content manually press the key to enable and . Press ESC to return to the menu list. Choice of display type is independent of whether the device is operating in measurement or alarm mode. The system always returns to List display after a restart. Measure Mode During normal operation the system is in measure mode, which displays all of the inputs available in the system. Contrary to the common alarm LED at the MDO front panel, the display of failures does not flash. Measurement values that are over the full-scale range, or signal failures, are latched. Measurement values below the measurement range behave as if they were non-latching alarms. Alarm Mode As soon as alarms are triggered, only the inputs in alarm state are displayed, arranged by input number. Contrary to the alarm LEDs at the MDO front panel, the display of alarms does not flash. Measurement values that are over the full-scale range will trigger all alarms caused by values exceeding the limits. Alarm types are latching or non-latching. All signals that have exceeded the limit values are latching alarms. It is possible during measure mode to change between alarm list display and list display by pressing the ENTER button. If during list display new alarms are triggered, alarm list display is not switched automatically. In addition, the number of measuring points in Alarm in each of the three view types is shown top right on the display in Alarm operation, example #AL: 1 Non-latching alarms As soon as a new alarm is triggered, it is displayed according to the three display types described below. When the signal is within the limits again, the alarm is no longer displayed, regardless of whether the alarm has been acknowledged or not. For non-latching alarms, the RESET key has no effect. Latching alarms As soon as a new alarm is triggered, it is displayed according to the three display types described below. When the signal is within the limits again, the alarm continues being displayed, because it is latching. If the signal is within the limits again and the alarm has been acknowledged, the alarm display is stopped by pressing the RESET key. If the signal is still beyond the limit, or if the alarm has not yet been acknowledged, pressing the RESET key has no effect. List Display In this display mode, the current input data is displayed in a list. If more inputs are available than can be displayed at the same time, flashing arrows appear to the far right of the title bar ( and/or ) The portion of the list to be displayed can be selected by the operator using the vertical or horizontal scroll keys. Switching between active and inactive CAN channel is also possible in redundant systems. First select list view and press the button. Then press the and buttons simultaneously to switch between the active CAN channels (A to B or vice versa)
4-6
SUPREMA
MSA
List Bar LED Menu #AL: 1 A No. known value metered value status 1 MS-001 0.0% LEL measure . 2 MS-002 0.0% LEL measure 3 MS-003 49.5% LEL 1 2 3 AL 4 MS-004 0.0% LEL measure 5 MS-005 0.0% LEL measure 6 MS-006 0.0% LEL measure
Figure 4-3: List display (with a measuring point in Alarm)
The following input data is shown in this display:

Number of the input in the system. This number is set by the System and cannot be changed by the user. The customer-defined input description is displayed here. Tag Value Numerical value and dimension of measurement. The measured values are displayed in intervals, as long as they are w ithin the measuring range. If the measuring range is exceeded, the highest value reached is retained. In the case of signal failure or an alarm supression (during w arm-up period of specific sensor types), dashes are displayed instead of the measured value. Status Current status of the input The status is updated at intervals and the follow ing values can be displayed: - Measure - Calib. (calibrating) - inhibit - Overflow (Measured value above full scale) - Signal Err. (Measuring value below measurement range, measuring value missing) - PS error (presetting error) - For specific sensor types, texts can be freely defined for special states. These are then labelled w ith "F: (e.g. "F:OpticErr"). The property is then equivalent to "Signal error". - Suppressed (alarm suppression during w arm-up period of specific sensor types) - 1st to 4th alarms - Free (sensor has not yet been installed) No
Bar Display This display shows the measurement values as vertical bars, where each bar represents the relative measurement value of an input with respect to full scale. The value range that can be displayed is 0 ... 100%. The corresponding input number is shown under each bar.
List Bars LEDs Menu
F 1
Figure 4-4: Bar display
F 2 3 4 5 6
S 7 8
SUPREMA
4-7
MSA
Measurement values are normally displayed as solid bars. In error-free operation with no alarms, they are grey. Any alarm will cause the corresponding bar to change to black. When a state message occurs for an input, the affected bar is shown only as an outline and there is an identification letter for the state value. Legend: L C F O S Inhibit calibrating Fault (measuring value below range, measuring value missing) measurement range exceeded (overflow) Alarm suppressed (during the warm-up period of special sensor types) If an input is selected using the cursor keys and the key then the data for the selected input, at the moment the key was pressed, is displayed for as long as the key is held down. There is no graphic updating of input data during this time. LED display This display shows the state values of the inputs as LEDs. Each LED column has the corresponding input number under it. : Off (not inhibited, no alarm, no failure) : On (inhibited, alarm, failure) If an input is not yet configured no LEDs are displayed in that column.
List Bars Inhibit. 4th Al. 3rd Al. 2nd Al. 1st Al. Failure 1
Figure 4-5: Display as LED Field
LEDs Menu
4.3.3
Menu Setup
Using the Setup menu, the operator can set parameters for inputs and relay outputs, as well as other system parameters. There is an access control. Although data can be retrieved and displayed, changing and activating of actions is possible only after entering the parameterisation password or pressing the key switch. The menu includes five menu items: Measure point Relay output System Sensors Printer
4-8
SUPREMA
MSA
4.3.3.1
Submenu Measure Points
This menu shows all of the parameters that describe an input. Input parameters can be viewed and changed here. The Measure Point menu is divided into three submenus: Information Sensor data Alarms
MeasurePoints RelayOutputs System Sen A Measure Point No.: 13 Inhibit[ ]/DO[ ] [Information] [Sensor Data] [Alarm] Tag: QM013 Marking: D-7600 Sensor Ser. No.: 1234 Install. Area: Pump 5 [OK] [Cancel] [Clear]
Figure 4-6: Measure Point Setup menu
The following paragraphs describe the functions of the individual menu items. The first items discussed are those that are identical in all three submenus. Measure Point No. Field type: Selection field The field contains a list of all configured inputs. It also contains inputs which no longer physically exist, but whose parameters are still stored in the system. Those inputs are only removed from selection when the user deletes them in the Measure Point menu. After an input number is selected, the rest of the menu is filled, if that input has already been configured. If an input number is selected that has not been configured before, the settings from the last displayed input remain and are used as the preliminary settings for the new input. This makes it easy to copy the settings from one input to another. If an input is displayed that has not yet been configured, default values are used as the preliminary settings for the input of certain fields. This selection field can be accessed without a key switch or password if an input is entered for which input parameters have already been set. If a number is entered that has not been used before, authorisation by means of password or key switch is required. All parameter changes using the menu items described below apply to the inputs selected in that field. Inhibit Field type: Check box If this check box is enabled, the selected inputs cannot trigger alarms. DO (Disable Output) Field type: Check box If this checkbox is enabled, assigned outputs will not be activated in the event of an alarm or failure of selected measuring points!! During a multiple assignment (Voting), the corresponding measuring point is ignored when assessing the state. If this field is enabled, at least one of the measuring points, the inhibit LED on the MDO as well as the common alarm relay 'Inhibit' blink with a frequency of approx. 1 Hz.
SUPREMA
4-9
MSA
Information, Sensor Data, Alarms Field type: Button Pressing the appropriate button will display the corresponding submenu. Information submenu The Information submenu contains general data on the selected input. Tag Field type: text field Enter a customer-specific designation for the selected input Marking Field type: text field Enter a customer-specific description for the selected input Sensor Serial No. Field type: text field Enter the serial number of the input device for the selected input. Installation Area Field type: text field Enter a customer-specific description of the installation location of the input device for the selected input. OK Field type: Button Press this button to accept the settings entered in all three submenus for the selected input. After the button is pressed, the parameters are immediately checked to see if they are valid. If the parameters are valid, they become part of the systems parameter set. If not valid, a warning appears. Cancel Field type: Button Press this button to cancel the settings entered in all three submenus for the selected input. Clear Field type: Button Press this button to delete all of the parameters for the selected input. The input will then return to the way it was before its first configuration. Default values are used as the preliminary settings for the input of certain fields. The delete function will not work if the input is being calibrated. If an input is contributing to the setup parameters of a relay output, those parameters do not change after the input parameters have been deleted.
4-10
SUPREMA
MSA
Sensor data submenu The Sensor data submenu contains settings for the sensor at the selected input.
MeasurePoints RelayOutputs System Sen A Measure Point No.: 13 Inhibit[ ]/DO[ ] [Information] [Sensor Data] [Alarms] Sensor Type: GD10 Dimension: % LEL Range: 0100 Meas. Gas: Methane ValveZero gas: Air No.:___ Test Gas: Methane No.:___
Figure 4-7: Sensor data submenu
Sensor Field type: Selection field The field contains a list of recognised input device types. Set the type of device used for the selected input. Dimensions Field type: Selection field The field contains a list of dimensions of measurement. Set the dimension of measurement for the selected input. Range Field type: Selection field The field contains a list if measurement ranges appropriate for the sensors. Set the measurement range that applies for the selected input. Meas. Gas Field type: Selection field The field contains a list of gases that can be measured with the recognised gas sensors. Set the gas that will be measured with the sensor for the selected input. Zero gas Field type: Selection field The field contains a list of Zero gases that are used to calibrate gas sensors. Set the zero gas that will be used to calibrate the gas sensor for the selected input. (Zero gas) valve No. Not available at present. Test Gas Field type: Selection field The field contains a list of Test gases used to calibrate sensors. Set the test gas that will be used to calibrate the sensor at the selected input.
SUPREMA
4-11
MSA
(Test gas) Valve No. Field type: Selection Not available at present. Alarms submenu In the Alarms submenu, parameters can be set for up to four alarm levels for the selected input. A limit value can be set for each alarm to trigger either on a rising or falling input signal. In addition, relay outputs can be selected to operate if an alarm occurs. For every alarm, the latching or non-latching parameters can be set.
MeasurePoints RelayOutputs System Sen A Measure Point No.: 13 Inhibit[ ]/DO[ ] [Information] [Sensor Data] [Alarms] Upper Latched Limit Relay 1st Al.: [X] [ ] 20.000 % LEL ___ 2nd Al.: [X] [ ] 30.000 % LEL ___ 3rd Al.: [X] [ ] 40.000 % LEL ___ 4th Al.: [X] [ ] 50.000 % LEL ___
Figure 4-8: Alarms submenu
Limit Field type: decimal number A limit value can be set here for each alarm at the selected input to trigger on either a rising or falling input signal. In this field, it is also possible to deactivate an alarm. Press the key until only zeros are displayed in the field. If the key is now pressed, the alarm is deactivated, which is indicated by the contents of the field being deleted. Upper (Rising/Falling Alarm) Field type: Check box For each alarm at the selected input, set whether the alarm will trip when the signal is rising or falling. If this check box is enabled it is a rising alarm, if not checked, it is a falling alarm. Latched Field type: Check box The alarm is latching if the check box is enabled, if not, it is non-latching. This feature has an effect on the behaviour of the MDO front panel LEDs, what is shown in the Measure menu, and on the relay outputs assigned to an alarm. Relay Field type: Selection These fields contain a list of available relay outputs. Set relay outputs, that will be used, for the individual alarms at the selected input. Link to this after selecting a relay output in a relay output assignment menu.
4-12
SUPREMA
MSA
Relay output assignment menu This menu is not a submenu of the Measure Point menu, but rather an independent menu that can only be reached from the Measure Point menu. It is used primarily to assign relay outputs that will be used if there is an alarm, for the individual alarms at the input selected in the Measure Point menu. In addition, this menu also provides the same function as the RelayOutput menu. The top three rows of the menu cannot be accessed here, and are intended only for orientation. The behaviour of a relay output depends on its parameter settings and the settings of the appropriate measure points (see section 6.4.2 Behaviour of the Relay Outputs).
MeasurePoints RelayOutputs System Sen A Measure Point No.: 13 Inhibit[ ]/DO[ ] [Information] [Sensor Data] [Alarms] Relay: 9 closed circuit Voting: 1/ 1 Tag: RL009 blink [ ] new Alarm [ ] Chan. 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Al. Fail Inh. 13 [X] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [OK] [Cancel] [Clear]
Figure 4-9: Relay output assignment menu
The functions of the individual menu elements are described below: Relay Field type: Selection field This field contains a list of all available relay outputs. After an output number is selected, the rest of the menu is filled, if settings have already been entered for that output. It also contains inputs which longer physically exist, but whose parameters are still stored in the system. Those inputs are only removed from selection when the user deletes them in the Measure Point menu. After an output number is selected, the rest of the menu is filled, if settings have already been entered for that output. If an output number is selected that has not been configured before, the settings from the last displayed output remain and are used as the preliminary settings for the new output. This makes it easy to copy the settings from one output to another. If an output is displayed that has not yet been configured, default values are used as the preliminary settings for the input of certain fields. This input field can be accessed without a key switch or password if an output is entered for which parameters have already been set. If a number is entered that has not been used before, authorisation by means of password or key switch is required. When first opened, the field contains the relay output that was last selected in the Measure Point menu. All parameter changes using the menu elements described below apply to the relay output selected in this field.
SUPREMA
4-13
MSA
Chan. (Channel) Field type: Selection field The field contains a list of all configured inputs. When opened, it contains the input that was last selected in the Measure Point menu. The following conditions, which must be met in order to set the relay output selected in the Relay field, apply to the input displayed here. Al. 1-4 (1st-4th Alarm) Field type: Check box In this field, select the alarms that will cause the selected relay output to trigger, for the input selected in the Channel field. When this submenu is opened, the cursor is on the alarm that was displayed in the Measure Point menu before this submenu was selected. Fail Field type: Check box If this condition is set, the selected relay output is activated when an error (fault) occurs for the input displayed in the Channel field. Inhibit Field type: Check box If this condition is set, the selected relay output is activated when the input displayed in the Channel field is inhibited. Voting (Alarm Logic) Field type: Integer The value entered in this field applies to the configuration conditions described above. Optional state combinations (alarm, fail, and inhibit) can be formed when the selected relay output is configured. Up to 256 configuration conditions per relay output are permitted. The number value selected in this field determines how many of the conditions configured in the control boxes must be met for the selected relay output to be activated. The number of conditions entered in the check boxes is displayed in the field beside the voting to be configured. The following types of links can be formed in this manner: Single link: (1-out-of-1): Exactly one condition is set, and the value of 1 is entered as the voting. OR link: (1-out-of-m) Multiple conditions are set, and the value of 1 is entered as the voting, i.e., if any one or more of the set conditions are met, the relay output will be activated. Parameters for a global alarm or common alarms can be set in this manner. AND link: (m-out-of-m) The value entered for the voting corresponds to the number of set conditions, i.e. all of the set conditions must be met for the relay output to be activated. Voting link: (n-out-of-m) If m conditions are set, and the value of n is entered as the voting, then the selected relay output will only be activated if n out of the m conditions are met.
4-14
SUPREMA
MSA
Normal (energised) Field type: Selection Set the operating mode for the selected relay output: Tag Field type: text Enter a customer-specific designation for the selected relay output. Flashing: Element type: Checkbox If this field is set, the relay flashes at a frequency of approx. 1 Hz when activated. New Alarm (i. e. actual alarm) Field type: Check box If this field is set, the relay output selected can be set to normal state by pressing the <ACKNL> key in spite of the value having been outside the limits. OK Field type: Button Pressing this button validates the settings entered for the selected relay output. After the button is pressed, the voting settings must not be higher than the number of conditions set in the check boxes. If this is the case, they become part of the systems parameter set. If not, a warning appears. Cancel Field type: Button Pressing this button cancels the settings entered for the selected relay output. Clear Field type: Button Pressing this button deletes all of the parameters for the selected relay output. The output then returns to the way it was before its first configuration. Normally energised (Relay is energised) Normally de-energised (Relay is de-energised) When having been set, the relay driver output gives out a low signal (normally energised) When having been set, the relay driver output gives out a high signal (normally deenergised)
4.3.3.2
Submenu Relay outputs
This menu displays all of the parameters set for a relay output. Parameter values for relay outputs can be viewed and changed here. The functions of this menu are similar to the Relay Output assignment menu described in the previous section. There, starting from a particular input, a connection to a relay output was made. In this menu, the setting conditions are configured starting from a particular relay output. The behaviour of a relay output depends on its parameter settings and the settings of the appropriate measure points (see section 6.4.2 Behaviour of the Relay Outputs).
SUPREMA
4-15
MSA
MeasurePoints RelayOutputs System Sen A Relay: 9 closed circuit Voting: 1/ 1 [ ] Tag: RL009 blk.[ ] new Alarm[ ] Chan. 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Al. Fail Inh. 12 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 13 [X] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 14 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [OK] [Cancel] [Clear]
Figure 4-10: Relay output menu
The functions of the individual menu elements are described below: Relay Field type: Selection field This field contains a list of available relay outputs. As the first 8 relay outputs of the system are tied to the common messages, the first relay output which can be configured is output No. 9. It also contains outputs which are no longer physically exist, but whose parameters are still stored in the system. Those inputs are only removed from selection when the user deletes them in the menu. After an output number is selected, the rest of the menu is filled, if settings have already been entered for that output. This input field can be accessed without a key switch or password if an output is entered for which parameters have already been set. If a number is entered that has not been used before, authorisation by means of password or key switch is required. This makes it easy to copy the settings from one input to another. If an input is displayed that has not yet been configured, default values are use as the preliminary settings for the input of the certain fields. This selection field can be accessed without a key switch or password if an input is entered for which input parameters have already been set. If a number is entered that has not been used before, authorisation by means of password or key switch is required. All parameter changes using the menu items described below apply to the selected relay outputs in that field. Normally energised/Normally de-energised Field type: Selection field Set the operating mode for the selected relay output: Normally energised: The relay output delivers in the set-condition (Alarm, Failure) a LOW-Signal, this is called a connected relay is not energised. (The Normally energised principle) Normally de-energised: The relay output delivers in the set-condition (Alarm, Failure) a HIGH-Signal, this is called a connected relay is energised. (The Normally de-energised principle) Tag Field type: text field Enter a customer-specific designation for the selected relay output.
4-16
SUPREMA
MSA
Blk. (flashing): Element type: Checkbox If this field is set, the relay flashes at a frequency of approx. 1 Hz when activated. New Alarm (i. e. actual alarm) Field type: Check boxes If this field is set, the relay output selected can be set to normal state by pressing the <ACKNL> key in spite of the value having been outside the limits. , Field type: Button These buttons are used by the operator to select the required portion of the displayed configuration matrix. In the configuration matrix, it is possible to set the conditions for each input (1st to 4th alarms, Fail, Lock) that must be met for the selected relay output to be activated. Chan. (Channel) Field type: Selection field The field contains a list of all configured inputs. When opened, it contains the input that was last selected in the Measure Point menu. The following conditions, which must be met in order to set the relay output selected in the Relay field, apply to the input displayed here. Al. 1-4 (1st-4th Alarm) Field type: Check box In this field, select the alarms that will cause the selected relay output to be activated, for the input selected in the Channel field. Fail Field type: Check box If this condition is set, the selected relay output is activated when an error (fault) occurs for the input displayed in the Channel field. Inhibit Field type: Check box If this condition is set, the selected relay output is activated when the input displayed in the Channel field is inhibited. Voting (Alarm Logic) Field type: Integer The value entered in this field applies to the configuration conditions described above. Optional state combinations (alarm, fail, and inhibit) can be formed when the selected relay output is configured. The number value selected in this field determines how many of the conditions configured in the control boxes must be met for the selected relay output to be activated. The number of conditions entered in the check boxes is displayed in the field beside the voting to be configured. The following types of links can be formed in this manner: Single link: (1-out-of-1): Exactly one condition is set, and the value of 1 is entered as the voting.
SUPREMA
4-17
MSA
Advise to multiply- links: At the creation of multiply-links the digital outputs with a high number of links must be selected to the lower numbered (9256) switch outputs. After entering the links the system makes a link-calculation. The found value shall be recorded in the logbook by the system after take over. If the value of link-calculation exceed 63, a warning goes output. The system shall refuse a value over 70, the user has to reduce the link settings. OR link: (1-out-of-m) Multiple conditions are set, and the value of 1 is entered as the voting, i.e., if any one or more of the set conditions are met, the relay output will be activated. Parameters for a global alarm or common alarms can be set in this manner. AND link: (m-out-of-m) The value entered for the voting corresponds to the number of set conditions, i.e. all of the set conditions must be met for the relay output to be activated. Voting link: (n-out-of-m) If m conditions are set, and the value of n is entered as the voting, then the selected relay output will only be activated if n out of the m conditions are met. OK Field type: Button Press this button to accept the settings entered for the selected relay output. After the button is pressed, the voting settings are checked to see if they are valid. If the settings are valid, they become part of the systems parameter set. If they are not valid, a warning appears. Cancel Field type: Button Pressing this button cancels the settings entered for the selected relay output. Clear Field type: Button Pressing this button deletes all of the parameters for the selected relay output. The output then returns to the way it was before its first configuration. Default values are used as the preliminary settings for the input of certain fields.
4-18
SUPREMA
MSA
4.3.3.3
Submenu System
This menu displays all parameters that affect the entire system.
MeasurePoints RelayOutputs System Sen A Language: English Date/Time: 09/20/2007 08:06:09 Config.-PW: _________ Confirm.:_________ Param.-PW: _________ Confirm.:_________ Maint.-PW: _________ Confirm.:_________ Signal if Inhibited pass [OK] [Cancel]
Figure 4-11: System menu
The functions of the individual menu elements are described below: Language Field type: Selection In this field, set the language for the user display. Date/Time Field type: Selection The date and time are set by selecting the appropriate input fields with the cursor keys. After this field is closed, the new Date and Time is displayed, but it does not become valid until the menu is closed with the [OK] button. If the system has a radio controlled clock available, date and time can only read, not change. Password/Confirmation: Field type: text There are three password levels available. The authorisation for a higher level automatically includes rights to all lower levels. The highest level is the configuration level and the lowest is the maintenance level. Passwords can be changed by entering up to 8 characters. The password must be at least four characters long and can include any character in the ANSI character set. Upper and lower case letters are recognised as different. In these fields the password that is to be changed is required. To remove password protection completely, delete the password by entering only spaces. Authorisation can then be obtained only with the key switch or a higher-level password. If no key switch is available, deleting the password will permit authorisation to everyone. In this case, an additional safety message will appear with the warning that the performance test approval of the system will become invalid. To guard against typing errors the new password must be entered identically, two times, before it becomes valid.
SUPREMA
4-19
MSA
Signal if Inhibited Field type: Selection field If a MAO module is used to inhibit the sensor signals, there are three different ways of analog signal behaviour for inhibited inputs. pass: The received measurement values are sent on. hold: The last measured value before inhibiting occurred is retained. maintain: The signal goes to the maintenance level (corresponds to 3,0 mA). The requests of EN 50271 concerning the signalling of extra conditions at the analog outputs is comply only if the function Maintain is setted. The setting in this field is essential for all latching measuring points in the whole system. OK Field type: Button Press this button to accept the settings entered. After the button is pressed, the parameters are immediately checked to see if they valid. If the parameters are valid, they become part of the systems parameter set. If they are not valid, a warning appears. Cancel Field type: Button Press this button to cancel the settings entered.
4.3.3.4
Submenu Sensors
Through the menu "Sensors", the user parameter of the predefined remote sensing head can be viewed as well as set for some predefined sensor parameter in specific ranges. The menu contains the following sub-items described consecutively in this section: Head parameters State texts Gas name Measuring ranges Dimensions Lin.- tables Assignment Configuration
4-20
SUPREMA
MSA
Submenu Head parameters
HeadParams StateTexts GasNames Ranges A ID: 1 State: protected Name: DF-7010 DF-7010 Limit for "suppressed" (UAmin): 315 Limit for signal failure (UAidle): 240 Limit for overflow (UAover): 2100 Warm-up period (Tsupp): 300 [OK] [Cancel]
Figure 4-12: Head parameter submenu
This menu makes it possible to display the significant parameters of the remote sensing heads. During the normal operation the SUPREMA software permanently checks the output signal sent by the detector to the SUPREMA. If in case the output signal falls below or exceeds one of these limits the SUPREMA triggers off a fault indication for this measuring point. Data fields not used for a specific remote sensing head type are identified with zero (0). It is possible to enter user-specific data for the remote sensing head. For this purpose, the following fields can changed for some predefined active remote sensing heads (only 420 mA signal): Name (German, English), UA min, UA idle, UA over and Tsupp. The "ID" of modifiable remote sensing heads begins with the value "10000". ID -> Remote sensing head ID Field type: Selection field A remote sensing head can be selected by means of its ID through this field State -> State of this cell (protected or modifiable) Field type: Display field This field displays the state of the cell used for data saving. If this state is protected, then no data can be changed. The following input fields are simply display fields. 2 x Name -> Head name in English (left) and German (right) Field type: text fields In these fields, the name of the remote sensing head is displayed in both languages protected by SUPREMA. Theremote sensing head can be selected as Sensor type in the setting of the measuring points through the names. The user can freely define the names in modifiable remote sensing heads. They must be unique, that is, no name should be given twice. If a name is given for only one language, the same name can also be used for the other language while saving it. Limit for signal failure (UAIdle) Field type: Number field for integers Adjusting range UAIdle: 50350 This entry displays the minimum signal UA for the state Signal failure. Measuring values below this limit value is displayed as Signal failure. This value can be adjusted for the specific customer in modifiable remote sensing heads. Limit for suppressed (UAmin) Field type: Number field for integers Adjusting range UAmin: 240...350
SUPREMA
4-21
MSA
This entry displays the minimum signal UA for the state suppressed. Measuring values below this limit value are displayed as suppressed. If this value is 0, then this state will not be tested. This value can be adjusted for the specific customer in modifiable remote sensing heads. Limit for overflow (UAover) Field type: Number field for integers Adjusting range UAover: 20002200 This value defines the sensor signal UA of the remote sensing head that leads to the measuring range overflow display. Measuring values above this value is displayed as overflow This value can be adjusted for the specific customer in modifiable remote sensing heads. Warm-up period (Tsupp) Field type: Number field for integers Adjusting range Tsupp: 10300 The warm-up period can be set in this field. This specifies how long a head will remain in the state warm-up after it has been switched-on (again). This time is necessary because different heads need different length of time until they, for example, reach their operating temperature and the correct measuring value is displayed this way. This field can be adjusted for the specific customer in modifiable remote sensing heads. OK Element type: Button By pressing this button, the completed settings are applied for the selected head. Cancel Element type: Button By pressing this button, the completed settings are discarded for the selected head. Submenu State texts
HeadParams StateTexts GasNames Ranges A Sensor: DF-7010 State: protected Text: Range: State Text 1: ________ 170mV up to 230mV State Text 2: ________ 270mV up to 330mV State Text 3: ________ 0mV up to 0mV State Text 4: ________ 0mV up to 0mV [OK] [Cancel]
Figure 4-13: Submenu State texts
This menu makes it possible to define sensor type specific texts for specific signal ranges. These are displayed in the measured value list with an additional prefixed ID F: if the measured value lies within the specified range (e.g. F:OpticErr). Texts can be defined for all remote sensing heads provided that ranges are specified for them. Texts can be selected arbitrarily, the same names are allowed. In addition, the user can freely define the signal ranges in the range from 0 to 400mV in modifiable remote sensing heads. However, the signal ranges must be unique, that is, there should not be any range overlaps.
4-22
SUPREMA
MSA
Sensor Element type: Selection field The head, on which state texts should be put or for which it should be changed can be selected with this field. State -> State of this cell (protected or modifiable) Element type: Display field This field displays the state of the cell used for data saving. If the state is protected, then no data can be changed. The following input fields are simply display fields. State text Element type: text field Texts displayed in the measured value lists can be entered here if the measured value lies within the signal range. from Element type: Number field for integers Lower limit of respective signal range. This field is a purely display field if the state for this head is protected. up o Element type: Numeric fields for integers Upper limit of respective signal range. This field is display only if the state for this head is protected. OK Element type: Button By pressing this button, the completed settings are applied for the selected head. Cancel Element type: Button By pressing this button, the completed settings are discarded for the selected head. Submenu Gas names
HeadParams StateTexts GasNames Ranges A ID: 1 Status: protected Name (engl.): Carbon monoxide Name (german): Kohlenmonooxide
[OK]
Figure 4-14: Submenu Gas names
[Cancel]
This menu makes it possible to view protected gas names provided and to adjust some predefined modifiable gas names for the customer.
SUPREMA
4-23
MSA
Texts can be selected arbitrarily. Identical names are not allowed and will be rejected with the message "Error: Name not unique!". ID -> ID of this gas name Element type: Selection field A gas name can be selected by means of its ID through this field. State -> State of this cell (protected or modifiable) Element type: Display field This field displays the state of the cell used for data saving. If the state is protected, then no data can be changed. The following input fields are simply display fields. Name (English) Element type: Text field The English gas name can be entered here. Name (German) Element type: Text field The German gas name can be entered here. OK Element type: Button By pressing this button, the completed settings for the selected gas name are applied. Cancel Element type: Button By pressing this button, the completed settings are discarded for the selected gas name. Submenu Measuring ranges
HeadParams StateTexts GasNames Ranges A ID: 1 State: protected Value: 0.3000 Text (engl.): 0.3 Text (german): 0,3 [OK]
Figure 4-15: Submenu Measuring ranges
[Cancel]
This menu makes is possible to view the protected measuring ranges provided and to adjust some predefined modifiable ranges for the customer. Ranges can be selected arbitrarily. Identical values are not allowed and will be rejected. ID -> ID of this measuring range Field type: Selection field A measuring range can be selected by means of its ID through this field. State -> State of this cell (protected or modifiable) Field type: Display field
4-24
SUPREMA
MSA
This field displays the state of the cell used for data saving. If the state is "protected", then no data can be changed. The following input fields are simply display fields. Value Element type: Text field Adjusting range: 0,100099999 The value for the measuring range can be set here. Note: In case of very high 5-digit measuring range shortfalls the display may show five arrows pointing downwards instead of the measured value. Text (English) Field type: Display field The English value for this measuring range is displayed here. Text (German) Field type: Display field The German value for this measuring range is displayed here. OK Field type: Button By pressing this button, the completed settings for the selected measuring range are applied. Cancel Field type: Button By pressing this button, the completed settings for the selected measuring range are discarded.
Submenu Dimensions
StateTexts GasNames Ranges Dimensions A ID: 1 State: protected Text (engl.): Text (german): ppm ppm
[OK]
Figure 4-16: Submenu Dimensions
[Cancel]
This menu makes is possible to view protected dimensions provided and to adjust some predefined modifiable dimensions for the customer. Dimensions can be selected arbitrarily. Identical names are not allowed and will be rejected with the message "Error: Name not unique!". ID -> ID of this Dimension Field type: Selection field A dimension can be selected by means of its ID through this field.
SUPREMA
4-25
MSA
State -> State of this cell (protected or modifiable) Field type: Display field This field displays the state of the cell used for data saving. If the state is protected, then no data can be changed. The following input fields are simply display fields. Text (English) Element type: Text fields The English text for the dimension can be entered here. Text (German) Field type: Text fields The German text for the dimension can be entered here. OK Field type: Button By pressing this button, the completed settings for the selected dimension are applied. Cancel Field type: Button By pressing this button, the completed settings for the selected dimension are discarded.
Submenu Lin. tables
GasNames Ranges Dimensions LinTables A ID: 0 State: protected 5.000 30.00 55.00 80.00 10.00 35.00 60.00 85.00 15.00 40.00 65.00 90.00 20.00 45.00 70.00 95.00 25.00 50.00 75.00 100.0 [Back]
Figure 4-17: Submenu Lin. tables
This menu makes it possible to view provided lin. tables. ID -> ID of this linearisation table Field type: Selection field A linearisation table can be selected by means of its ID through this field. State -> State of this cell (always protected) Field type: Display field This field displays the state of the cell used for data saving. If the state is protected, then no data can be changed. The following input fields are simply display fields. Node Field type: Number field for decimal numbers
4-26
SUPREMA
MSA
Nodes are defined in this field. They lie in separation distances of 5% unit intervals. The values always increase steadily. Back Element type: Button Exit the menu again by pressing this button.
Submenu Assignment
Dimensions Entry: 0 Head Gas Range Dimension Lin.-Tab.
Figure 4-18: Submenu Assignment
LinTables Assignment Seizu A State: protected ID: 0 all ID: 0 all ID: 0 all ID: 0 all ID: 0 [Back]
This menu makes it possible to view assignments between heads, gases, ranges, dimensions and linearisation tables. In the assignment, all busy entries are sifted through in a descending sequence of their cell number. When the parameters head, gas, measuring range and dimension match the values of the corresponding measuring point for the first time, the linearisation table assigned there is used for the measuring point. Entry-> Number of this cell Field type: Selection field An assignment entry can be selected by means of its cell through this field. State -> State of this cell (always protected) Field type: Display field This field displays the state of the cell used for data saving. If the state is protected, then no data can be changed. The following input fields are simply display fields. Head ID and assignment Field type: Display field This field displays the remote sensing head to be viewed in the assignment. Gas ID and assignment Field type: Display field This field displays the gas to be viewed in the assignment. Range ID and assignment Field type: Display field This field displays measuring ranges to be viewed in the assignment. Dimension ID and assignment Field type: Display field This field displays the dimensions to be viewed in the assignment.
SUPREMA
4-27
MSA
Lin. tab. ID Field type: Display field This field displays the linearisation curve of the selection assigned. Back Field type: Button Exit the menu again by pressing this button.
Submenu Configuration
LinTables Assignment Seizure Menu Entries used/free Heads: 54 / 10 Gas names: 142 / Ranges: 28 / 4 Dimensions: 12 / Lin. tables: 21 / 11 Assignments: 36 / 12 Version of Predefinition: 1 [Back]
Figure 4-19: Configuration submenu
A 18 4
This menu gives an overview of how many cells that are busy for individual parameter operations and how many that are still free. Furthermore, the version of the predefined dataset is displayed here. Back Field type: Button Exit the menu again by pressing this button.
4.3.3.5
Submenu Printer RelayOutputs System Sensors Printer M A Log format: %MP %A4 %A3 %A2 %A1 %SF
Alive format: alive %DD.%DM.%DY %TH:
Time interval: every minute Base time: 01/01/2007 00:00:00 [OK] [Cancel]
Figure 4-20: Printer submenu
This menu makes it possible to change the feeding format in a printer. Furthermore, there is the possibility to activate and format an alive format in a printer. Log format Field type: text field The feeding format in a printer can be specified here. Apart from free text, predefined TAGS can be used. See below for a listing of possible TAGS.
4-28
SUPREMA
MSA
Alive format Field type: text field The alive format can be specified here. Apart from free text, predefined TAGS can be used. See below for a listing of possible TAGS. Base time Field type: Date/time input fields The base time for the alive format can be set here. Time interval Field type: Selection field The time interval/repetition rate of the alive format (amongst others, never, annually, monthly, daily,, every second) can be set here. OK Field type: Button By pressing this button, the completed settings are applied for the selected head. Cancel Field type: Button By pressing this button, the completed settings are discarded for the selected head. Available TAGS: TAG %% %DD %DM %DY %TH %TM %TS %A1 %A2 %A3 %A4 %SF %MP %MD %MG Printout % day (length = 2) month (length = 2) year (length = 2) hour (length = 2) minute (length = 2) second (length = 2) S if alarm 1 was set, R if alarm 1 was reset S if alarm 2 was set, R if alarm 2 was reset S if alarm 3 was set, R if alarm 3 was reset S if alarm 4 was set, R if alarm 4 was reset S if signal fail was set, R if signal fail was reset MP and the Measuring point number (length = 5) Measuring dimension (length = 5) Measuring gas (length = 14)
SUPREMA
4-29
MSA
%MT %ML %MM %MS %MV
Measuring tag (length = 11) Measuring place (length = 21) Measuring marking (length = 21) Measuring serial (length = 11) Measuring value (length = 6)
4.3.4
Menu Maintain
Access to the Maintain menu is restricted. Data can be called up and displayed, but changes and deletions are only possible after entering the maintenance password (or higher) or operating a key switch.
4.3.4.1
Submenu Calibration
To calibrate the individual gas detection inputs a manual 2-point calibration procedure can be used in which, if required, an automatic presetting in the first calibration can be connected in series. After a calibration process has been started using the MDO operation/display unit, a Zero gas must be introduced by maintenance personnel. Then a Test (span) gas must be introduced. The results of a calibration are then displayed and are considered valid thereafter (see section 7.1 Maintenance and Adjustment). Attention: The presetting is applied immediately and cannot be cancelled! Calibration parameters for the individual inputs can be set in the calibration menu. From that point on the calibration is controlled. The menu is divided into two submenus: Start calibration End calibration
If an input is selected that is not already in calibration mode, the Start calibration menu appears. If an input is selected that is already in calibration mode, the End calibration menu appears. The functions of the individual menu items are described below. The Meas. Point and Tag fields are contained in both submenus. Meas. Point Field type: Selection The field contains a list of all configured inputs. After an input number is selected, the rest of the menu is filled, depending upon whether or not the input is in calibration mode. Global parameter changes and actions using the menu items described below apply to the input selected in this field. Tag Field type: Display The field shows the designation of the selected input.
4-30
SUPREMA
MSA
Calibration InterfaceTests IBR Menu Meas. Point: 13 Tag: QM013 Dimensions: % LEL Type Zero Gas: 0.0000 Air Test Gas: 50.000 Methane First calibration: [X] [Start] [Cancel]
Figure 4-21: Start calibration submenu
Dimensions Field type: Display This shows the dimension of measurement for the selected input. Zero Gas (concentration) Field type: decimal number Enter the zero gas concentration in this field. This should be the same as the measurement range zero, i.e. normally zero. The field defaults to the value of the last calibration, if the input has already been calibrated. Zero Gas (type) Field type: Display The field shows the type of zero gas for the selected input. Test Gas (concentration) Field type: decimal number Enter the test gas concentration in this field. The field defaults to the value of the last calibration, if the input has already been calibrated. Test Gas (type) Field type: Selection The field contains a list of test gases that can be used to calibrate the inputs. It defaults to the test gas (Measure Point menu) for the selected input. First calibration: Field type: Checkbox If this field is set, first calibration and, prior to this, if applicable, an automatic presetting will be carried out. If first calibration takes place, entries in the calibration history will be deleted. Start Field type: Button Pressing this button starts the calibration process and automatically inhibits the output. After the button is pressed, the parameters are immediately checked to see if they are valid. If the parameters are valid and the selected input is not in alarm mode or inhibited, the calibration process begins and the Calibration end submenu appears. Cancel Field type: Button
SUPREMA
4-31
MSA
Pressing this button cancels the parameter changes and closes the menu.
Calibration InterfaceTests IBR Menu A Meas. Point: 13 Tag: QM013 CAL ZERO STATE CAL - SPAN %LEL mV confirm % LEL mV Old: ______ _____ _____ _____ New: ______ _____ _____ _____ Sig: -0.06 399 Ux=**** mV [End] [Cancel] [Back] [Store]
Figure 4-22: End calibration submenu
STATE: Field type: Selection field The current calibration state is displayed in this field. The following values are possible: Wait KA Wait-ZERO Wait-SPAN -> Calibration is ready and will be performed immediately -> Zero point presetting is ready and will be performed immediately Cause: A presetting of another measuring point in BGT is still active -> Sensitivity presetting is ready and will be performed immediately Cause: Measured value not yet significant in comparison with the zero points value changed or not yet stable -> Presetting in progress -> System is waiting for the user's confirmation of the current measured value -> Calibration is completed -> an error has occurred
Presetting Confirmation Complete Error
If an error occurs, the exact error cause can be displayed by selecting the field STATE and pressing . Old Field type: Display These fields display the data from the last calibration, if the input has already been calibrated. Measurement value and internal signal UA for zero gas (CAL-ZERO) Measurement value and internal signal UA for test gas (CAL-SPAN)
The dimensions of the values are shown directly above the values. New Field type: Display These fields display the data for the current calibration process. In the fields value and internal signal UA for zero gas (CAL-ZERO) and span gas (CALSPAN), the current measurement value is captured and placed in the corresponding field when the Store button is pressed, depending on the calibration phase.
4-32
SUPREMA
MSA
Sig. Field type: Display field The current measured value and the current internal signal UA are displayed and updated every second. Ux Field type: Display field Display of the current difference signal Ux at passive sensors, if the measure point has already been calibrated. Otherwise no value is displayed (which means: no preliminary calibration done) or ***** (active sensor) is shown. At preliminary calibration the difference signal Ux for zero gas is set to 0 mV. At all following calibrations the current difference signal is always based on the defined value. Bar Display Field type: Display field (5-digit) Indicator for a stable difference signal Ux. All 5 digits must be filled black, only then the measured values can be accepted. Store Field type: Button This button is relevant only for the manual calibration process. If it is pressed during zero gas measurement, the current measurement value is placed into the zero gas field. If it is pressed during test gas measurement, the current measurement value is placed in the test gas field. End Field type: Button When readings for zero gas and test gas measurement are displayed in the corresponding fields, they can be validated by pressing the End button. Cancel Field type: Button Pressing this button will cancel a calibration process at any time, provided that there is no presetting in progress. The results up to that time will be voided. Attention: The presetting is valid immediately and will beapplied always! Back Field type: Button Pressing this button will close the menu without affecting the calibration process.
4.3.4.2
Submenu Interface Tests
Test of the analog outputs Analogue outputs can be tested with the help of this menu. The desired analogue output is selected using the output number field and the value to be tested is set using the output value field. The test can be completed using the button "End". The regular value is displayed again in the output thereafter.
SUPREMA
4-33
MSA
Calibration InterfaceTests IBR Menu A [Analog] [Serial] [Driver Output] Output Number: --Output Value: ---- mA
[End]
Figure 4-23: Test of the analog outputs
Test of the serial interfaces Attention: In this test (RS232 A and RS232 B), the system failure is activated after approx. 3 seconds. From a list of interfaces situated at the SUPREMA, an interface can be selected at the DISPLAY + OPERATION UNIT. As soon as this interface has been selected, its usual function is inhibited. Therefore, testing of serial interfaces can not be carried out via PC/laptop. Every time the [Test] button is operated, a test text consisting of all printable characters of the font is given to the interface. The text is introduced by the Carriage-Return character and terminated by Line-Feed. By selecting another interface or by pressing the [End] button and thus leaving the menu, the inhibit of the interface is undone.
Calibration InterfaceTests IBR Menu A [Analog] [Serial] [Driver Output] Interface: RS232 A
[Test]
Figure 4-24: Test of the serial interfaces
[End]
Test of the digital driver outputs After a driver output has been selected by its appropriate sub system and output number, the normal output of this driver output is inhibited. The and cursor keys are used to switch between ON and OFF for changing the output value. By pressing the [Test] button, the value set is displayed directly at the output selected. After finishing the test press the [End] button, or by testing another driver output, the normal state of the previous driver output is restored automatically.
4-34
SUPREMA
MSA
Calibration InterfaceTests IBR Menu A [Analog] [Serial] [Driver Output] Partial System: primary(A) Output Number: 9 Output Value: Off [End]
Figure 4-25: Test of the digital driver interfaces
4.3.4.3
Submenu IBR (current bridge)

Calibration InterfaceTests IBR Menu Meas. Point: 8 Tag: QM-008 Sensor Current reference value: Current measure value: State: No pre-adjustment [Start] [Back] A
270 mA 270 mA
[End]
Figure 4-26: Calibration gateway tests IBR
This menu makes it possible to set the sensor current automatically. Attention: A setting that has been started/carried out cannot be cancelled or discarded! Measuring point Field type: Selection field The measuring point, in which the sensor current should be set can be selected through this field. ID Field type: Display field This field displays the ID of the selected measuring field. Sensor current Reference value Field type: Number field for integers This field specifies the value to which the current should be set. This value specification is sensor type-dependent, but it can also be adjusted for special uses. Sensor current Reference value Field type: Display This field specifies the value, to which the current should be set at the moment.
SUPREMA
4-35
MSA
State Field type: Display field This field displays the current state of the presetting of this measuring point. Start Field type: Button The presetting is started by pressing this button. Attention: A presetting that has been started cannot be cancelled or discarded. Back Field type: Button Press this button to exit the menu without ending the presetting. End Field type: Button The presetting is cancelled by pressing this button.
4.3.5 4.3.5.1

Menu Diagnostics Submenu Logbook
The logbook contains six histories: Calibration (4 calibration entries as well as 3 presetting per measuring point) System Events Signal Events (2000 entries along with system occurrences) Configuration changes (5000 entries) Supply Voltage (200 entries) Processor Temperature (10 entries)
All history entries are time-stamped. The size of the individual histories are variable. When a history is full, the oldest entry is overwritten. The calibration history is an exception in this regard: entries of the first calibration and presetting are not overwritten.
Logbook MeasureData Menu [Calibration] [System Events] [Signal Events] [Changes] [Supply Voltage] [Processor Temperature] [Cancel]
Figure 4-27: Logbook selection menu
4-36
SUPREMA
MSA
Selecting an item in the Logbook selection menu displays the corresponding history. History entries are shown as list views. After a list view has been opened by pressing the key, the cursor keys can be used to scroll vertically and horizontally through its content. Pressing the ESC key closes a list view. Pressing the [Back] button returns to the selection menu. Calibration history This history saves the calibration process data for each input. Up to four entries can be stored for each input, and older entries are overwritten, except for the first calibration and presettings.
Logbook MeasureData Menu Measure Point No.: 017 Calibration History: Date Time Type of gas I 16.03.07 09:18 --Z 26.04.07 07:45 Air * 26.04.07 07:54 Methane [Back]
Figure 4-28: Calibration history
When an input is selected, the appropriate calibration history is displayed in the corresponding field, if the input has already been calibrated. The entry for a calibration process consists of two rows, listing first the test gas and then the zero gas setting. A presetting entry is made up of only one line. If a separate zero adjustment has been carried out, the values for Concentration and Measurement value are blanked in the Span Gas Measurement line by . The type of entry is identified by a character in the first column: I Z S * Number n -> Current bridge setting (IBR) -> Presetting Zero point (ZERO) -> Presetting Sensitivity (SPAN) -> First calibration -> n-last calibration
Each entry includes the following data (if applicable, switch using cursor keys): Date/Time of accepting and closing the calibration menu Gas types for the zero and, if applicable, test gases (not used for current bridge setting) Gas concentrations for the zero and, if applicable, test gases (not used for current bridge setting) Measured values for the zero and test gases Difference signal Ux for the zero and test gases (relevant for calibration only) Reference value (relevant for presettings only)
SUPREMA
4-37
MSA
System Events history This history stores the system failures and start messages. Each entry includes the following data: Date/Time that the event occurred Brief description of the event type Additional numerical description of further event details. (They serve as a source of information for the MSA service staff.) a window containing detailed error description in plain
By selecting an entry and pressing text opens. Signal events history
In this history, entry, confirmation and reset of alarms and signal failures as well as the switchover of the primary system (only in redundant systems) are saved. An entry is made up of the following data: Date/time of the event Brief description of the event
Changes history This history stores changes of input parameter settings. In changing the assignment of relay outputs of a measuring point, an entry regarding the connection evaluation takes place, also see section 4.3.3.2 Submenu Relay outputs for this. Each entry includes the following data: Date/Time of accepting and closing the calibration menu Measurement point number Name of the parameter changed New value of the parameter changed
Supply voltage history This history stores over-limit and under-limit power supply events (internal power, external power, battery backup). An entry is made every time a new maximum or minimum power value is measured. Each entry includes the following data: Date/Time of the power measurement Name of the power type Measured voltage value
Processor temperature history This history stores over-limit and under-limit temperature events for the MDA module processor. When the temperature goes above or below the permitted range, the current temperature value is stored, and when it returns to within the permitted range, the peak value from the deviation is stored.
4-38
SUPREMA
MSA
Each entry includes the following data: Date/Time of the over-limit or under-limit event Serial number of the MDA module Temperature value Information on whether it remained out of the permitted range or returned to it
4.3.5.2
Measure Data
This menu shows all measure points and modules. Therefore, the module is divided into the Measure Point and Module submenus. Modules submenu From the Module submenu, the user can recall information on the system modules.
Logbook MeasureData Menu A [Measure Points] [Modules] Module-ID: 1 Partial System: A@250k Module Type: MCP-10 Serial-No.: ---------Software Version: 2.06.01 no actual errors [Cancel]
Figure 4-29: Modules submenu
Module ID Field type: Selection field This field contains the ID code Nos. of all system modules which are connected to the CAN bus. After an ID code No. has been selected, the remaining menu is filled with all data available for this particular module. Partial System Field type: Display field In this field, the ID of the partial system to which the module belongs and, in some modules (e.g. MCP-10 and MDO-10), the set CAN baud rate is displayed. Module Type Field type: Display field This field contains the type of module selected. Serial No. Field type: Display field This field contains the serial number of the module selected. Software version Field type: Display field This field displays the software version of the module selected.
SUPREMA
4-39
MSA
Module state Field type: Selection field The current state of the selected module is displayed in this field. If many error messages of the module are pending, these can be displayed by selecting the field and pressing . Measure Point This submenu displays the current information on all inputs. Measure Point No.: Field type: Selection field After selection of a measure point No., in the appropriate display field, the current signals of the selected point are displayed. Signal UA: Field type: Display field The amplified sensor signal is displayed in this field. The signal UA corresponds to the signal that is applied to the test sockets of the MAI module, after selection of the corresponding input No., and consists of a fixed and a variable amplified quantity. Therefore the non-amplified sensor signal cannot be calculated directly. Signal UQ: Field type: Display field When passive sensors and MPI modules are used, the bridge current is displayed as a voltage value. When active sensors and MCI modules are used, dashes are displayed in this field. Signal UY: Field type: Display field When passive sensors and MPI modules are used the amplified sensor signal UY (mV) is displayed. The signal consists of a fixed gain that depends on the MPI module type and an offset voltage. When active sensors and MCI modules are used, dashes are displayed in this field.
4.4 PC Operation
All parameters and configuration has to do with the PC operating program called Servicepack. Version and Article Number see chapter 15.2.2 and table 17-1.
4-40
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
5. Installation
5.1 General Information
5.1.1 Installation Instructions for Following the EMC Directives
The devices of MSA have been developed and tested in accordance with the EMC Directives 89/336/EEC, 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC, and 93/68/EEC and the corresponding standards EN 50270. The requirements of the EMC Directives can only be met by following the manufacturers installation instructions.This applies only to tested devices and systems of the manufacturer. General Instructions on the Installation of Tested Devices and Systems of MSA AUER GmbH to ensure that the EMC Directives are followed For the connection of the various devices to the power supply system a clean ground or clean potential ground must be provided An appropriate supply voltage free of feedback to the external source in accordance with the EMC Directives must be used. If the devices are supplied from a direct voltage (dc) source, the supply cable must be screened. Screened cable is to be used to connect the sensors. Control cables must be screened (reset, acknowledge, measurement current output, printer, etc.). Screened cable must have at least 80 % coverage by the screening. Control and sensor cables must be laid physically apart from power supply cables. Screened cables must be laid in one piece. If it should prove necessary to extend a cable by way of a terminal box, the terminal box must be screened, and the connections in the box must be kept as short as possible. Unscreened cables and cables from which the insulation has been stripped must be as short as possible and must be laid without loops to the appropriate terminal posts. External devices that are operated by the gas warning units (horns, contactors, pumps, motors, etc.) must be radio-screened and follow the EMC Directives. If the EMC filters of the device are physically remote, the power supply cable between the filter and the device must be screened. If additional high-voltage surge protection measures are required an appropriate highvoltage protection filter, approved by MSA AUER GmbH, must be installed in the sensor cable.
5.1.2 Instructions on Meeting the EMC Requirements on the SUPREMA Control System
To meet the EMC product standard EN 50270 (Electromagnetic Compatibility. Electrical apparatus for the detection and measurement of combustible gases, toxic gases or oxygen), the following points must be observed: General: The site chosen for the installation of the system must ensure that no excessive electromagnetic loads are present.
SUPREMA
5-1
MSA
Installation
The power supply connection must be equipped with a line filter of type FN 660 (Schaffner) or equivalent. For the external 24-volt supply, a line filter of type FN 2060 (Schaffner) or equivalent must be provided. Care must be taken to ensure that the line filters are in good contact (low resistance) with the mounting plate of the service cabinet. A clean grounding point must be provided for the potential ground. Power supply cables are to be kept away from remote measurement/data lines (> 30 cm). All cables, unless otherwise specified, must be screened (> 80% coverage); they are to be connected to the rack. The rack is to be equipped with separate potential ground. The connection of the cable screen should be as short as possible. Cables for data transmission (CAN, RS232, etc.) must be screened. There must not be any potential difference between the interface of the cable screen and ground. The cable screen must have good contact with the housings of the plug connectors. The cables for remote racks must be laid protected against mechanical damages (CAN, RS 232 etc.).
Figure 5-1: MAT Module, connection of the screening
Connection of the Sensors: 1. By means of the MAT module, directly to the rack: The remote measuring cables for passive/active sensors must be screened (>80 % coverage), and the cable screen is to be connected to the terminals provided. 2. By means of the MAT TS module in the service cabinet (40-way ribbon cable): The maximum length for 40-way ribbon cables is 5 meters. MUT Module connected to MAT TS Module Passive/active sensor cables and analog output cables are usually screened. The cable screen is to be connected directly, over the shortest possible distance, to the screening terminal provided. MUT Module connected to MRC TS Module The ribbon cable is to be screened. The cable screen is to be connected directly, over the shortest possible distance, to the screening terminal provided.
5-2
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
MRC TS Module connected to MRO 16 (8) TS Module Screened cables are not required to connect the individual relay modules.
Figure 5-1a: SUPREMA shielding and grounding concept
5.1.3 Standards and Guidelines

Strict adherence to the specifications and regulations applicable to installation, start-up, operation, and maintenance is required. The system was developed in correspondence with the following standards and directives and has to be installed, operated and maintain according to this standards. EN 50073 Guide for selection, installation, use and maintenance of apparatus for the detection and measurement of combustible gases or oxygen. Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related systems. (In conjunction with DIN 19251, Requirements and Measures for Ensuring Safe Operation and DIN 19250, Basic Safety Considerations). Electromagnetic Compatibility. Electrical apparatus for the detection and measurement of combustible gases, toxic gases or oxygen. Electromagnetic Compatibility. Generic emission standard. Residential, commercial and light industry. Electrical apparatus for the detection and measurement of combustible gases General requirements and test methods. Electrical apparatus for the detection and measurement of combustible gases Performance requirements for Group II apparatus indicating up to 100% lower explosive limit.
IEC 1508
EN 50270
EN 61000-6-3 EN 61779-1 EN 61779-4
SUPREMA
5-3
MSA
Installation
EN 61779-5
Electrical apparatus for the detection and measurement of combustible gases Performance requirements for Group II apparatus indicating up to 100% (V/V) gas. Electrical apparatus for the detection and measurement of oxygen; Performance requirements for operating and test method. Electrical apparatus for the detection and measurement of combustible gases, toxic gases or oxygen Requirements and tests for apparatus using software and/or digital technologies. Standard: Control Units for Fire Protective Signalling Systems Canadian Standard: Safety Regulations for Measuring Devices in the Laboratory and in the Field.
EN 50104 EN 50271
UL 864 US: CAN/CSA-C22.2
Warning: The area where the modules are installed must be outside of a hazardous area Zone 0, 1 or 2 and be free of ignitable, explosive or corrosive gases. Sensor installation at the SUPREMA must be carried out according to Guideline EN 60079-14.
5.2 Installation, Step by Step

Unpack and inspect the device or its components. Attention: Follow the instructions for components subject to damage from static electricity! Check the suitability of the installation site and the cabling requirements. Check the current and voltage supply and make sure it is suitable. Depending on the type of system shipped, install the switch cabinet, or the 19 mounting rack. Check the configuration of the modules and reconfigure if necessary. Install the modules in the 19 mounting rack (unless already installed at the factory). In the case of expanded systems with more than one 19 mounting rack, connect the CAN bus or check the connection if it has already been made. Install the sensors and connect the wiring to the SUPREMA. Attention: Follow the installation instructions for hazardous areas! Connect the relay and current outputs to the external devices to be actuated. Connect the current and voltage supply.
After installation is complete, perform the start-up procedure as instructed in Section 6 Startup.
5.2.1 Unpacking
Perform the following steps on receipt of the shipment: Carefully unpack the device or its components, observing all of the instructions printed on or accompanying the packaging.
5-4
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Also inspect the contents of the delivery to determine if any transport damage has occurred and verify that everything listed in the shipping papers has in fact been received.
5.2.2 Installation Site

The SUPREMA control unit may be installed only outside of areas subject to the danger of explosion. The specified temperature and humidity conditions must also be satisfied, and contact with corrosive substances must be avoided.
Attention: The SUPREMA installation site must be outside of hazardous area Zones 0,1 and 2 and be free of combustible, explosive or corrosive gases.
5.2.3 Cabling
The terminal posts on the Analog Terminal Units (MAT module and MAT TS module) are designed for the connection of conductors with a cross section in the range of 0.2 ... 1.5 mm2. The terminal posts on the Relay Output Units (MRO 8, MRO 8 TS, and MRO 16 TS modules) are designed for the connection of conductors with a cross section in the range of 0.2 ... 2.5 mm2. The terminal posts on the External Connection Module MGT 40 TS are designed for the connection of conductors with a cross section in the range of 0.2 ... 2.5 mm2. On the Interconnection Board (MIB module), the terminal posts for the connection of the supply voltages are designed for conductor cross sections of 0.2 ... 4.0 mm2, and the terminals for the system failure relays are designed for conductor cross sections of 0.2 ... 2.5 mm2. On the System Terminals Module (MST module), the terminals for Alarm Reset, Horn Reset, Relay Inhibit, and Key Switch are designed for conductor cross sections in the range of 0.2 ... 2.5 mm2. The System Terminals Module (MST module) also has 2 SUB-D plug connector strips (9-way) for the connection of the CAN bus and 3 SUB-D socket terminal strips for RS 232 connections. The terminals for the supply voltage on the Relay Connection Module (MRC TS module) are designed for conductor cross sections of 0.2 ... 2.5 mm2. The modules installed separately from the rack (MAT TS, MRC TS, and MGT 40 TS modules) and the Universal Terminal Module (MUT module) are connected by means of a 40-way screened ribbon cable. The Relay Connection Module (MRC TS module) is connected to the Relay Output Modules (MRO 8 TS, MRO 16 TS) by a 20-way ribbon cable.
Module MAT /MAT TS Module MRO 8 /MRO 8 TS/MRO 16 TS Module MRC TS Module (Supply Voltage, Relay Lock) MGT 40 TS Module MIB Module (Supply Voltage) MIB Module (System Failure Relays) MSP Module (rack power supply, 150 W) MST Module (Alarm Reset, Horn Reset, Relay Inhibit, Key Switch)
Conductor Cross Section 0.2 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 0.2 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 0.2 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 0.2 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 0.2 mm2 - 4.0 mm2 0.2 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 0.2 mm2 - 4.0 mm2 0.2 mm2 - 2.5 mm2
Table 5-1: Allowed Conductor Cross Sections
SUPREMA
5-5
MSA
Installation
Type of Sensor
Number of Wires
Cable Type
D-7600 5 x 0.75 mm D-7602 5 x 1.5 mm D-715 D-7152 D-7711 D-7100 Series 47K D-7010 5 x 0.75 mm 5 x 1.5 mm D-7600 3 x 0.75 mm D-7602 3 x 1.5 mm D-715 D-7152 D-7711 D-7100 Series 47K D-7010 3 x 0.75 mm 3 x 1.5 mm D-8101 4 x 1.5 mm D-8113 D-8201 D-8213 DF-9500 2 x 1.5 mm DF-9200
Y(C)Y Y(C)Y
Max. cable loop resistance in ohms (xxx*) => for 4 ... 20 mA Zone max. working resistance 36 ohms 36 ohms
Maximum Remarks Length
750 m 1500 m
Screened cable is required.
Y(C)Y Y(C)Y Y(C)Y Y(C)Y
28 ohms 28 ohms 36 ohms 36 ohms
500 m 1000 m 750 m 1500 m
Screened cable is required. Screened cable is required.
Y(C)Y Y(C)Y Y(C)Y
28 ohms 28 ohms 36 ohms
500 m 1000 m 1500 m
NYSLYCY 500 ohms (100 ohms) (CY(Ex)i)
20000 m (4000 m)
DF-7010 DF-7100 DF-8603 DF-8201 DF-8250 DF-8401 DF-8501 DF-8502 DF-8510 GD10 SafEye Ultima X 2 wire Ultima X 3 wire
3 x 1.5 mm
Y(C)Y
20
1000 m
Screened cable is required. The values in parentheses apply only to the DF-9500 in association with zener barriers (operation in explosive area, cable colour blue). Follow the instructions the use of zener barriers or galvanic isolators. Zener barriers and galvanic isolators must be installed outside the hazardous area. Screened cable is required.
3 x 1.5 mm 3 x 1.5 mm
Y(C)Y Y(C)Y 20 1000 m
2x 3x 4x 2x
1.5 mm 1.5 mm 1.5 mm 0.5 mm
Y(C)Y Y(C)Y Y(C)Y Y(C)Y Y(C)Y
200 ohms 20 10
1000 m 840 m 420 m 2000 m 300 m 750 m 1250 m
Screened cable is Screened cable is Screened cable is Screened cable is
required. required. required. required.
3 x 0.5 mm 3 x 1.0 mm 3 x 1.5 mm
Screened cable is required.
Table 5-2: Cable Specifications
5-6
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
The maximum length of a cable is calculated as follows l , where R is the 2 m maximum load in ohms, k = 56 (conductivity of copper); Ohm * mm2 and A is the cross section of the conductor in mm. If no information is available on the maximum load, only the specified maximum length may be used. The maximum allowable length of the CAN bus can be found in the following table:
Bit rate in kBit/s Maximum Bus in m 10 20 50 125 250 500 1000 25
5000 2500 1000 500 250 100
Table 5-3: Maximum Allowable CAN Bus Length
Note: Cable must be laid in agreement with the previous EMC instructions and regulations.
5.3 Module Configuration

The modules should be configured in the order given here with no voltage applied. In the case of systems that have already been configured, the configuration of the individual modules must be checked.
5.3.1 Configuration of MIB Module

A DIL switch is provided on the back of the MIB module. This switch is used to set the CAN bus parameters.
EXT
D 11 C 21 X21
c 1 a
INT
X22
BAT
X23
D13
S1
10 ON
X 15
1
T1
RL1
X601
10 11 12 7 8 9
RL2
T2
R11 R12 R13 R14
D2
D1
POS 10
MIB as from layout version 2 has 2 system failure relays (X601) for SIL 3 applications.
D12
Figure 5-2: MIB Module, DIL Switch (BGT = Rack No.)
SUPREMA
C 11
R52 R42 R3 R2
1 2 3 4
5 6
5-7
MSA
Installation
CAN Bus Bit Rate Setting The bit rates intended for the various expansion stages are listed in the following table.
CAN A B 1 2 10 9 FREE A B 3 4 8 7 Baud 2 1 6 7 5 4 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF Rack 2 1 9 10 2 1
Switch No. In the case of alternative assembly Bit rate = 125 Kbit Bit rate = 10 Kbit Bit rate = 20 Kbit Bit rate = 50 Kbit Bit rate = 125 Kbit Bit rate = 250 Kbit Standard setting for up to 256 MS Bit rate = 500 Kbit Bit rate = 1 Mbit
4 5 6 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 8 3
Table 5-4: CAN BUS Bit Rate Settings/* MS = measuring point (input)
Explanation of the symbols: = Any switch
Rack-CAN Node Number (BGT No.) In the following, the CAN node numbers to be set when several racks [BGTs] are being used are listed. The standard setting for an individual rack is BGT 1.
CAN A B 1 2 10 9 FREE A B 3 4 8 7 Baud 2 1 6 7 5 4 Rack 2 9 2 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
In the case of alternative assembly BGT 1 Standard setting for a single rack (BGT) BGT 2 BGT 3 BGT 4 BGT 5 BGT 6 BGT 7 BGT 8
4 5 6
4 8 3 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 10 1 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Table 5-5: Rack-CAN Node Number
5-8
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
CAN-BUS Terminating Resistors Both CAN bus systems (CAN-A + CAN-B) of the SUPREMA must have a terminating resistor at each end of the bus. One end of the bus is located on the MDO module. A terminating resistor is permanently connected here. For a 1-rack system, the other end of the bus is at the rearpanel wiring of the MIB. If the system consists of only one rack, switches 1 and 2 of the DIL switch must be set to the lower position. If an additional rack is provided for the system, the racks are connected to each other at the rear via the MST modules with ready-made CAN bus cables. For a multi-rack system, the DIL switch contacts 1 and 2 (CAN-A, CAN-B) of the last rack by which the CAN BUS is ending - must be set to the lower position, all DIL switch contacts 1 and 2 (CAN-A, CAN-B) on the intermediate racks must be set to the upper position.
CAN A B 1 2 10 9 ON ON OFF OFF FREE A B 3 4 8 7 Baud 4 2 1 5 6 7 6 5 4 Rack 4 2 1 8 9 10 3 2 1
Switch No. In the case of alternative assembly Terminating Resistor Closed (Standard) Terminating Resistor Open
Table 5-6: CAN Bus Terminating Resistors
Turn-on Behaviour and Failure Behaviour of the MGO Module

CAN A B 1 2 9 FREE A B 3 4 8 7 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF Baud 2 1 6 7 5 4 Rack 2 1 9 10 2 1
Turn-on Behaviour at CAN-Bus behaviour failure In the case of alternative assembly 10 All relays remain All relays keep their last state. de-energised (Standard) All relays remain After 72 h, all relays are de-energised de-energised (according SIL 3). All relays are All relays keep their last state. energised All relays are After 72 h, all relays are energised energised.
4 5 6
4 8 3
Table 5-7: MGO Module, Configuration of turn-on behaviour and failure behaviour
SUPREMA
5-9
MSA
Installation
Turn-on Behaviour and Failure Behaviour of the MAO Module During turn-on, at the analog outputs a 0 mA signal is issued.
CAN A B 1 2 10 9 FREE A B 3 4 8 7 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF Baud 4 2 1 5 6 7 6 5 4 Rack 4 2 1 8 9 10 3 2 1
Turn-on Behaviour at CAN-Bus behaviour failure In the case of alternative assembly

All analog outputs are 0 mA. All analog outputs are 2 mA. All analog outputs are 0 mA. All analog outputs are 2 mA. All analog outputs keep there last state. (Standard) All analog outputs keep there last state. After ca. 2 min all analog outputs are 0 mA. After ca. 2 min all analog outputs are 2 mA.
Table 5-8: MAO Module, Configuration of turn-on behaviour and failure behaviour
5.3.2 Configuration of the MAI Module

Inserting the Adapter Modules (MCI/MPI/MFI/MSI) For each input to which a sensor is to be connected, an input module (MCI/MPI) is inserted in the MAI module. Up to 8 inputs can be connected to each MAI module. Essentially both active and passive sensors can be connected. The module of the MCI type is provided for the connection of active sensors, and the module of the MPI type is used for the connection of passive sensors. The MFI module has been provided for the connection of manual or automatic fire detectors. The MSI module has been provided for the connection of external switches. Important: During installation, it is essential to verify for each input that the type of adapter module provided for the sensor is plugged into the correct slot on the MAI module (see section 5.3.3 Configuration of the MCI/MCI BFE Module Active Sensors).
5-10
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Figure 5-3: MAI Module, position of adapter modules 18
MAR = Analog Redundant: MCI = Current Input MPI = Passive Input MFI = Fire Input MSI = Switch Input
only with redundant systems
depending on type of sensor (active/passive)
The co-ordination of inputs at the appropriate MAT module is described in the following figure:
Figure 5-4: MAT Module, position of the terminals for input 18
SUPREMA
5-11
MSA
Installation
5.3.3 Configuration of MCI/MCI BFE Module (active sensors)

The MCI 10 module can be configured for various types of active sensors by the use of solder bridges. Note: Any type of sensor or device which has a 4 ... 20 mA output, a 0 ... 24 V output, or a volt-free contact output can be connected. To connect sensors not from MSA, however, you must discuss this with your MSA technical contact person to avoid problems.
Figure 5-5: MCI 10 Module, solder bridges
Solder bridges BR101 and BR102 are on the solder side of the MCI module and are usually covered by a barcode sticker. This must be removed if it is necessary to change the configuration. The solder bridges must be configured as shown in the following table:
Type of Sensor 4 ... 20 mA (3-wire) 4 ... 20 mA (2-wire) open 0 ... 24 V (2-wire) volt-free contact 0 ... 100 mV closed closed open Standard configuration BR101 BR102 Notes
Table 5-9: MCI 10 Module configuration
Configuration of MCI 20 No configuration Configuration of MCI BFE No configuration
Warning: Passive sensors should never be connected to an MCI module, as this may cause the destruction of the sensors and/or the MAI/MCI modules.
5-12
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Configuration of the MPI Module (Passive Sensors) Variously equipped MPI modules are provided for the various types of passive sensors. The circuit board is the same, but the components mounted on it are different. The modules are characterised by the sensors they are designed to accept. Note: MPI modules have been made for the connection of MSA sensors only.
Module Type MPI-WT100 MPI-WT10 MPI-HL8101 MPI-HL8113
Type of Sensor D-7600/D-7602/D-7100/D-7711/D-715/D-7152/TYP 410/Sensor 47K D-7010 D-8101/D-8201 D-8113/D-8213
Table 5-10: Types of MPI Modules
The type of sensors must be matched to the type of module, otherwise the sensor or the module will be destroyed.
5.3.4 Configuration of the MAT Module

Two solder bridges are provided for each input on the bottom of the circuit board for 3 or 5 wire operation of the sensors: Solder bridge OPEN Solder bridge CLOSED = 5 wire operation = 3 wire operation
Note: The solder bridges for 3 wire operation must be closed only when passive sensors (MPI module) are connected. For 5 wire operation with active sensors (MCI module), the solder bridges must be open!
Assignment:
BR1, BR2 BR3, BR4 BR5, BR6 BR7, BR8 BR9, BR10 BR11, BR12 BR13, BR14 BR15, BR16
input 1 input 2 input 3 input 4 input 5 input 6 input 7 input 8
SUPREMA
5-13
MSA
Installation
Figure 5-6: Configuration of MAT Module
5.3.5 Configuration of MAT TS Module

On top of the circuit board, next to the ribbon cable plug, 2 solder bridges for each input are provided for the 3 or 5 wire operation of the sensors: Solder bridge OPEN Solder bridge CLOSED = 5 wire operation = 3 wire operation
Note: The solder bridges for 3 wire operation should be closed only when passive sensors (MPI module) are connected. For 5 wire operation with active sensors (MCI module), the solder bridges must be open! Equivalent to X1/1-X1/2 Assignment: BR1, BR2 BR3, BR4 BR5, BR6 BR7, BR8 BR9, BR10 BR11, BR12 BR13, BR14 BR15, BR16 Equivalent to X1/4-X1/5 input 1 input 2 input 3 input 4 input 5 input 6 input 7 input 8
5-14
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Figure 5-7: Configuration of the MAT TS Module
5.3.6 Configuration of the MRO 8 Module

On the module, there is a solder bridge (BR1), which is used to define the function of the relay inhibit of the common alarms (see section 5.10.7 LOCR Connection) is established: Solder bridge BR1 = OPEN = relays are energised when the relay inhibit is turned on Solder bridge BR1 = CLOSED = relays are de-energised when the relay inhibit is turned on
Figure 5-8: Configuration of the MRO 8 Module
SUPREMA
5-15
MSA
Installation
Attention: Because the common alarms are normally and this is fixed in the system and cannot be changed, solder bridge BR1 should never be closed under any circumstances (unless an alarm is to be triggered when the relays are inhibited).
5.3.7 Configuration of the MRC TS Module

A solder bridge (BR1), which is used to determine the function of the relay inhibit (see section 5.7.2 Additional Relay Outputs) for the connected relay modules, is provided on the module: Solder bridge BR1 = OPEN = relays are energised when the relay inhibit is turned on Solder bridge BR1 = CLOSED = relays are de-energised when the relay inhibit is turned on
Figure 5-9: Configuration of the MRC TS Module
Attention: Because the common alarms are normally energised and this is fixed in the system and cannot be changed, solder bridge BR1 on the first MRC TS module in the system (the first 40 relay outputs) should never be closed (unless an alarm is to be triggered when the relays are inhibited). In addition, the first 32 available relay outputs (relay output 9-40; 1st MGO module in the system) should also be configured according as normally energised, like the common alarms, when the option of inhibiting the relays via the LOCK connection is used.
5.3.8 Configuration of the MRO 8 TS Module

The function of the relay inhibit is determined by solder bridge BR1 on the MRC TS module.
5-16
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
5.3.9 Configuration of the MRO 16 TS Module

The function of the relay inhibit is determined by solder bridge BR1 on the MRC TS module.
5.3.10 Configuration of the MUT Module

No configuration
5.3.11 Configuration of the MAR Module

No configuration
5.3.12 Configuration of the MST Module

No configuration
5.3.13 Configuration of the MAO Module

Watchdog Reset Solder bridge BR5 = OPEN = standard function of the WATCHDOG (WDI signal only, no processor RESET)
Solder bridge BR5 = CLOSED = WATCHDOG generates a processor RESET in the event of a function error CAN-A/CAN-B Operation Solder bridges (BR1-BR4) can be used to select whether the MAO module is controlled via the CAN-A or CAN-B bus.
CAN-A CAN-B BR1 + BR3 = CLOSED & BR2 + BR4 = OPEN (Standard Setting) BR1 + BR3 = OPEN & BR2 + BR4 = CLOSED
Figure 5-10: Configuration of the MAO Module
SUPREMA
5-17
MSA
Installation
As of layout version 6, the operating modes for CAN-A or CAN-B buses and the turn-on behaviour must be configured with the S3 and S4 DIL switches. FREE-A-/B settings
Switch S3 2 3 OFF ON X OFF Function 4 ON OFF Function FREE-A/B by switches on the MIB module Function by switch FREE-A/B on the MAO module Behaviour at CAN failure All analog outputs at 2 mA. Last state is kept
1 OFF X
OFF X ON
OFF ON X
OFF OFF OFF
Turn-on behaviour OFF All analog outputs at 2 mA. OFF OFF All analog outputs at 0 mA.
X: Any switch CAN-A-/B setting

1 ON Switch S4 2 3 ON OFF Function 4 OFF Control of the MAO module by CAN-A bus (also for redundant applications)
Figure 5-11: Configuration MAO Module, Layout version 6
Note: The MAO module is always controlled by the CAN-A bus and is always outputting the measuring values of the MDO module.
5-18
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
5.3.14 Configuration of the MGO Module

Plug-in bridges (BR1-BR4) can be used to select whether the MGO module is controlled via the CAN-A or via the CAN-B bus. Configuration of turn-on and failure behaviour of the MGO module is effected via the DIL switch on the MIB module (FREE A + FREE B).
CAN-A CAN-B BR11 + BR13 = CLOSED & BR12 + BR14 = OPEN (Standard Setting) BR11 + BR13 = OPEN & BR12 + BR14 = CLOSED
Figure 5-12: Configuration of the MGO Module
Switch S1 (as from layout version 15)

1 OFF OFF Switch S1 2 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF Function 4 OFF Factory setting (SIL 3 operation) (Standard) ON Only for MGO software version 1.02.01 and older
Switch S2
Switch 1 ON OFF S2 2 ON X 3 OFF X Function 4 OFF Factory setting/Do not change X Bootloader active (only MGO-20)
As of layout version 12, for SIL applications, the operating modes for control via CAN-A or CAN-B buses, the turn-on behaviour must be configured with the S3 and S4 DIL switches.
SUPREMA
5-19
MSA
Installation
FREE-A/-B settings
1 OFF X Function 4 ON Function by switch FREE-A/B by switch on the M IB module (S tandard) OFF Function by switch FREE-A/B 1+2 on the M GO module Re la y be ha viour Be ha viour a t CAN fa ilure Turn-on be ha viour OFF OFF OFF Activated after 72 h Activated ON* OFF* OFF* De-activated after 72 h* De-activated* OFF OFF OFF Last state is kept Activated ON OFF OFF Last state is kept De-activated Sw itch S3 2 3 OFF ON X OFF
OFF OFF* ON ON
* For SIL 3 operation, the de-activation function is set to 72 h.
CAN-A/-B setting
1 ON OFF S w itch S 4 2 3 ON OFF O FF ON Function 4 OFF Control of the M GO m odule by CA N-A bus O N Control of the M GO m odule by CA N-B bus
Figure 5-13: MGO Module, as from layout version 15
5.3.15 Configuration MGO-20 module

The operating mode for the input signal through the CAN-A or CAN-B bus as well as the switch-on and configuration properties are to be set as in MGO-10 with DIL switches S3 and S4. Switch S1 is omitted. Figures 5-13 show the switch positions on the printed circuit board. Additional functions MGO-20: The module MGO-20 is furnished with a bootloader for installing new firmware. The switch S2-1 = OFF activates the bootloader mode. Attention: The normal function of the module is deactivated in the bootloader mode. This mode should therefore be used only by the MSA service personnel!
5-20
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
5.3.16 Configuration of the MCP Module

The MCP module is shipped factory-configured. No provisions are made for changing the configuration. Within the scope of the installation and start-up of the system or of the replacement of the MCP module, however, the bridge placement illustrated in Figure 5-12, MCP module, standard configuration, must be checked and corrected if necessary.
Figure 5-14: MCP Module, standard configuration
5.3.17 Configuration of the MDO Module

The MDO module is shipped factory-configured. No changes to the configuration are planned. Within the scope of the installation and start-up or the replacement of the MCP module, however, the bridge placement shown in Figure 5-15, MDO module, standard configuration, must be checked and corrected if necessary.
Figure 5-15: MDO Module, standard configuration
SUPREMA
5-21
MSA
Installation
Note: The four link plugs (BR431 434) are omitted without replacement from layout version 12. From layout version 12, the bridge circuit 333 on the rear side of MDO permits a low-end reduction of the clock frequency for systems with an older software version (from 25 to 16MHz, required only up to version 1.02.09)
Figure 5-16: MDO Module Memory Chip Assignment H/L
5.3.18 Configuration of the MDA Module

Switch S1
1 ON OFF Switch S1 2 3 ON ON X X Function 4 ON X Factory setting / Do not change Bootloader active (only MDA-20)
The module MDA 20 is furnished with a bootloader for installing new firmware. The switch S2-1 = OFF activates the bootloader mode. Attention: The normal function of the module is deactivated in the bootloader mode. This mode should therefore be used only by the MSA service personnel! The switch S2 is not used.
5-22
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
D1
D91
D2 D3
1
ABC
C92
C91
R91 R92
ON
S1
1 2 3 4
ON
S2 D320
1 2 3 4
R320 R321 D14
D321
32
LP2
ST 1
Figure 5-17: Configuration of the MDA Module
5.3.19 Configuration of the MFI Module

S101 Code Switch Functions S101 1 = ON, 2 = ON, 3 = OFF The fire detectors are powered from the SUPREMA power supply (dc coupling between signal and SUPREMA power supply) 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = ON The fire detectors are powered from a separate power supply. Signal line and SUPREMA power supply are electrically isolated. 4 = ON The module is configured for applications with a zener barrier. 4 = OFF The module is configured for applications without a zener barrier.
Figure 5-18: View of the MFI Module
SUPREMA
5-23
MSA
Installation
Configuration in the SUPREMA menu Settings/Measure points/Sensor data

Sensor MFI Measuring range 0 ... 100 Units any
Settings/Measure points/Alarms
1st alarm/level Above alarm level Below alarm level Latching 2nd to 4th alarm 2nd to 4th level 30.00 Alarm No alarm Alarm latching de-activated de-activated
5.3.20 Configuration of the MSI Module

S101 Code Switch
Figure 5-19: View of the MSI Module
Configuration in the SUPREMA menu Settings/Measure points/Sensor data

Sensor MSI Measuring range 0 ... 100 Units any
Settings/Measure points/Alarms
1st alarm/level Above alarm level Below alarm level Latching 2nd to 4th alarm 2nd to 4th level 30.00 Alarm contact shut Alarm contact open Alarm latching de-activated de-activated
5-24
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
S 101 Features 1 2 3 4 X X - - The Module is connected to an external power supply (18 ... 32 VDC) via terminal 2(+) and terminal 5(-). A Supply Voltage <16 V causes an Failure message. The out terminals are electrically isolated from the other SUPREMA-terminals. The maximum allowed Voltage between the output terminals and the other SUPREMA-terminals is 50 VDC or 24 VAC. Every MSI module requires his own supply voltage. - X X The module is energised from the SUPREMA Power Supply. The output terminals are not electrically isolated from the other SUPREMA-terminals. S 102 X X - - The switch type (N.O.) - Normally OPEN is supported. A closed contact causes an alarm. Several contacts connected in parallel can be monitored with one module. - X X The switch type (N.C.) - Normally CLOSED is supported. An open contact causes an alarm. Several contacts connected in series can be monitored with one module. There is no provision for connecting several contacts in parallel. S 103 * - - Contact without a series resistor. There is no provision for an END OF LINE resistor. Contact type N.O.: The number of contacts connected in parallel is unlimited. A short circuit of the connecting wires will cause a alarm. An open circuit of the connecting wires is not reported. Contact type N.C.: The number of contacts connected in series is unlimited. A short circuit of the connecting wires is not reported. An open circuit of the connecting wires will cause a alarm. * - X Contact without a series resistor. END OF LINE resistor = 2.2 K 5%. Contact type N.O.: The number of contacts connected in parallel is unlimited. A short circuit of the connecting wires will cause a alarm. An open circuit of the connecting wires will cause a Failure alarm. Contact type N.C.: The number of contacts connected in series is unlimited. A short circuit of the connecting wires will cause no alarm. An open circuit of the connecting wires will cause a alarm. X X Every Contact with a series resistor = 2.2 K 5%. END OF LINE resistor = 2.2 K 5%. Contact type N.O.: The number of contacts connected in parallel is limited to 20. A short circuit of the connecting wires will cause a Failure message. An open circuit or interrupt of the connecting wires cause a Failure message. Contact type N.C.: Only one contact can be monitored. A short circuit of the connecting wires will cause a Failure message. A serial connection of that type of contact can not monitored.
- = Switch OFF * = Switch position dont care
X = Switch ON
SUPREMA
5-25
MSA
Installation
5.3.21 MRD Dummy Relay

Module application/function Up to 5 relay modules can be connected (MRO 8/MRO 16) to the MRC module. If not all 5 relay modules are connected, an MRD module must be plugged into each of the unused relay module connectors. The unused relays are simulated by this module. With an MRD module connected the driver outputs of the MGO module are provided with a fixed load. Monitoring the driver outputs therefore allows a failure state to be recognised. All 40 outputs of the MGO modules are monitored. Output failures (open/short circuit) are identified and are reported as a system failure.
Figure 5-20: View of the MRC Module
MRC X3 -X7 = 20-pin connection for relay modules MRO 8/MRO 16 Unused relay module connections have to be fitted with MRD modules. Module use/connection On each MRD module one resistor is connected in series with a light-emitting diode to provide the load for the MGO module. The light-emitting diodes show the switching state of the MGO driver output. LED ON = driver output conducting = relay activated LED OFF = driver output not conducting = relay deactivated
5-26
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Figure 5-21: View of MRD Module
LED 1 8 = Driver outputs channel A LED 9 16 = Driver outputs channel B Attention: Note the correct polarity of the modules, see illustrations 5-20
5.4 System Configuration (Hardware)

5.4.1 Slot Assignments
After all the modules have been configured (or after their configuration has been checked), all the required modules should be inserted into the racks or pushed from behind onto the contacts and fastened in place mechanically by means of the retainers provided. Assignment: Front: Slot 1 Slot 25 Rear: MST Module free Pos 110
Slot 615
For each slot on the front there is a corresponding module connector plug on the rear. To install modules that are to be inserted from the front (MCP module, MDA module, MAI module, MGO module, and MAO module) detach the front plate and flip it down. The following rules should be observed: Front: Slots 13: The first 3 slots are reserved exclusively for the MCP module. In systems without redundancy, slot 2 is the standard slot for the MCP module (see section 10 Redundant Systems).
SUPREMA
5-27
MSA
Installation
Slots 45 : Slots 4 and 5 are reserved exclusively for the MDA module. In systems without redundancy, the 4th slot must be used for the MDA module (see section 10 Redundant Systems). Slots 613: Slots 613 can be filled with MAI, MAO, or MGO modules, as desired. Slots 1415: Slots 14 and 15 may be filled only with MAO or MGO modules. Rear: Connection site 1: The first connection site is reserved exclusively for the MST module. The racks are shipped with the MST module installed as standard equipment, so that only Positions 110 are available for configuration. Positions 110: Positions 1-10 can be filled with either MAT, MUT modules, as desired. Positions 9: The MRO 8 module can only be installed at Position 9. Note: The MRO 8 module must be installed in POS 9 only! It is impossible to be use more than one MRO 8 module in one rack.
Figure 5-22: Slots and Positions on the rack
Slots in the Rack: Slots 13: Slots 45: Slots 613: Slots 1415: INPUT: OUTPUT: slots for MCP modules only slots for MDA modules only slots for INPUT/OUTPUT modules slots for OUTPUT modules only MAI module (with MPI/MCI modules) MGO module MAO module
5-28
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Connection sites on the rear of the rack: MST: (Positions 110): connection site for the MST module only connection site for: - MAT module (8 x 5 terminals) - MUT module (40-way ribbon cable) - MRO 8 module (Position 9!)
Figure 5-23: Rear of the Rack
5.4.2 System Requirements

The following requirements must be fulfilled in order to build a functional system: Exactly one MCP module and one MDO module are required for a system (up to 8 racks) (non-redundant design). The MCP module must be properly connected by ribbon cable to the MDO module mounted in the front panel. Exactly one MDA module is required for a rack (non-redundant design) if MAI modules are also present in the rack. The numbering of the measurement channels of the MAI modules is determined by the selected slot. Channels 18 are assigned to slot 6 (POS 1), channels 916 to slot 7 (POS 2), etc. Attention: In the standard design with a MAT module installed in the rack, the first MAI module must be inserted into slot 7 (POS 2), the 2nd MAI module into slot 9 (POS 4), etc. Thus the measurement channel numbers obtained are: 1st MAI module (POS 2): 9-16. 2nd MAI module (POS 4): 25-32, etc. The system automatically assigns the measurement channels numbers 18 and the associated measurement values to the first inserted MAO module (and the measurement channel numbers 916 to the second MAO module etc.). Attention: Because, in the standard design with a MAT module inserted in the rack, this module is in slot 7 (POS 2/measurement channel numbers 9-16), two MAO module cards must be inserted in order that the measurement values of measurement channels 9-16 can be transmitted as 4 ... 20 mA output signals.
SUPREMA
5-29
MSA
Installation
It is extremely important to ensure that the modules plugged into the rear are compatible with the modules inserted in the front (e.g., the combination of an MAI module with an MRO 8 module is non-functional). (see table 5-11: Assignment of the Connection Modules) The modules plugged into the rear must be located at the same slots as the modules with the associated functions plugged into the front. Note: A MAT module covers 2 slots; a MRO 8 module covers 3 slots.
The following combinations of modules installed in the front and in the rear are possible or required:
Front
Rear
MCP module MST module MDA module ---------MAI module MAT module (direct connection of sensors) MUT module (connection to the MAT TS module or the MGT 40 TS module for remote connection of sensors) MGO module MRO 8 module (direct connection of relay outputs) only POS 9/Slot 14 MUT module (connection to the MRO 8 TS module or the MRO 16 TS module via the MRC TS module for remote connection of relay outputs) MUT module (connection to the MGT 40 TS module for providing driver outputs for the connection of magnetic valves, etc.) MAO module MAT module (direct connection of the 4 ... 20 mA outputs) MUT module (connection to the MAT TS module or the MGT 40 TS module for remote connection of the 4 ... 20 mA outputs)
Table 5-11: Assignment of the Connection Modules
Note: Further information on the functions of the individual modules can be found in section 3.6 Description of the Modules.
5.4.3 Maximum Loads

Note: It is extremely important to ensure that the maximum loads are not exceeded in order to guarantee a reliable operation. The following load limits must not be exceeded when a SUPREMA system is being configured: The operating voltage may be from 19.2 VDC to 32 VDC. The values specified below are for an operating voltage 24 VDC.
5-30
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Maximum output current of an input Maximum output power for an input (Sensor and cable) Maximum output power for a MAI module Maximum output power for 8 MAI modules Maximum input power for 8 MAI modules Maximum input power for a MIB module (for a rack) Maximum current load for a MIB module Maximum current load MIB module/GND terminal (MAI module and MGO module currents) Maximum output current for a MSP module (Rack - power pack) Maximum output power for a MSP module (Rack - power pack)
400 mA 5W 40 W 320 W 400 W 480 W 20 A 32 A 6.5 A 150 W
Table 5-12: System Configuration/Maximum Loads

Nominal current of a driver output Maximum current of a driver output Maximum current for 8 driver outputs (a MGO module has each 5 driver IC's with each 8 driver outputs) Maximum current total of all current loads of a MGO module (one MGO module is disposing of 40 driver outputs) 12 A (40 x 0.3 A) 0.3 A 1.0 A 4.0 A(8 x 0.5 A)
Table 5-13: MGO Module/Maximum Loads
When setting the number of modules allowable per rack, the following factors of influence have to be observed: The power of the sensors to be connected including the losses resulting from the cable lengths (MAI module/ MIB module). The currents of the modules connected to the relay driver outputs (MGO module/ MIB module: GND terminal). The power requirement of the system modules (see table 5-36: Power Requirements of the System Modules). The power available from the supply voltage.
For further details, see the tables in section 5.11 Connection of the System Power Supply and section 11 Technical Data and the operation and maintenance manuals of the sensors to be connected. Note: A cooling fan must be installed and operated to prevent overheating in the installation framework if more than 65 measuring points are fitted with MPI modules.
5.4.4 Configuration Examples

Standard System with 8 Inputs/8 Common Alarm Relays
Figure 5-24: Configuration example 1
SUPREMA
5-31
MSA
Installation
Standard System with 32 Measurement Sites, Redundant Design
5.5 Systems Consisting of Several Racks

5.5.1 Systems with Central Recording of Measuring Values
In systems with several racks, which are not isolated from each other, the following points should be kept in mind: Each rack must have a guaranteed voltage supply. The GND-connectors of all racks must be interconnected. When the central unit respectively the satellites consist of several racks, note that in each rack-group the GND-connectors must be interconnected. The racks must be connected to each other by a CAN bus. The racks are connected by way of the MST modules on the rear with ready-made CAN bus cables. For a multi-rack system, contacts 1 and 2 (CAN-A, CAN-B) of the DIL switch on the MIB module in the last rack i.e., the one where the CAN bus ends should be closed. All DIL switch contacts 1 and 2 (CAN-A, CAN-B) on the tracks in between must be open (see section 5.3.1 Configuration of the MIB Module).
5-32
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
The setting of the CAN bus bit rate must be the same for all racks and should correspond to the standard settings defined for the total number of inputs in question (see section 5.3.1 Configuration of the MIB Module). Each rack must have it own CAN node number. The standard setting for the first rack is 111 (see section 5.3.1 Configuration of the MIB Module). In the case of non-redundant systems, the standard practice is to use the CAN-A bus connection; when a redundant system is built, the CAN-B is also connected (see section 10 Redundant Systems). A cooling fan must be installed and operated for the warmth removal in the installation framework if more than 65 measuring points are fitted with MPI modules.
Connection Notes The MAI Module has been modified to facilitate applying the CAN Bus connections. Unlike the previous MST module (G status A), the revised version (G status B) has an input and output for each CAN Bus. For this reason, when connecting several racks via CAN bus, the CAN Bus T-piece is no longer required. (Art.-No.: 10030080). In the following, the connection of several racks (BGT) via CAN bus is described for both MST module variations. Note: For reason of clarity, only one CAN bus is described, the other CAN buses are connected the same way.
Signification:
St = Plug B = Socket (stands for plug connectors at the respective line)
For connections and terminal assignment see section 5.10 System Ports (MST module). MST Module G Status A: Connection of 2 racks:
The CAN terminating resistor at Rack 1 is not set, at Rack 2 it is set.
SUPREMA
5-33
MSA
Installation
Connection of 3 Racks:
The CAN terminating resistor at Rack 1 and Rack 2 is not set, at Rack 3 it is set. Connection of 4 Racks:
The CAN terminating resistor at Rack 1, Rack 2 and Rack 3 is not set, at Rack 4 it is set. For every further rack, a T-piece, ribbon cable and a CAN line socket/plug is needed. MST Module G Status B (revised Version): Connection of 2 Racks:
The CAN terminating resistor at Rack 1 is not set, at Rack 2 it is set.
5-34
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Connection of 3 Racks:
The CAN terminating resistor at Rack 1 and Rack 2 is not set, at Rack 3 it is set. Connection of 4 Racks:
The CAN terminating resistor at Rack 1, Rack 2 and Rack 3 is not set, at Rack 4 it is set. For every further rack, a CAN line socket/plug is needed. Listing CAN Bus Connection Elements:
Description SUPREMA CAN cable plug/plug, 5 m SUPREMA CAN cable socket/socket, 5 m SUPREMA CAN cable plug/socket, 5 m SUPREMA CAN cable plug/socket, 0.5 m SUPREMA CAN cable socket/socket, 0.5 m SUPREMA CAN cable plug/plug, 0.5 m SUPREMA CAN T-piece SUPREMA CAN ribbon cable D-SUB SUPREMA CAN terminating resistor socket SUPREMA CAN terminating resistor plug Order-No. 10030081 10030082 10030083 10030084 10030085 10030086 10030080 10030087 10030078 10030079
Table 5-14: CAN Bus Connection Elements
SUPREMA
5-35
MSA
Installation
5.5.2 Systems with Decentralised Recording of Measuring Values (Satellites)

To reduce the installation cost for systems with large distances between the sensors and alarms the SUPREMA evaluation unit, for recording of measuring values as well as control of alarm means can be carried out near the sensors. This can be achieved by having a SUPREMA rack (rack with MDO module) installed in a control station, and a satellite SUPREMA rack (rack-E without MDO), equipped only with with measuring points and/or outputs, installed in the field. Both racks communicate with one another via the CAN Bus. This means that instead of up to 64 sensor cables, only one CAN bus cable has to be connected.
Note: At distances >20 m, a CAN bridge has to be interposed. (see section 5.5.2.1 SUPREMA CAN Bridge CBM) Examples of Satellite Applications: With one satellite:
With two or n Satellites:
5-36
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Connection Note:
Figure 5-28: Connection CAN-Bridge CBM
The terminating resistor of rack 1 must be deactivated, and a 120 Ohm resistor connected between terminal 2 and 4, NET 0, of the CAN connection. A 120 ohms resistor for Net 1 must be connected under the terminal (2 to 4) NET1 of the CAN connection. The CAN terminating resistor at Rack 2 has to be set.
5.5.2.1 SUPREMA CAN Bridge CBM

If a satellite is operated with a cable length > 20 metres, a SUPREMA CAN BRIDGE CBM must be provided. It is necessary for galvanic isolation, the matching of bit rates and the filtering of CAN Identifiers (data reduction).
Figure 5-29: SUPREMA CAN-Bridge CBM
The SUPREMA CAN BRIDGE is supplied with 24V DC (X101). The CAN Bus of the Basic Rack is connected to NET 0 (X400), and the satellite rack is connected to NET1 (X400) (Exact connection assignments are to be seen from the CAN Bridge hardware).
SUPREMA
5-37
MSA
Installation
For parameter setting, a serial interface (DSUB plug connector X100) is provided. The CAN Bridge parameters can be set using a terminal program (e.g. Hyper Terminal for Windows).Details of this process are described below. The code switches SW211 and SW210 of the CAN Bridge are only for internal service purposes and must always be in position 0. When both LEDs (1 and 2) are on the status is good. If there is a failure at one of the two CAN buses, the corresponding LED will flash, LED 1 for NET 1, and LED 2 for NET 0. For the correct function of the SUPREMA CAN bridge, some points must be considered: a) b) c) d) Baudrate setting at the Central Rack (depends on the number of measuring points) Baudrate setting at the satellite rack (depends on the distance of the satellite) Rack number (Dip switch at the MIB module) Components of the Satellite racks (Plug positions of the MDA, MGO, MAO, MAI modules) Note: 32 filters max. may be set, i.e., in a satellite, 9 MGO/MAO modules max. can be integrated. The number of MDA/MAI modules per rack is not limited. As to a):
Measuring points 1 - 256 5 Bit rate setting in kB/s Bridge Simplex/Duplex command 250 B0:4
Table 5-15: Baudrate at the Central Rack
As to b):
Measuring points 1 - 64 65 - 128 129 - 256 0 - 800 0 - 400 0 - 200 50 125 250 Distance in m Bit rate setting in kB/s Bridge command B1:9 B1:6 B1:4
Table 5-16: Baudrate at the Satellite Rack
As to (c) and (d): The CAN identifier for the CAN Bridge filter function must be calculated, see the following section. After calculation, the results must be transformed to hexadecimal numbers.
5-38
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Calculation formula for the CAN Identifiers: COBID (Module) = COBID + NID NID BGTID SLNR COBID COBID (Module) = = = = = Node ID Rack number (-1) Slot number CAN ID assignment (see table 5-18) CAN Identifier for COBID of the Module NID = (16 * BGTID + SLNR)
Node ID (NID) Slot No. (SLNR) Module 16 * Rack ID + 16 * Rack ID + 16 * Rack ID + 16 * Rack ID + 16 * Rack ID + 16 * Rack ID + 16 * Rack ID + 1 2 3 4 5 6 ... 15 16 MCP A MCP B MCP C MDA A, ... MDA B, ... MGO, MGI, MAO, ... MDO
Table 5-17: Calculation of the Node ID
Message
COB-ID (Module) COB-ID (Module) Purpose (dec) (hex) 0 80 80+NID 100 100+NID 200+NID 280+NID 300+NID 580+NID 600+NID 700+NID Start and Stop of nodes Synchronisation Failure message (128+Node-ID) Time Stamp Digital Input (256+Node-ID) Digital Output (512+Node-ID) Analog Input (640+Node-ID) Analog Output (768+Node-ID) Reading from object directory (1408+Node-ID) Writing in object directory (1536+Node-ID) Network control (1792+Guard-ID)
COB-ID (hex) Range 0 80 81-FF 100 181-1FF 201-27F 281-2FF 301-37F 581-5FF 601-67F 701-77F
NMT-Start/Stop 0 SYNC EMERGENCY TIME STAMP PDO1(rx) PDO1(tx) PDO2(rx) PDO2(tx) SDO(rx) SDO(tx) Nodegard 128 128+NID 256 384+NID 512+NID 640+NID 768+NID 1408+NID 1538+NID 1792+NID
Table 5-18: CAN-ID Assignment
Note: One filter must be set for NET0 to NET1 and one mask must be set for NET1 to NET2.
Standard Identifiers are needed, which must be present in any filter, these are: for NET 0: 0, 80, 100. (All numbers are shown in hexadecimal)
SUPREMA
5-39
MSA
Installation
Calculation example of the MDA module in slot 4 of rack 2: ID calculation for:

Writing Object directory Nodegard 16*1+4+1536=1556=614(hex) 16*1+4+1792=1812=714(hex) Net1<-Net0 Net1<-Net0
Calculation example of the MGO module in slot 14 of rack 1: ID calculation for:

Digital Output Writing Object directory Nodegard 16*0+14+512=526=20E(hex) 16*0+14+1536=1550=60E(hex) 16*0+14+1792=1806=70E(hex) Net1<-Net0 Net1<-Net0 Net1<-Net0
Calculation example of the MAO module in slot 13 of rack 3: ID calculation for:

Analog Output Writing Object directory Nodegard 16*2+13+768=813=32D(hex) 16*2+13+1536=1581=62D(hex) 16*2+13+1792=1837=72D(hex) Net1<-Net0 Net1<-Net0 Net1<-Net0
Configuration example: Components of the individual racks: Central rack

Module MDO MCP MDA MAI MGO Slot 16 2 4 6-8 14 MS 1-24 Remark Number 1 1 1 3 1
Rack-CAN-Node Number : 1 (set on MIB module) Bit rate: 250 kB CAN termination at the MIB module, if CAN line to CAN bridge is <30 cm, otherwise provide a 120 Ohms terminating resistor at the CAN bridge, and switch off the termination at the MIB module (see section 5.3.1 Configuration of MIB Module).
Satellite:
Module MDA MAI MGO Slot 4 6-8 14 Remark MS 65-96 Number 1 3 1
5-40
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Set on rack 2 Bitrate: 50 kB Switch on the CAN-terminating resistor at MIB
Parameter Setting for CAN Bus A Net 0 is the Central Rack To reduce the data overflow at the CAN bus, the CAN bridge is provided with a filter which only lets the data required pass through to NET 1. Filter for NET 0 after NET 1:
B0:4 I0:0 I1:0 I0:80 I1:80 I0:100 I1:100 I0:614 I1:614 I0:714 I1:714 I0:21E I1:21E I0:61E I1:61E I0:71E I1:71E {Bit rate = 250kB} {START/STOP} {Sync Byte} {Time stamp} {SDO tx MDA (SAT1)} {Nodegard for MDA (SAT1)} {Data for MGO (SAT1)} {SDO tx MGO (SAT1)} {Nodegard for MGO (SAT1)}
Net 1 are the satellites Filter for NET1 to NET0:

B1:9 M1:0:0xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx {Bit rate = 50kb} {Mask for NET1 to NET0}
With help of a text editor, a *.txt file is generated, which only contains the data required:
B0:4 I0:0 I1:0 I0:80 I1:80 I0:100 I1:100 I0:614 I1:614 I0:714 I1:714 I0:21E I1:21E I0:61E I1:61E I0:71E I1:71E B1:9 M1:0:0xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SUPREMA
5-41
MSA
Installation
Command Set of the CAN Bridge CBM:

R E C Bn:m Read the CAN bridge parameter setting Copy the parameters to memory Delete all parameters from the CAN bridge Baudrate setting: n = 0 for Net0 n = 1 for Net1 m = See Tables 1 and 2 Filter from NET0 to NET1, ID stands for the necessary identifier. Filter from NET1 to NET0, ID stands for the necessary identifier. Mask from NET1 to NET0, all identifier will let pass.
I0:ID I1:ID I1:ID I0:ID M1:0:0xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Details can be found in the CAN Bridge CBM manual.
5.5.2.2 Programming of the CAN Bridge CBM

Programming is carried out with the help of a terminal program which can send *.txt files. Connection Line: For the data transfer, a Null modem line is needed. Modulation of the Terminal Program:
Baudrate: Data bits: Stop bits: Parity: 9600 Bits per second 8 1 n
5-42
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Example of the Hyperterminal for Windows: The Null modem line must be connected to the CAN bridge CBM (X100), and the Computer COM Port. The terminal program must be started with the a.m. settings. After switching on the CAN bridge, the start screen on the terminal display looks like that shown below, or similar.
.........................============================= > > > R T O S - U H < < < ============================= Nuc=7.8-A Daemon=2.3 EdFm=2.L Vi/Vo=1.6 assign=0.9 Math=1.H Hyp=15.4-J R/W_P90=1.6 Dat1.4 Dev = 3.5 IDF=1.1 Prom=3.0 Editor 10.B Help=1.F Sh/sr=4.7-C sh/ext=1.2x Shell=4.4-D XC 4.2-L Loader=6.5-F copy=1.H ScAcc=1.3 User=0.8 I/O_Pack=25 DBV/rw=1.1 Nil=1.2 Extp=4.3A Setup=3.3e SysRes=15c EX=2.2-M Check=1.5 CBM-DP_Ini=2.5 Imp/CBM_S=5.8C T_IrLk=1.0 Flash_Prom=0.P SRamDsk=1.8g Fm=UHFM3.J LineEd-F=1.3G RESET. C200I:Using I/O-Base 0x800000 for card 0ADRS_00200000 Flash_Prom 1*AMD29 F080 CPU-Type_68331 25.2_MHz Date_-------- Time_00:00:00 C200I: Using Interrupt 30 for card 0 C200I: Using Interrupt 30 for card 0 C200I: CAN_SJA100 with 2 Nets identified C200I: Hardware-Version=1.0.00 C200I: Firmware-Version=0.0.00
Command R and >Enter<, will get the current parameters:

V1.3 >r B0:4 B1:6
This is the contents for a reset CAN bridge; both baudrates are set to 125k. Before programming all parameters in the CAN-Bridge must be delete. When the *.txt file generated above is transferred with help of the terminal program, the following screen contents will be seen:
>B0:4 >I0:0 I1:0 >I0:80 I1:80 >I0:100 I1:100 >I0:614 I1:614 >I0:714 I1:714 >I0:21E I1:21E >I0:61E I1:61E >I0:71E I1:71E >B1:9 >M1:0:0xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SUPREMA
5-43
MSA
Installation
Press E and >Enter<, to write the parameters into the memory, and then check them by pressing R and >Enter<.
e >r B0:4 I0:0 I1:0 I0:80 I1:80 I0:100 I1:100 I0:614 I1:614 I0:714 I1:714 I0:21e I1:21e I0:61e I1:61e I0:71e I1:71e B1:9 M1:0:0xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
The parameters have now been successfully set. Note: The parameter setting of a CAN bridge for the CAN Bus B is carried out the same way as the parameter setting for the CAN Bus A. Technical Data:
Supply voltage Nominal voltage 24 VDC 10 % Current consumption (at 20 C): typ. 85 mA Plug connector X 100 (DSUB9, plug) - serial interface X 101 (6-pin screw connector UEGM) 24 V supply voltage X 400-SIO331 (Combicon design, 5-pin MSTB2.5/5-5.08) - CAN or DeviceNet Net 0 X 400-SIO-CAN2 (Combicon design, 5-pin MSTB2.5/5-5.08) - CAN or DeviceNet Net 1 Temperature range 5 ... 50 C environmental temperature Humidity 90 % max., noncondensing Dimensions Width: 40 mm, Height: 85 mm, Depth: 83 mm of the cabinet (including mounting rail and protruding connector (W x H x D) DSUB9, without CANDeviceNet plug) Weight approx. 200 g
Table 5-19: Technical Data CAN-Bridge CBM
5.5.3 Systems with peripheral data logging (satellites) and LWL converters
In the case of great distances or electromagnetic disturbances to be expected, the optical fibre (LWL) transfer can be used. In this case, no potential equalization between base station and the satellite will occur either. The LWL converter changes electrical signals to optical signals, which are no more disturbed by other electrical signals. A star-shaped network topology is compulsory, to avoid critical values of the CAN bus capacity.
5-44
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Examples of Satellite applications With one satellite and a LWL converter:
CANBridge LWL Converter Base station l = max. 2000m
LWL Converter Satellite
With 2 or n satellites and LWL converters:

CAN Bridge LWL Converter Base Station L = max. 2000 m LWL Converter Satellite 1
CAN Bridge LWL Converter L = max. 2000 m
LWL Converter
Satellite 2
CAN Bridge LWL Converter L = max. 2000 m
LWL Converter
Satellite n
Here, only CAN A is displayed, CAN B is assembled in the same way. Connection advice:
Base Station Rack 1 Jack NET0 NET1 CAN Bridge CBM LWL cable
Satellite Rack 2 Plug CAN Line LWL Converter LWL Converter
The terminator at rack 1 must be de-activated, and a 120 ohms resistor has additionally to be clamped under the terminal (2 to 4) NET 0 of the CAN connection. For Net 1 a 120 ohms resistor has additionally to be clamped under the terminal (2 to 4) NET 1 of the CAN connection. The terminators of both LWL converters must be activated (S5) as well as the satellite terminator.
SUPREMA
5-45
MSA
Installation
5.5.3.1 SUPREMA CAN LWL Converter

The voltage supply (24 V) of the CAN LWL converter is effected via a COMBICON connector, which is also equipped with a relay contact for failure output. The CAN bus is equally connected via a 4-pin COMBICON connector. The LW line is connected via an ST connector. The baudrate of the converter can be set by means of DIP switches. Additionally, there is an extra switch for the CAN terminator in the converter. The LWL converters dispose of a very good diagnosis function which enables them to locate errors very quickly. A bar graph displays the signal quality at the optical fibre side, and a LED indicates possible errors at the copper side. To guarantee the function of the SUPREMA LWL converters, some points must be taken into consideration in the rup-up. These are: a) The CAN baudrate must match with that of the SUPREMA (or CAN bridge). b) The line length must align with the baudrate (max. 2000 m). c) Take notice of optical fibre line crossing between TD and RD.
View of the terminals/LEDs:

1. Voltage supply: 24 VDC 2. Voltage supply: 0 VDC 3. Connection switching contact (only base module) 4. Connection switching contact (only base module) 5. CAN connection: Shield (only base module) 6. CAN connection: GND (only base module) 7. CAN connection: C_High (only base module) 8. CAN connection: C_Low (only base module) 9. LED: Ready for operation/ Redundancy-Standby operation 10. LED: Bus activity 11. LED: Bus error 12. LED field: Quality of LWL Signal 13. LED: LWL error 14. LWL connection: Sending path 15. LWL connection: Receive path 16. Back plane
5-46
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Technical Data: Voltage supply Current compumption Connection of bus interface Bus terminator Data rate Connection LWL interface Wave length Operating temperature Funktion test EXAM Storage temperature Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight Humidity LWL Line Specification: Line type F-S200/230 F-G 62.5/125 F-G 50/125 Wave length 850 nm 850 nm 850 nm Connector ST (B-FOC) ST (B-FOC) ST (B-FOC) Damping 8 dB/Km 3 dB/Km 2.5 dB/Km Maximum length 1500 2000* 2000* 10 V ... 48 VDC max. 100 mA CANopen, 4-pin COMBICON 120 Ohm connectable 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800 kBit/s adjustable ST (B-FOC) 850 nm -20 C to +60 C +5 C to +55 C -40 C to +85 C 22.5 mm x 105 mm x 115 mm approx. 120 g 10 % ... 95 %, non-condensing
* Other line lengths after consultation with MSA AUER. For further technical data and operating conditions, see the LWL Converter Manual.
SUPREMA
5-47
MSA
Installation
5.6 Connection of the Sensors

5.6.1 General Instructions
Warning: Always turn off the voltage to the system before connecting the sensors. Incorrect connection of the sensors can cause damage both to the SUPREMA and to the sensor itself. It must be ensured that the adapter modules corresponding to the sensors are plugged into the appropriate MAI module (verify that the sequence is correct (see section 5.3.2 Configuration of the MAI Module). After the sensors have been connected, they are to be separated electrically again by pulling the connector plug on the MAT or MAT TS module. They are to be plugged in again individually only as part of the startup procedure (see section 6 Startup ). If the MGT 40 TS module is being used, this is to be disconnected by pulling the ribbon cable connector to the MUT module. To ensure that the system will function correctly, the EMC Directives and the measures derived from them must be observed (see section 5.1.1 Installation Instructions for Following the EMC Directives, and section 5.1.2 Instructions on Meeting the EMC Requirements on the SUPREMA Control System).
The cables are to be connected to the SUPREMA and to the sensors in observance of the allowable cable cross sections and the maximum cable lengths. A detailed description of the connections can be found in the connection diagram for the type of sensor in question and in the sensor data sheet (see Appendix). The operating and maintenance instructions of the sensor to be connected should also be noted.
5.6.2 Notes for the Operation With Catalytic Combustion Sensors

Sensor poisons For the safe operation of the catalytic combustion sensors it must be made sure that in the environmental air no substances and gases which damage or poison the sensor appear. These sensor poisons are a. o. Silicone, Silane compounds, Hydrogen Sulfide, Sulfur compounds. In the case of doubt a MSA-Auer employee must be contacted to judge on the spot the possible appearance of sensor poisons and suggest alternative measurement procedures. Oxygen Concentration Catalytic combustions sensors operation is only possible at an O2 concentration of above 10 Vol.%. At O2 concentrations above 22 Vol.%, the EX approval for remote measuring heads becomes invalid. Measuring Free Before the installation of the sensors it must be made sure that the environmental atmosphere is free of combustible gases (e.g. by check with hand-held test instruments). The unambiguity otherwise cannot be ensured to the measuring value indication at the SUPREMA. 3-conductor operation of passive sensors At use of passive sensors in 3-conductor operation, the requirements of line control according to EN 61779-1 are comply only up to a maximum line- resistance of 1.7 Ohm pro lead respectively 3.4 Ohm loop resistance. If the line-resistance exceeds 1.7 Ohm pro lead respectively 3.4 Ohm loop resistance the 5-conductor operation is recommended.
5-48
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
5.6.3 Note for Operation with Active Sensors (0/4 ... 20 mA)
At use of MCI modules Order No 10021029 and 10041567: The requirements of line control according to EN 61779-1 are not met with 3-wire operation in case of short-circuit of the signal output of the remote measuring head against GND. This note is invalid if using the MCI modules Order No 10043997 and 10044020. This modules are without any qualification operative.
5.6.4 Overview of the Terminal Assignment

In the following, an overview is presented of the assignment of the terminals. If the sensors are to be connected directly to the rack, the MAT module is to be used. For remote connection (installation on a mounting rail), the MAT TS module (maximum conductor cross section, 1.5 mm2; sensors can be electrically isolated individually) or the MGT 40 TS module (maximum conductor cross section, 2.5 mm2; 8 sensors per module, can be isolated electrically only as a group) can be used. The remote modules are connected to the MUT module on the rack by the associated ribbon cable. MAT Module/MAT TS Module/Sensor Connections The function of the terminal connections of the MAT/MAT TS module depends on the module card plugged into the rack.
Sensor Type Catalytic/Passive 5-wire Catalytic/Passive 3-wire (MSA AUER) MAI Module with active/ MCI Module 2-wire MAI Module with active/ MCI Module 3-wire MAI Module with Semiconductor/ MPI Module HL active 4-wire Module Type MAI Module with MPI Module WT MAI Module with MPI Module WT Terminal 1 K (white) Terminal 2 Terminal 3 Terminal 4 Terminal 5 K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) D (grey) + IBr + UX - IBr K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) + IBr + UX - IBr Bridge K Bridge D Bridge D +24 V GND -H (yellow)
Bridge K 4 ... 20 mA signal (GND) 4 ... 20 mA +24 V signal +M (white) +H (green) -M (brown)
Table 5-20: MAT/MAT TS Module, Terminal Assignment, Sensor Connections
Figure 5-30: MAT Module/MAT TS Module, Connector Plug
For the 3-wire operation of the passive WT sensors, bridges are to be provided: Terminals 12: Terminals 45: BR KK BR DD
If wire jumpers cannot be installed at the terminals, they can be provided on the rear of the MAT module in the form of solder bridges. (next to the ribbon plug of the MAT TS module). (see section 5.3.4 Configuration of the MAT Module and section 5.3.5 Configuration of the MAT TS Module)
SUPREMA
5-49
MSA
Installation
MGT 40 TS Module/Sensor Connections

MAI Module with MPI Module (WT) Point No. 1 Terminal No. 2 1 4 3 6 2 5 8 7 10 9 3 12 11 14 13 16 4 15 18 17 20 19 5 22 21 24 23 26 6 25 28 27 30 29 7 32 31 34 33 36 8 35 38 37 40 39 5-wire K (white) K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) D (grey) K (white) K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) D (grey) K (white) K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) D (grey) K (white) K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) D (grey) K (white) K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) D (grey) K (white) K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) D (grey) K (white) K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) D (grey) K (white) K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) D (grey) K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) GND signal +24 V signal +24 V +M (white) +H (green) -M (brown) -H (yellow) K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) GND signal +24 V signal +24 V +M (white) +H (green) -M (brown) -H (yellow) K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) GND K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) signal +24 V GND signal +24 V K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) signal +24 V GND signal +24 V K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) signal +24 V GND signal +24 V K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) signal +24 V GND signal +24 V K (brown) 0 (green) D (yellow) signal +24 V GND signal +24 V MAI Module with MPI Module (WT) 3-wire MAI Module MAI Module with active/ 2-wire signal +24 V with active/ 3-wire signal +24 V MAI Module with MPI Semiconductor/4-wire +M (white) +H (green) -M (brown) -H (yellow) +M (white) +H (green) -M (brown) -H (yellow) +M (white) +H (green) -M (brown) -H (yellow) +M (white) +H (green) -M (brown) -H (yellow) +M (white) +H (green) -M (brown) -H (yellow) +M (white) +H (green) -M (brown) -H (yellow)
MCI Module MCI Module Module (HL)
Measurem. MGT 40 TS Module Catalytic/passive Catalytic/passive
Table 5-21: MGT 40 TS Module, Terminal Assignments for Connection of the Sensors
5-50
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
MGT 40 TS Module/Allocation MAT MGT connections

MAI Module Measurement Point No. 1 MAT Terminal No. 1 2 3 4 5 2 1 2 3 4 5 3 1 2 3 4 5 4 1 2 3 4 5 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 7 1 2 3 4 5 8 1 2 3 4 5 MGT 40 TS-Module Terminal No. 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23 26 25 28 27 30 29 32 31 34 33 36 35 38 37 40 39
Table 5-22: MGT 40 TS Module/Allocation MAT MGT connections
SUPREMA
5-51
MSA
Installation
Figure 5-31: MGT 40 TS Module
5.7 Connection of the Relay Outputs

The function of the individual relay modules is described in detail in section 3.6.4 Description of the Modules/Relay Outputs. Depending on the application, the following relay modules can be used: MRO 8 module MRC TS module MRO 8 TS module MRO 16 TS module 8 common alarm relays on the rack connection of 5 relay modules (MRO 8 TS modules), installed on mounting rail 8 relays, installed on mounting rail 16 relays, redundant design (see section 10 Redundant Systems), installed on mounting rail.
The relay modules are controlled by the MGO module, which has 40 switching outputs available per module. The first 8 switching outputs of the first MGO module in the system are permanently assigned to the common alarms, whereas the other outputs can be configured freely (see section Configuration of the Relay Driver Outputs). In addition, a system failure relay is available on the MIB module, which is controlled in the event of a system failure (SYSTEM FAIL, LED is lightened). The following table provides information on the contact load capacity of MRO modules:
Maximum Switching Voltage 400 VAC 300 VDC Maximum Switching Power, ac: 1500 VA Nominal Current 3 ADC Maximum Switching Power, dc: 24 VDC/3 A (from the load limit curve) 50 VDC/0.3 A 100 VDC/0.1 A
Table 5-23: MRO Module, Contact Load Capacity
Note: To ensure a save relay contact operation the relay output must be fused to get a overload protection. To calculate the fuse rating, multiply the maximal allowed nominal current by factor 0.6.
5-52
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
5.7.1 MRO 8 Module Relay Output Unit Common Alarms

This module is used only when relays are required for common alarms and installation is to be done directly on the rack. The module offers 8 common alarm relays and can be plugged directly into the rear of the rack. Each relay has a changeover contact, which is connected to terminals. The common alarm relays can be inhibited by connecting a switch to the LOCR contact of the MST module (see section 5.10.7). As standard practice, the common alarm relays are normally energised (i.e. a relay is energised no alarm. The relay is de-energised when an alarm is triggered at one or more inputs.). Note: The MRO 8 module must be installed in POS 9 only! It is impossible to be use more than one MRO 8 module in one rack.
Relay No. Assignment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1st Alarm 2nd Alarm 3rd Alarm 4th Alarm Signal Failure (Sensor) Horn Inhibit Power Supply Failure
MRO 8 Module Relay Assignment
Table 5-24: MRO 8 Module, Relay Assignment
Relay No. Terminal No. Contact 1 1 2 3 2 13 14 15 3 4 5 6 4 16 17 18 5 7 8 9 6 19 20 21 7 10 11 12 8 22 23 24 NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC
Table 5-25: MRO 8 Module, Terminal Assignment
SUPREMA
5-53
MSA
Installation
Figure 5-32: MRO 8 Module, Terminal Assignment
5.7.2 Additional Relay Outputs

If more relay outputs are required, MRO 8 TS modules are used together with the MRC TS module (mounting rail installation). Remember that the first 8 switching outputs of the first MGO module in the system are permanently assigned to the common alarms. Thus the first MRO 8 TS module which is connected by way of the MRC TS module to the first MGO module in the system is always assigned to the 8 common alarms. The connection of the MRO 16 TS module provided for redundant systems is described in section 10 Redundant Systems.
Figure 5-33: Connection diagram of the MRC TS and MRO 8 TS Modules
Attention: The GND of the Bat, Int, and Ext connections of the MRC TS module must be connected to the GND of the SUPREMA supply voltage.
5-54
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
The MRC TS module is connected via connector A by means of a 40-way screened ribbon cable to the MUT module plugged into the rear of the rack. The MUT module establishes the connection with the MGO module plugged into the rack (see section 5.4.1 Slot Assignment). MRO 8 TS modules Nos. 1-5 are connected to the MRC TS connector 1-5 by means of a 20way ribbon cable. In addition, the supply voltage for the relays must be connected to the terminals Bat, Int, and/or Ext. As an option, a switch can be connected to the Inhibit (Lock) terminal for the purpose of inhibiting the relays. (see section 5.3.7 Configuration of the MRC TS Module). MRC TS Module, Relay Connection Module This module is used when relay modules for mounting rail installation remote from the rack are used. Up to 5 TS relay modules (MRO 8 TS) are connected by way of an MRC TS module. It is to this module that the relay power supply and the ribbon cable required for the control of the relays by the MGO module are connected. The MGO module is connected to the MRC TS module with a 40-way ribbon cable and a rack mounted MUT module. The power supply to the relays must be provided by appropriate connections on the MRC TS module. Also note the following points: The power supply concept of the MRC TS module must agree with that of the rack (assignment of the External/Internal/Battery terminals must agree). When different voltage supplies are used for the MRC TS module and the associated rack, the GND terminals must be connected together, otherwise the relays will not switch.
5.7.2.1 Relay Inhibit

By connecting a switch to the LOCR contact of the MRC TS module, all the relays of the connected MRO 8 TS modules can be inhibited simultaneously. Individual relays cannot be inhibited in this way. The only way to inhibit an individual relay is to inhibit the associated input (see section 6.3.6 Configure the Sensors). By means of the bridge (BR1), the type of inhibiting (normally energised or normally deenergised) can be specified (see section 5.3.7 Configuration of the MRC TS Module) normally energised normally de-energised = = relay energised relay de-energised = = alarm alarm
Attention: The type of inhibiting must agree with the type selected on the operating menu for the relay outputs and must be the same for all relays connected to the MRC TS module (see section 6.4.1 Configure the Relay Driver Outputs). Because the common alarms operate according to normally energised principle and cannot be changed, the first 32 freely configurable relay outputs must also be configured according to the normally energised principle (normal: ON) if relay inhibiting is provided.
Note: If the normally energised principle is selected for inhibiting, then, to ensure the voltage supply to the relays, after the SUPREMA voltage supply is turned off, an independent external voltage supply must be connected to the appropriate terminals of the MRC TS module (EXT/BAT, 24 VDC).
SUPREMA
5-55
MSA
Installation
Note: If service is finished the inhibit status of the relays must be cancelled. MRO 8 TS Module, Relay Output Unit The MRO 8 TS module is used in conjunction with the MRC TS module when additional types of messages are required in addition to the common alarms. The module has 8 relays, each with its own changeover contact (250 VAC/3 A). They are controlled by an MGO module, operating by way of the MRC TS module. For this purpose, the MRO 8 TS module is connected by a 20-way ribbon cable to the MRC TS module. The inhibiting of the relays is accomplished via the LOCK function of the associated MRC TS module. (The LOCR terminal on the MST module affects only the common alarms when an MRO 8 module is plugged into the rack). MRO 8 TS Module, Relay Assignment The first 8 outputs of the system are assigned to the common alarm messages. The outputs of additional modules can be assigned to any message desired.
Relay No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Assignment 1st Alarm 2nd Alarm 3rd Alarm 4th Alarm Signal Failure (Sensor) Horn Inhibit Power Supply Failure
Table 5-26: MRO 8 TS Module, Common Alarm Relay Assignment
5-56
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
MRO 8 TS Module The terminals are assigned as follows:

Relay No. Terminal No. Contact 1 1 2 3 2 13 14 15 3 4 5 6 4 16 17 18 5 7 8 9 6 19 20 21 7 10 11 12 8 22 23 24 NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC
Table 5-27: MRO 8 TS Module, Terminal Assignment
Figure 5-34: MRO 8 TS Module
SUPREMA
5-57
MSA
Installation
5.7.2.2 Relay monitoring

Starting from the version 2.02.06 of the MGO module all relay exits are supervised on the presence of all relays. Therefore all 40 exits of a respective module in the configuration must be always announced. If at the MRC module not all relay modules are attached, then must be used an MRD module for each missing modules, so that the relay monitoring does not announce an error. The MRD module can be attached directly to the MRC module. The MRD module module has LED displays for the relay condition. Missing ones or defective relay modules are indicated with a red LED on the MDO module, registered at the same time in the log an error message with data acquisition error. Note: Thus forbids itself for this version the use of the MRO 8 of modules (without mounting rail assembly).
5.7.3 System Failure Relay

There are two system failure relays on the MIB module, designed as changeover contacts. They are operated according to the normally energised principle. Both relays are de-energised when a failure occurs. The terminal contacts are directly next to the relays on the MIB module.
EXT
D 11 C 21 X21
c 1 a
INT
X22
BAT
X23
D13
S1
10 ON
X 15
1
T1
RL1
X601
10 11 12 7
RL2
T2
C 11
R11 R12 R13 R14
D2
D1
POS 10
D12
R52 R42 R3 R2
1 2 3
4 5 6
8 9
5-58
Figure 5-35: MIB Module, connection terminals for the system failure relay
Terminal Assignment:
X 601 Terminal No. 7 8 9 10 11 12 Contact Break contact relay 1 Centre contact relay 1 Make contact relay 1 Break contact relay 2 Centre contact relay 2 Make contact relay 2
Table 5-28: MIB Module, System Fail Relay, and Terminal Assignment
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Note: Both system failure relays have to be interconnected such that the failure report is triggered already when one relay is de-activated. This applies for remote racks, too.
5.8 Connection of the Switching Outputs

Up to 512 switching outputs can be controlled by the system via the MGO module (40 open collector drivers per module). These switching outputs can be used to drive relays, magnetic valves, and LEDs (24 VDC/300 mA). It must be remembered that the first 8 switching outputs of the first MGO module in the system are permanently assigned to the common alarms, whereas the other outputs can be configured as desired (see section 6.4.1 Configure the Relay Driver Outputs). The switching outputs can be accepted by an MGT 40 TS module installed on a mounting rail. The MGT 40 TS module must be connected to the MUT module assigned to the MGO module by a 40-way ribbon cable. The connection of switching outputs via the MAT module or the MAT TS module is not provided for and not allowed! Note: The outputs from this module (maximum +24 VDC/300 mA) are referenced to the SUPREMA ground. Therefore, the ground of the module supply voltage must be connected to the ground of the SUPREMA (ground of the power supply terminal at the MIB module).
Figure 5-36: Principle circuit diagram, connection of the switching outputs
Note: The load limits, described at chapter 5.4.3 Maximum Loads must be meet!
Switching outputs are run as "open-collector" outputs, that is, an internal transistor of SUPREMA switches the negative connection of the demand while the positive connection of the load is to be connected directly to the 24V supply.
SUPREMA 5-59
MSA
Installation
MGO Driver Output (Switching Output) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Terminal No. (MGT 40 TS) 2 4 6 8 1 3 5 7 10 12 14 16 9 11 13 15 18 20 22 24 17 19 21 23 26 28 30 32 25 27 29 31 34 36 38 40 33 35 37 39
Table 5-29: MGT 40 TS Module, Terminal Assignments of the Switching Outputs
5-60
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Figure 5-37: MGT 40 TS Module
The cables are to be screened if excessive electromagnetic loads are possible (see section 5.1.1 Installation Instructions for Following the EMC Directives).
5.8.1 MHD TS Module (High Driver)

The MHD module is an external supplement of the MGO module inverting the MGO output signal. Unlike the MGO module (= Low Driver), the MHD assembly switches loads which are jointly connected to GND (= High Driver). The MHD module is connected to the rack by 40-pin ribbon cable, and thus makes 40 outputs available (24V/0.3 A). 40-pin ribbon cable connection at MUT (of MGO). 24 V supply and load connections (20 A maximum) Mounting on C or standard rail Outputs short-circuit-proof
Redundant supply must be realised externally.
SUPREMA
5-61
MSA
Installation
Figure 5-38: MHD TS Module Connection (Switching outputs inverted)
Figure 5-39: MHD TS Module
5.9 Connection of the Analog Outputs

Analog outputs can be used to generate external records of the sensor signals using the MAO module that supplies an electrically isolated 0 ... 20 mA output current. Each MAO module offers 8 analog outputs that follow the level of the sensor signal. The analog outputs are assigned directly to the signal inputs (1:1); that is, measurement channel 1 is transmitted via analog output 1. The system automatically assigns measurement channel nos. 18 and the associated measurement values to the first plugged-in MAO module (measurement channel nos. 916 being assigned to the second MAO module etc.).
5-62
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Attention: In the standard design with the MAT module plugged into the rack, the first MAI module is in the 7th slot (position 2/measurement channel nos. 916). Therefore two MAO modules must be plugged in so that the measurement values of measurement channels 916 can be transmitted as analog signals. The analog signals can be accepted directly on the rack at the terminals of a MAT module plugged into the rear of the rack.
Figure 5-40: MAT Module/MAT TS Module, connector plug

Terminal No. 1 Terminal No. 2 Terminal No. 3 Terminal No 4 Terminal No 5 + Ia - Ia
Table 5-30: MAT/MAT TS Module Terminal Assignment, Analog Outputs
For remote connection with mounting rail installation, the MAT TS module (conductor cross section, 0.2 ... 1.5 mm2) or the MGT 40 TS module (conductor cross section, 0.2 ... 2.5 mm2) is provided, which are connected to the MAO module by a 40-way ribbon cable and the MUT module.
Analogausgangskanal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Klemmen-Nr. (MGT-40-TS) 6 3 9 10 16 13 19 20 26 23 29 30 36 33 39 40
Funktion + Ia - Ia + Ia - Ia + Ia - Ia + Ia - Ia + Ia - Ia + Ia - Ia + Ia - Ia + Ia - Ia
Table 5-31: MGT 40 TS Module Terminal Assignment, Analog Outputs
The cables must be screened (see section 5.1.1 Installation Instructions for Following the EMC Directives).
SUPREMA
5-63
MSA
Installation
An external device with voltage input (e.g. recorder, PC with a DAQ card) can be connected to the analog outputs by connecting a resistor across the input terminals of the recorder. When a 100-Ohm resistor is used, a voltage range of 0 ... 2 V is obtained for a 0 ... 20 mA signal. Attention: Maximum load 500 ohms. The accuracy of the measured voltage depends on the tolerance of the resistor used.
5.10 System Ports (MST Module)

The system expansions and system connections described in the following can be realised by using the MST module, plugged into the rear of the rack.
Figure 5-41: MST Module ports, Connections
For simplification of the CAN bus connection at systems with several racks, the MST module has been revised. For every CAN bus an additional connection was added so that the T pieces are saved when connecting racks (see section 5.5 Consisting of Several Racks).
5-64
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Figure 5-42: MST Module Connections as from Module version 8
Figure 5-43: SUB-D pin assignment
5.10.1 CAN Bus Ports (CAN-A/CAN-B)

The two system buses in the system, i.e., CAN-A and CAN-B, are provided to allow expansion of the system (systems with several racks). The measurement value input (MDA + MAI module) or the switching outputs (MGO module) can be set up separately from the main rack to reduce the cabling. In systems without redundancy, the individual racks are connected to each other by ready-made CAN bus cables via the CAN-A bus port (see section 5.4 System Configuration Hardware).
SUPREMA
5-65
MSA
Installation
Plug Assignment:
Plug Name Terminal No. Assignment 2 3 6 7 X14, X16 CAN B 2 3 6 7 CAN_L GND GND CAN_H CAN_L GND GND CAN_H
X13, X15 CAN A
Table 5-32: MST Module, Pin Assignment, CAN Bus Ports
Only screened (>80 % coverage) CAN-cables are to be used. These must have separate cable screen, which is connected to the plug housing. A wire is to be provided in the cable for the CAN GND.
5.10.2 PC/Laptop Port (System Operation, RS 232A)

A PC or a laptop can be plugged into this port. By using the SUPREMA operating program, the system can be operated with a Windows interface. This is recommended, especially for the initial setup of a new system with an average to large number of inputs (see section 9.1 Connection of a PC/Laptop), It also makes it easier to perform calibrations and routine maintenance. The PC/laptop should meet the following minimum requirements: System Requirements for PC: - Minimum Pentium I, 200 MHz, 32 MB of RAM - Windows 98/2000/NT 4.0 - Connecting cable: RS 232 extension, SUB-D connector 9-way, plug and socket (do not use a null-modem cable!) - RS 232 configuration: 19200 kBits/sec., 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, Parity none The terminal assignment of the RS 232A connection is given in the following table (see figure 5-43: SUB-D pin assignment). Connect the screening to the pin housing.
Socket No. Assignment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GND Tx D RxD
Table 5-33: RS 232A Terminal Assignment
5-66
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
5.10.3 Printer Port (Printer, RS 232B)

Using this port, the alarm messages can be sent to a printer so that records can be kept. - Connecting cable: RS 232 extension (do not use a null-modem cable!) - RS 232 configuration: 19200 kBits/sec., 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, Parity none The pin assignment of the RS232B port is given in the following table (see also figure 5-43: SUB-D pin assignment). Connect the screening to the pin housing.
Socket No. Assignment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GND RxD TxD
Table 5-34: RS 232B, Pin Assignment
When a signal event occurs (alarm, failure), the following information is transmitted by default in a single line through this port to a printer:
Figure 5-44: Protocol Printer, Data Structure
The results are printed each time the measurement value exceeds or falls below the alarm threshold, in the event of a system failure, in the event of a successful manual reset or a signal failure. The current status of the input is printed out in accordance with the data structure shown in Figure 5-44. Attention: This formatting can be changed by the user! See the section Operation -> Menu -> Settings -> Printer
SUPREMA
5-67
MSA
Installation
5.10.4 Diagnostics / Service (RS 232C)

This port is intended only for internal system testing. (Output of failure messages when the system configuration is transferred.)
5.10.5 Reset Terminal (Reset Latching Alarms)

Latching alarms can be released via terminals 7 and 8 by closing a contact (key, etc.) (same function as the RESET key on the front panel). MST Terminal 8: RES MST Terminal 7: GND
5.10.6 Acknowledge Terminal (Reset Horn Relay)

The horn relay can be reset via terminals 5 and 6 by closing a contact (key, etc.) (same function as the ACKNL key on the front panel). MST Terminal 6: HACK MST Terminal 5: GND
5.10.7 LOCR Terminal

The relay inhibit for the MRO 8 module (common alarms) on the rear of the rack can be activated via terminals 3 and 4 by closing a contact (key, etc.). All 8 modules are inhibited as a block. This terminal has no effect on the MRO 8 TS modules. These modules are inhibited via the LOCK terminal on the MRC TS module (see section 5.7.2.1 Relay Inhibit). MST Terminal 4: LOCR MST Terminal 3: GND Note: If the voltage supply for the MIB module is interrupted, the inhibiting function of the MRO 8 modules is no longer active.
5.10.8 Password Terminal

The input of the configuration password can be replaced via terminals 1 and 2 by closing a contact (key switch). If the current password has been forgotten, this terminal can be used to enter a new password (see section 7.5 Changing the password). MST Terminal 2: PSW MST Terminal 1: GND
5.11 Connection for the System Power Supply

Before beginning installation, make sure that section 3.7 System Power Supply , has been read and understood. Care must also be taken to ensure that the complete system, including the sensors and relay modules, does not exceed the maximum load of the selected supply voltage. If an external power supply or a battery is used, the supply voltages must operated via an appropriate EMC filter. The requirements of the EMC and Low Voltage Directive must be complied with.
5.11.1 Calculation of the Required Power Supply

The power consumption for supplying the sensors is based on the number and types of connected sensors and on the resistance of the cables used.
5-68
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
Type of Sensor D-7600 D-7602 D-7711 D-715 D-7152 D-7100 Series 47 K D-7010 D-8101/D-8113 DF-7100 DF-7010 DF-8603 DF-8201 DF-8250 DF-8501/DF-8502 DF-9500 DF-9200 IR 3600 SafeEye GD10 Ultima X Ultima X IR
Sensor Power 1,5 W 1,5 W 1,5 W 1.5 W 1.5 W 1.5 W 1.5 W 2.5 W 1.5 W 2.5 W 4W 4W 1.5 W 1.5 W 5W 1W 1W 230 VAC external 8 W ** 3.5 W 4W 7W
Power per Ohm of Cable Resistance 0.1 W* 0.1 W* 0.1 W* 0.1 W* 0.1 W* 0.1 W* 0.1 W* 0.1 W* 0.1 W 0.05 W, max. 0.05 W, max. 0.1 W 0.05 W, max. 0.05 W, max. 0.1 W not applicable not applicable 0.1 W 0.05 W, max. 0.1 W 0.1 W
Table 5-35: Power Requirement of the Sensors and Cables
* Value applies to a bridge current of Ibr = 300 mA ** Only detector and source greater than 6 W. Both (detector and source) should be supplied by external voltage source. After adding the power consumption for the sensors, the following power values can be given for the individual modules:
Type of Module Power (VA)/Module MCP module MDO module MDA module MGO module MAI module MAO module MRO 8 MRO 8 TS MRO 16 TS 5 5 1 1 1 5 1.5 1.5 3
Table 5-36: Power Requirements of the System Modules
Attention: The supply voltage may be turned on only after all required installation steps have been completed and the installation has been verified during the startup procedure (see section Startup).
SUPREMA
5-69
MSA
Installation
5.11.2 Connection of the DC-Voltage Supply (MIB Module)

The system is supplied with 24 VDC (19.2 ... 32 VDC). There are 3 pairs of connection terminals on the MIB module, so that the supply can originate from 3 different sources (redundancy). The supplies are functionally equivalent, but the order in which the power is drawn is prioritised: 1st = EXT, 2nd = INT, 3rd = BAT. The changeover from one power source to another is accomplished on the system modules. Warning: The input voltage range (19.2 32 VDC) must not be exceeded! Higher voltage values can lead to the destruction of the unit!
Figure 5-45: MIB Module, supply voltage terminals
When an external power supply or a battery is used, the supply voltages must be operated via an appropriate EMC filter. The requirements of the EMC and Low Voltage Directive must be complied with. EXT Connection (External Power Supply Unit, 24 VDC) Connection for external power to supply all assemblies of a rack. Required when a redundant power supply is to be provided or when the internal rack power supply unit is unable to supply all the sensors. Maximum supply current of 20 A for one rack.
INT Connection (Rack Power Supply Unit, 24 VDC, 150 VA) Connection for an internal rack power supply or an external power supply. Power supplied to all the rack units and sensors. If the rack power supply cannot supply sufficient current, the sensors, modules or relays must be supplied by external units.
5-70
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
The internal rack power supply can be omitted if, because of a high power requirement or a redundant design, the power is supplied by an external power supply via the INT connection terminals. Maximum supply current of 20 A.
BAT Connection (Continuous Battery Power Supply) Continuous battery power supply for all units in a rack (20 ... 28 VDC). If the internal and/or the external power supply unit fails, the system is supplied from here Maximum supply current, 20 A.
5.11.3 Connection of the Internal Rack Power Supply Unit (MSP Module)
The system can be supplied by the power supply built into the rack. The power supply has a wide-range input (85 ... 265 VAC, 47 ... 63 Hz or 120 ...330 VDC).
Power Supply Unit - Terminal Designation +24 V +24 V GND GND PE L N -S +S Output: +24 VDC Output: +24 VDC Output: GND Output: GND Ground Wire Connection Line Neutral Blade Connection Function Blade Connection
Table 5-37: MSP Module, Terminal Assignment
Figure 5-46: Connection diagram of the MSP Module
Warning: Connection of the line power must be made with the power switched off and all relevant safety regulations should be complied with.
SUPREMA
5-71
MSA
Installation
As shown in Figure 5-46, the +24 V output terminal of the MSP module must be connected to the +ve terminal of the INT connection, and the GND output terminal of the MSP module must be connected to the -ve terminal of the INT connection of the MIB module. The line power is supplied via the terminals L and N of the MSP module. Attention: Do not supply line power to the MIB module. This will damage the SUPREMA system.
The ground wire is connected to the PE terminal of the MSP module. Note: Before turning on the line voltage during the start-up procedure, reinstall the Plexiglas cover over the connection terminals of the MSP module in order to prevent any danger that might arise from accidental contact with the line voltage.
5.12 Labelling Concept

Labelling fields are provided on the various modules for the numbering of the plug-in modules, the connector plugs, and connected inputs and outputs. The customer is free to mark them in any way deemed fit except the MPI and MCI modules that are an exception due to the lack of space. In the following, the labelling fields and a possible plan for marking them is presented. This plan is merely a suggestion and the customer is free to label the fields in correspondence with his own concept of the system.
5.12.1 Plug-In Modules

The labelling field for the plug-in modules (MCP, MDA, MAI, MGO and MAO modules) is located on the front, on the release lever for the module. It is therefore immediately visible as soon as the front panel of the rack has been swung down. The type of module is printed on the lower half. The upper half is available for the customer to mark. A possible labelling system is illustrated in the following.
Rack: No of the rack the module belongs to
Slot: No of the slot the module is plugged in Rack Slot
MAI
Module type: MAI, MGO, MAO, MCP or MDA
Figure 5-47: Labelling field, plug-in Modules
5-72
SUPREMA
Installation
MSA
5.12.2 Slots in the Rack

In the rack, a labelling field is provided in front of the slots. The slot nos. and the types of modules allowed for each slot are printed on it. In the first rack, the input numbers assigned to the slot are also printed on this field (in the case that the slot has been filled with an MAI module). In addition, the customer also has the possibility of marking the type of module actually used in each slot, and, when MGO or MAO modules are used, of entering the output channel no. corresponding to the position of the module in the system. When several racks are installed and MAI modules are being used, it is necessary to enter the input nos., starting with the second rack, corresponding to the position in the system. The following rules apply to the numbering of the input and output channels: MAI Modules/Measurement Sites: The input nos. are assigned permanently to the slots in the rack; 8 inputs can be connected per MAI module. For example, if the first MAI module has been plugged into the 7th slot in the first rack, the first 8 inputs acquire the nos. 9-16. MGO Modules/Relay Driver Outputs: The relay driver output nos. are assigned to the MGO module; each MGO module makes 40 relay driver outputs available. That is, regardless of the slot no. and the rack no., the relay driver outputs of the first MGO module acquire the nos. 140, those of the second MGO module, the nos. 4180, etc. MAO Modules/Analog Outputs: The analog output nos. are permanently assigned to the input nos.; 8 analog outputs are available per MAO module. The first MAO module plugged into the system provides the analog outputs for input nos. 18, the second provides the analog outputs for input nos. 916, etc., regardless of whether a MAI module is present or not. If, for example, the first MAI module has been plugged into the 7th slot of the first rack (input nos. 916), then the analog signals of the first 8 sensors are sent to the second MAO module plugged into the system (analog outputs 916).
Figure 5-48: Labelling of the slots in the 1st rack
5.12.3 Connection and Terminal Modules on the Rack

A free labelling field is provided for the modules plugged into the rear of the rack (MRO 8, MAT, and MUT modules). The following rules apply to the assignment of the rear plug positions to the slot numbering on the front: Assignment: Front: Slot 1 Slot 2-4 Slot 5-15 Rear: MST module free Positions 110
SUPREMA
5-73
MSA
Installation
Figure 5-49 shows a possible labelling system.
Rack: No. of the rack in which the module is installed.
/ 3 1-8
Position: Position No. of the slot in the rack
Nos. of the connected inputs and outputs.
Figure 5-49: Labelling of the connection and terminal Modules in the rack
5.12.4 Connection and Terminal Modules in Rail-Mounted Installation

A free labelling field is provided for modules installed on mounting rails (MRO 8 TS, MAT TS, MRC TS, and MGT 40 TS modules). Figure 5-50 shows a possible labelling system.
Rack: Serial No. of the rack to which the module is connected via a ribbon cable and a MUT module (or a MRC TS and a MUT module)
/ 9 1-40
Position: Position No. of the slot in the rack to which the module is connected via a ribbon cable and a MUT module (or a MRC TS and a MUT module).
Serial Nos. of the connected inputs and outputs
Figure 5-50: Labelling of the rail-mounted connection and terminal Modules
5.12.5 MAT (TS) Connector Plug

A free labelling field is provided on the bottom of the connector plug of the MAT and MAT TS modules. Figure 5-51 shows a possible labelling system.
Rack: No. of the rack on which the MAT (TS) module is mounted
/ 1
Position: No. of the slot of the MAT (TS) module on the rack
Nos. of the connected inputs and outputs
Figure 5-51: Labelling of the MAT (TS) connector plug
5-74
SUPREMA
Startup
MSA
6. Startup
Attention: High voltages can be present in the MSP module and at the relay terminals of the relay modules. Suitable safety measures must be taken when starting up the system. Startup procedures may be performed only by authorized and qualified personnel. Before startup, it must be ensured that all installation steps have been executed properly and that the cable connections and configurations of the individual modules as well as of the entire system are correct. Startup is to be performed by executing the following steps: Make sure that the voltage supply is turned off. Check to make sure that the sensor, relay, switching output, and analog output connections of the system are disconnected. Ensure that all the required modules have been properly mounted in the system and are connected to each other. In systems with several racks, make sure the CAN bus connection is correct (cabling, baudrate, CAN node no., terminating resistor). Turn on the supply voltage. System Configuration (Configuration Tool) Connect and configure the sensors. Connect and configure the relay or switching outputs. Give the sensors a preliminary calibration. Subject the overall system to a function test with gas.
6.1 Turn On the Supply Voltage

Turn on the supply voltage to the system under consideration of all relevant safety measures. After the power is turned on, the message AUER SUPREMA MDO Module appears on the display of the front panel (MDO module) along with the current software and hardware revision nos. At the same time, all LEDs light up. After the module has run through a self-test, it starts the system with the message system start in progress. After the system starts successfully, the number of inputs corresponding to the plugged-in MAI modules is displayed in the Measure/ List menu. Note: If this process is not completed in 15 minutes, the installation should be checked again. If necessary, an MSA service technician should be called in to correct the problem.
SUPREMA
6-1
MSA
Startup
6.2 System Configuration

The SUPREMA requires accurate data about the system structure for system control and error detection. This includes information such as the used modules and their locations in the system, connected power supplies as well as the number and location of the measuring points and Alarm outputs. During commissioning, these data must be entered once into the system. The required configuration file can be created with the PC program "SUPREMA Servicepack". This program can then be used to transfer the configuration to the SUPREMA. (See Section 15.2.2 and Table 17-1 for version and order number). If the current system structure does not match the stored configuration, a SYSTEM FAILURE is displayed and entries are recorded in the logbook of SUPREMA after it has started and also during operation. Note: The SUPREMA must always be restarted by switching off and on after configuration to activate the new configuration.
6.2.1 PC program SUPREMA ServicePack

The program SUPREMA ServicePack allows you to create and manage the data of multiple SUPREMA systems. Thus, each SUPREMA has a database in which the data of the respective SUPREMA system is stored. A database can include the following information: System configuration Measuring point data Digital output Data System logs
The operating instructions include a CD-ROM where you can find the SUPREMA ServicePack program. This program runs on Windows 2000 and XP.
6.2.2 Installation
Insert the CD-ROM into your computer. The installation wizard starts automatically. Follow the instructions of the installation wizard. There is also the option to start the installation program manually. Run the Setup.exe file located in the ServicePack directory on the CD-ROM and follow the instructions of the installation wizard. Start the SUPREMA ServicePack program on your system.
6.2.3 Creating a system configuration

After starting the program, you must select a database containing the corresponding information of the system that is to be modified. Upon starting the program for the first time, the window for creating a new database is opened automatically. You must enter at least the name of the database in the "File name" field and press OK.
6-2
SUPREMA
Startup
MSA
Figure 6-1: Create new database
The database is opened by double clicking on the tree view and then selecting the Configuration function. The window that opens displays the configuration saved in the database. The module that is displayed must be configured according to the module type, position and assignments to the hardware setup of the SUPREMA.
Figure 6-2: Configuration
To create a new configuration, choose the configuration wizard from the Edit menu. Alternatively, you can also manually create or modify a configuration: Adding a BGT: Adding/deleting module: Editing allocation: Move the pointer to the configuration field, right click and choose Add BGT from the context menu. Double click on the corresponding field in the BGT or right click and select the desired module from the context menu. Move the pointer to the module, right click and select Measuring points/Digital outputs in the context menu that opens.
To complete your changes, the configuration has to be saved. To save changes, go to the menu File->Save or click on the save symbol in the toolbar. For more detailed information see the online "help" of the program.
SUPREMA
6-3
MSA
Startup
6.2.4 Sending a system configuration

To send a system configuration, you must select a database. Next click on the "Send configuration" symbol to send the configuration to SUPREMA. For more detailed information see the online "help" of the program. Note: After sending a configuration, the SUPREMA has always to be restarted by shutting it Off/On. This action activates changes to the system configuration in the device.
6.3 Start the Sensors

The system differentiates between passive and active sensors. As a general rule, passive sensors are simply made up of a highly sensitive (half) measuring bridge while active sensors possess their own electronics and have a standardised signal output (4..20 mA). As a result of the spread of passive sensors, some sensor type-dependent presettings, described in subsequent sections, are necessary in the first commissioning and, later, also when a sensor is replaced. Not only the instructions given here but also the operating and maintenance instructions that came with the sensor to be connected must be followed. Note: If errors occur during startup which cannot be corrected with the help of the troubleshooting guide in section 7 Maintenance and Service contact an MSA service technician. In order to avoid false alarms during the commissioning of sensors, we recommend locking all affected SUPREMA measuring points before starting.
6.3.1 Presetting of passive sensors Automatic presetting of passive sensors

An automatic presetting of the hardware for passive sensors is possible only by using modules MDA 20 and MAI 20 in connection with the SUPREMA firmware version 2.05.01 (or higher). Therefore, please check the corresponding hardware and software states of your SUPREMA before the presetting. The operation takes place exclusively via the MDO and the PC software. The opening of the control panel is not necessary for this. External measuring instruments are not needed too.
Method:
In order to avoid accidental damage and destruction of the sensors by an excessive bridge current, the automatic presetting is to be carried out unconditionally using a corresponding sensor equivalent network (see section 7.2 Sensor simulation module): 1. 2. 3. Set sensor parameter on the SUPREMA Connect sensor backup module, also see sections 6.3.3.1 and 6.3.4.1 Set sensor current for this Set sensor type dependent bridge current through MDO and PC, also see section 4.3.4.3 Submenu IBR (Bridge current) for this
6-4
SUPREMA
Startup
MSA
4. 5. 6. 7.
Remove sensor backup module Connect desired sensor Ensure a sufficient running-in period of the sensor Carry out the first calibration of the measuring point, also see section 6.5 First calibration
These steps are to be repeated for all passive sensors to be connected.
Manual presetting of Passive Sensors

The operational steps to be carried out and the signal voltages present at the test sockets are depending from the instrument status of the module. Therefore in the following sections the presetting for the different instrument status is described one by one. Method: In order to avoid accidental damage and destruction of the sensors by a too high bridge current, the automatic presetting is to be carried out unconditionally using a corresponding sensor equivalent network (see section 7.2 Sensor simulation module): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Set sensor parameter on the SUPREMA Connect sensor backup module Set sensor type dependent bridge current using UP key MAI and external multimeter Remove sensor backup module Connect desired sensor Ensure a sufficient running-in period of the sensor Carry out the presetting Zero point (in zero gas feeding) using the UP key MAI and external multimeter Carry out the presetting Sensitivity (in calibration gas feeding) using UP key MAI and external multimeter Carry out the first calibration of the measuring point, also see section 6.5 First calibration for this.
These steps are to be repeated for all passive sensors to be connected. A precise description of the steps follow in subsequent sections.
6.3.2 Auxiliary Equipment Required

To preadjust the sensors on the MAI module, remove the screws holding the front panel in place and swing the panel down. The following tools will be required: a TORX T8 screwdriver (for removing the screws on the front panel), a voltmeter with a voltage measuring range of 0 ... 3 VDC, 2 connecting cables (for connecting the voltmeter to the MAI measuring socket, 2 mm). a zero gas and a test gas appropriate to the sensor and to the substance to be detected, and a calibration adapter and hose connections suitable for the sensor (see the sensor operating and maintenance (O & M) instructions).
SUPREMA
6-5
MSA
Startup
After the system voltage supply has been turned on and the system has started successfully, the following settings should be made on the appropriate MAI module for the startup of the passive sensors:
6.3.3 MAI Module Status A and B 6.3.3.1 Adjust the Sensor Current
Figure 6-3: Display and operating elements of the MAI Module Status A and B
Attention: Do not connect the sensor yet! To prevent accidental damage to the sensor or even its destruction by excessive bridge current, an equivalent sensor circuit is used to adjust the sensor current. The MSA equivalent sensor module appropriate for the type of sensor can be used for this purpose. If this is not available, a MAT connector plug, wire resistors, and wire bridges can be used to build an equivalent sensor as shown in figure 1-9.
Figure 6-4: Equivalent sensor circuit for the MPI WT100/MPI WT10 Module
6-6
SUPREMA
Startup
MSA
Figure 6-5: Equivalent sensor circuit for the MPI HL8101/MPI HL8113 Module
Connect the equivalent sensor circuit to the inputs to be adjusted. Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module (red/black) and select the 3 VDC measuring range. Enable operator buttons (UP, DOWN, MS) by pressing the SEL-Button. Select the input by pressing the MS button; each press of the button advances the selection by one input. The selected site is indicated by the front row of LEDs (LED at the top = input 1, LED at the bottom = input 8). The LED of the selected input lights up green. Using the SEL button, select the function IBR (bridge current) (LED IBR lights up red). By pressing the UP or the DOWN button, adjust the bridge current specified for the sensor ( 1 %) (see the sensor data sheet or the sensor O & M instructions). Note: The voltage in mV present at the test sockets corresponds to the adjusted current in mA (e.g., 270 mV = 270 mA)
Repeat these steps for each of the passive sensors to be connected. Disable operator keys by pressing the SEL-Button until the INPUT LED go out. Then remove the equivalent sensor circuit and connect the sensor cable. After the sensors are connected, it is recommended that the bridge current for each individual sensor be checked again and corrected if necessary.
6.3.3.2 Preadjust the Zero Point/Sensitivity

After the sensors have been allowed to stabilise for a sufficient period of time which depends on the types of sensors and measuring components (see the associated sensor O&M instructions) a preliminary adjustment must be performed on the MAI module with gas. Note: To perform the preliminary adjustment, at least 2 people are required. To avoid communication problems between person 1 operating the SUPREMA and Person 2 supplying the sensors with gas, we recommend the use of a set of appropriate two-way radios. In addition, the required zero and test gases as well as test adapters and hose connections (see sensor O & M instructions) for supplying the gases are a necessary precondition for the successful completion of the preliminary adjustment with gas. The flow rate and the duration of the test gas supply can be found in the associated sensor operating and maintenance instructions. For the preliminary adjustment, person 1 (at the SUPREMA) and person 2 (at the sensor in question) must perform the following steps:
SUPREMA
6-7
MSA
Startup
Person 1: Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module (red/black) and select the 3 V DC measuring range. Press the MS button to select the input. Each press of the button advances the input by one in sequence. The selected input is indicated by the forward row of LEDs (LED at the top = input 1, LED at the bottom = input 8). The LED of the selected input lights up green. Enable operator buttons (UP, DOWN, MS) by pressing the SEL-Button. Supply the zero gas to the sensor corresponding to the selected input (for about 5 minutes or in accordance with the sensor O&M instructions) at least until person 1 has completed the preliminary adjustment of the zero point. Using the SEL button, select the function ZERO (the ZERO LED lights up orange). Set the default value specified for the sensor (rough pre-alignment of the zero point) by actuating the UP button (yellow, at the top) or the DOWN button (yellow, second from the top). Default Values: MPI WT100, MPI HL 8113, and MPI HL 8101: MPI WT10:
Person 2:
Person 1:
2.0 V 1.48 V
Using the SEL button, select the SPAN function. The voltage value at the test sockets (digital multimeter) should now be 0.4 0.05 V. If this is not the case, select the ZERO function again, and use the UP or DOWN button to change the default voltage value until the voltage value at the test sockets after switching to the SPAN function is within the tolerance range of 0.4 0.05 V. To check the SPAN value, you must use the SEL button to switch to the SPAN function. When the adjustments are being made to the ZERO function, the value displayed on the MDO display unit or, if a PC is connected, the measurement value shown for the input in the operating software, can be used as a guideline (a displayed value of approximately 0% of the measuring range the SPAN value is within the tolerance). Note: If the zero point cannot be adjusted (SPAN value not within the tolerance range), then it is possible that the sensitivity (signal amplification) has been set too high. In this case, use the SEL button to select the SPAN function and then press the DOWN button several times (about 20 times) to reduce the sensitivity. Then repeat the adjustment steps described above.
Person 2: Shut off the zero gas supply when person 1 notifies you that the preliminary adjustment of the zero point has been successfully completed. Then turn on the test gas (concentration, usually 50% of the measuring range; in no case should this concentration be less than 20% of the extreme value of the measuring range; see the operating and maintenance instructions of the sensor).
6-8
SUPREMA
Startup
MSA
Person 1: Select the SPAN function by pressing the SEL button. Allow a certain recovery time (voltage signal stops fluctuating or fluctuates only slightly). Set the value corresponding to that of the test gas concentration by pressing the UP or DOWN button. The voltage value is calculated by means of the following formula: U = C / 100 * 1.6 V + 0.4 V U is the voltage at the test jack in V, C the span gas concentration in % of measuring range.
Attention: This formula does not apply to D-8108, D-8113, DF-8201, DF-8250, DF 8401 or DF-8603 sensors or to any of the connectable sensors with a highly nonlinear output signal. Person 2: Shut off the test gas when person 1 informs you that the preliminary sensitivity adjustment has been completed
Repeat these steps for each of the passive sensors to be connected. Disable operator keys by pressing the SEL-Button until the INPUT LED go out.
6.3.4 MAI Module C and Order No 10050713 6.3.4.1 Setting the Sensor Current
Figure 6-6: Display and Operation Elements of the MAI Module Status C
The signal Uy can be measured against GND (black test jack) at the test point MP/Uy at passive sensors. Uy is the sensor signal measured with a constant factor. It serves for the judgment of the sensor sensitivity.
SUPREMA
6-9
MSA
Startup
Attention: Do not yet connect sensor! The sensor setting is made by means of an equivalent sensor circuit in order to avoid inadvertent damage or destruction of the sensor by a too high bridge current. The sensor simulation module corresponding to the sensor type can be used for this purpose. If it is not available, an equivalent sensor circuit can be realized by means of a MAT connection plug, wire resistors and wire bridges according to figure 6-2: Equivalent sensor circuit for the MPI WT100/MPI WT10 Module or figure 6-3: Equivalent sensor circuit for the MPI HL8101/MPI HL8113 Module. Connect equivalent sensor circuit to the measuring points to be adjusted Connect digital multimeter to the test jacks of the MAI module (red/black), and select the 3 V DC measuring range Activate the operation keys (UP, DOWN, MS) by pressing the SEL key Select measuring point by pressing the MS key; per keystroke a measuring point further is switched, the selected measuring place is shown by the front LED row (topmost LED = measuring point 1, undermost LED = measuring point 8); the LED of the selected measuring point is shining green. Select the IBR function (bridge current) by pressing the SEL key (LED IBR is shining/red) Adjust the bridge current provided for the sensor ( 1%) by pressing the buttons UP or DOWN (see data sheet of measuring head resp. operation manual sensor) Note: the voltage in mV being on at the test jacks corresponds to the adjusted current in mA ( e.g. 270 mV = 270 mA).
Repeat these steps for all passive sensors to be connected. Deactivate the operation keys (UP, DOWN, MS) by pressing the SEL key repeatedly (until the LED of the selected measuring point and the function LED are extinguished). After this remove short-circuit bridge (terminal 2/terminal 4) and connect sensor cable. After connection of the sensors we recommend to check again and to correct if necessary the bridge current for every particular sensor.
6.3.4.2 Presetting of Zero/Sensitivity

After a sufficient warmup time of the sensors which is sensor and measuring component dependent (see respective sensor operation and maintenance manual), a gas technical presetting must be carried out at the MAI module for passive sensors. Note: For the presetting performance, at least 2 persons are necessary. If the SUPREMA is not situated within hearing range of the installed sensors, then the use of a set of adequate radio equipment is in addition recommended to avoid incorrect calibrations. Furthermore the required zero and span gases as well as test adapter and tube connections for gas application (see respective sensor operation and maintenance manual) are conditions for the successful performance of the gas technical presetting. Flow and duration of span gas application can be seen from the sensor operation and maintenance manual. For the presetting the following steps must be carried out of person 1 (at the SUPREMA) and person 2 (at the respective sensor):
6-10 SUPREMA
Startup
MSA
Person 1: Connect digital multimeter to the test jacks of the MAI module (red/black), and select the 3 V DC measuring range. Ua is shown in mV when selecting SEL and SPAN functions. Activate the operation keys (UP, DOWN, MS) by pressing the SEL key Select measuring point by pressing the MS key; per keystroke a measuring point further is switched, the selected measuring point is shown by the front LED row (topmost LED = measuring point 1, undermost LED = measuring point 8); the LED of the selected measuring point is shining green. Person 2: Application of zero gas at the sensor assigned to the measuring point selected (approx. 5 min. resp. according to sensor operation and maintenance manual at least until person 2 has finished the zero presetting. First select SPAN by pressing SEL key. (LED SPAN is shining green) Set SPAN to Maximum . (Press UP key approx. 10 sec) Select Zero by pressing the SEL key (LED ZERO is shining/orange) Adjust the default value (rough pre-adjustment of the zero) provided for the sensor by pressing the button UP or DOWN. Default values for all passive sensors: MPI WT10, MPI WT100, MPI HL8113 and MPI HL8101: Zero Ua = 350 ... 450 mV Person 2: Finish zero gas application when person 1 reports the successful presetting of the zero. Then apply span gas (concentration normally 50% of measuring range, in no case this concentration should be smaller than 20% of the measurement range final value (see respective sensor operation and maintenance manual). Select SPAN function by pressing the SEL button, wait until warm-up time is finished (voltage signal does not change any more, or only slightly) Adjust the value corresponding to the span gas concentration by pressing the buttons UP or DOWN. (see data sheet of measuring head resp. operation manual sensor). The voltage value is calculated according to the formula: Ua = C / 100 * 1.6 V + 0.4 V Ua is the voltage at the test jack in V, C the span gas concentration in % of measuring range.
Person 1:
Person 1:
Attention: This formula does not apply to the sensor types D-8101, D-8113, DF-8201, DF-8250, DF-8401 and DF-8603, as well as all connected sensors with strongly unlinear output signal.
SUPREMA
6-11
MSA
Startup
Person 2: Finish span gas application when person 1 reports the successful presetting of the sensitivity.
These steps have to be repeated for all passive sensors connected. Deactivate the operation keys (UP, DOWN, MS) by pressing the SEL key repeatedly (until the LED of the selected measuring point and the function LED are extinguished).
6.3.5 Preadjust the Active Sensors (MAI Module)

No preliminary adjustments on the MAI module are made for active sensors (with 0 ... 20 mA or 4 ... 20 mA current output). The buttons for setting the bridge voltage, the zero point, and the sensitivity are inactive. After the supply voltage has been turned on and the system has started successfully, the active sensors can be connected to the SUPREMA without any further preliminary adjustments. In the case of systems with passive and active sensors, it is recommended that the passive sensors be adjusted before the active sensors are connected.
6.3.6 Configure the Sensors

Note: The basic operation, the menu design, and the menu structure are described in detail in section 4 Operation of the System for both the integrated operating unit, i.e., the MDO module, and also for the PC operating software. Knowledge of this section is assumed in the following explanations. In the following, the configuration procedure is described in a general manner. The input fields of the PC operating software are almost completely identical to those of the display on the MDO front panel module. Differences with respect to operation are explained in sections 4.2 Setup (Via the MDO Front Panel Module) and 4.3 Setup (Via PC or Laptop). The SUPREMA Operating Program can then be used to operate the system under a Windows user interface. This is especially recommended for the initial setup of a new system with a medium to large number of inputs, because it is faster and easier to enter the input parameters on a PC keyboard than to enter them by means of the limited number of operating buttons on the MDO front panel module. Attention: All entries of inputs, relay output parameters, or system parameters require that a valid password be entered or that the key switch be actuated.
Note: It is generally recommended that only one operating method be used at once (MDO front panel or PC operating software), because the option which is activated first inhibits the use of the other input unit. It must also be remembered that, when the PC/laptop is changed from one SUPREMA control system to another, the PC operating software must also be restarted.
System requirements for the PC operating software: minimum of a Pentium I / 200 MHz / 32 MB of RAM Windows 98/2000/NT4.0 connecting cables: RS 232 extension, SUB-D connectors, 9-channel, plugs on socket terminal strip (no null-modem cable) RS 232 configuration: 19200 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, parity none, protocol: Xon/Xoff SUPREMA connection: RS 232 connection to the MST module
6-12
SUPREMA
Startup
MSA
6.3.6.1 Set the System Parameters

Note: The names of the menu and option fields refer to the display on the MDO front panel module. The corresponding names in the PC operating program are in parentheses if they are not the same. The system parameters should be set first in the Setup/System (Setup/System Settings) menu. The following options are available: Language: Either German or English can be selected as the system language. Note: When the settings are made by using the PC operating software, only the language of the operating software is changed. Date/Time: The current date and time can be set. New Password (Most Recent Password): A customer-specific password can be entered. Confirmation (Password Confirmation): Re-enter the new password to confirm. Note: When a new password is entered, a pop-up menu appears, which asks that the old password be entered. The default password is: AUER. Note that it is entered in all-caps. Signal if locked: Here it is possible to choose what signal is present at the analog output (MAO module) when a input is inhibited (i.e., alarm evaluation is deactivated). The following selection parameters are available: hold: pass: maintain: the signal present at the moment of inhibiting is frozen in; the output signal continues to follow the input signal; a constant output current (3 mA) is generated.
Note: When a PC/laptop is connected, settings cannot be made simultaneously in the Setup/System menu (or in the Setup/System Settings menu of the PC operating software). The first operating unit to be activated inhibits the other one.
6.3.6.2 Set the Input Parameters

The input parameters are set in the Setup/Measure Points menu. Three submenus are available: Information, Sensor Data, and Alarms. Enter user-dependent and system-dependent information in the Information menu. Enter the sensor-dependent parameters in the Sensor Data menu, and specify the alarm thresholds and the alarm behaviour (latching/crossing) in the Alarms menu. Option field: Measure Point No.: Use this to select the input to be configured.
SUPREMA
6-13
MSA
Startup
Note: The Measure point no. (input no.) is assigned within the system to the MAI modules used. Option field: Locked: The input is inhibited (no alarm given). Note: This is to be recommended especially during maintenance work on the sensors while the alarm devices are still connected (see section 7 Maintenance and Service). Specify the status of the analog output assigned to the input in the Signal if Locked option field of Setup/System menu (Setup/System Settings).
6.3.6.2.1 Information Menu

Text fields Tag, Marking, and Installation Place: Enter customer-specific and system-specific parameters of the input here. In the text field: Serial No. Head (Serial Number Head): Enter the sensor serial no. of the sensor connected to this input.
6.3.6.2.2 Sensor Data Menu

Here is where information specific to the sensor and to measurement gas is entered. Option field: Sensor Type (Sensor): Select the MSA sensor type connected to the input. Note: A sensor database is assigned to each type of sensor. This database contains information such as noise level, minimum signal, etc. In conjunction with the selected measurement gas and measuring range, a corresponding linearization is also automatically activated when needed as a function of the type of sensor. Option field Dimension: Select the measurement unit (%LEL, vol.%, ppm, etc.) Option field Range (Range from 0 to:): Select the measuring range. Note: Care must be taken to ensure that the selected values are correct and valid. Option field Measure Gas: Select the measurement gas (gas or vapor to be monitored). Option field Zero Gas: Select the zero gas (gas used to adjust the zero point of the sensor) Option field Reference Gas: Select the reference gas (gas used to calibrate the sensitivity of the sensor when the measurement gas is difficult to handle). Note: If the measurement gas (the gas or vapor to be monitored) is used to check and calibrate the sensor attached to the input, the same gas as that appearing in the field Measure Gas is to be selected in the option field Reference Gas. (In the Maintain/Calibration menu, the gas selected in the Reference Gas field appears as the test gas.)
6-14
SUPREMA
Startup
MSA
6.3.6.2.3 Alarms Menu

Up to four alarms per input can be configured. Per alarm, a limit value can be set, which is monitored to determine whether it is crossed in one direction or the other. Each alarm can be set to be either latching or non-latching. Check box Upper (Upper limit): The assigned alarms are set to be either of the over or under type. If this box is checked, the alarm is of the over type. Check box latched: The assigned alarms are set to be latching or non-latching. If this box is checked, the alarm is latching. Note: This property has an effect on the behaviour of the front-panel LEDs, on what is shown in the Measure menu, and on the relay outputs assigned to the alarm. Input field Limit Values (Limit): An alarm is triggered when the measurement value exceeds or falls below the limit value set here. Warning: When the limit values are entered via the PC operating software, be sure to use decimal separators in the PC operating system to prevent incorrect interpretation of the entered value.
Note: Alarms which are not required can be deactivated in this field. To do this, actuate the left cursor key until only zeros appear in the field. Then actuate the lower cursor key: The content of the field is deleted (display: ). The alarm is now deactivated (PC operating software: Delete Field Contents (Del key, then confirm by pressing Enter). Option field: Relay (Set Output): Assignment of the relay driver outputs to the alarms of the selected input. After a relay driver output has been selected, the program branches to a Menu for Assigning Relay Outputs. For the sake of clarity during the startup procedure, the relay driver outputs should be configured and assigned in the Setup/Relay Outputs menu. Important: After the entries have been made, the settings are not accepted until the O.K. field in the Information menu has been activated. (When the system is being operated via the MDO front panel module, the O.K. field is not visible in the Sensor Data and Alarms menus.
6.4 Configure the Relay Driver Outputs (Switching Outputs)

Note: All the explanations in this section are based on the configuration of switching outputs, because the parameterization is independent of whether the alarm devices are actuated directly via the switching output or via a connected relay module. When relay driver outputs are described in the following, the information also applies equally to the switching outputs.
SUPREMA
6-15
MSA
Startup
Before connecting and configuring the relay driver outputs, be sure that no alarm devices are connected to the relay contacts. Otherwise, it would be possible for unnecessary alarms to be triggered. Also make sure that the relay driver outputs have been connected properly. section 5.7 Connection of the Relay Outputs . Before the relay modules or other approved alarm devices or units are connected to the relay driver outputs, turn off the voltage to the system. Then check to make sure that the required MGO modules are present in the system in the slots provided for them. Then make the cable or plug connections to the relays or relay modules to be actuated. The alarm devices (or other devices to be actuated) should not be connected to the relay contacts until after the relay driver outputs have been configured. Otherwise, false alarms could be triggered. Then turn the voltage back on. After the system has been turned on, the message AUER SUPREMA MDO Module and the current software and hardware revision nos. appear on the display of the front panel (MDO module). The module then performs a self-test and starts the system with the message system start in progress. After the system has been started successfully, the number of inputs corresponding to the plugged-in MAI modules appears in the Measure/List menu. Note: If this procedure is not over in 15 minutes, check the installation again and, if necessary, call in an MSA service technician to correct the problem.
6.4.1 Configure the Relay Driver Outputs

Up to 40 relay driver outputs can be actuated per each plugged-in MGO module. Be sure that the first 8 relay driver outputs in the system are permanently assigned to the common alarms. The other relay driver outputs (starting with relay driver output 9) can be configured as desired. (see section 5.7 Connection of the Relay Outputs). The relay driver outputs are configured in the Setup/Relay Outputs menu. The individual options are described below. Note: The name of the menu or of the input or option field used by the PC operating software is given in parentheses. Option field Relays (Output number): Choose the number of the relay driver output to be configured. Option field (beside Relays field) (kind of switching): Normally energised When having been set (alarm, failure), the relay driver output gives out a LOW signal, i.e. the connected relay is de-energised (normally energised principle)
Normally de-energised (Relay is de-energised) When having been set (alarm, failure), the relay driver output gives out a HIGH signal i.e. the connected relay is energised (normally de-energised principle) Note: When the relays are inhibited by using the LOCR connection on the MRC TS module, the switching direction selected in the Normal option field must agree with the switching direction set via the bridge BR1 on the MRC TS module. Remember that the relays can be inhibited via the LOCR connection only as a block of 40, whereas the open circuit/closed circuit field makes it possible to select a value for each individual relay. (see section 5.3.7 Configuration of the MRC TS Module)
6-16
SUPREMA
Startup
MSA
Check box new Alarm (i. e. actual alarm): When this field is set, the relay output selected can be set to normal status by pressing the <ACKNL> key, in spite of the value having been outside the limits. Configuration Matrix: Here is where you assign the measure point no. and the setting conditions to be fulfilled to the selected relay output. The input numbers are shown in the column Channel (No.). (PC operating program: In addition, the corresponding input parameters which were entered in the Setup/Measure Points menu are shown the Tag and Marking columns.) Use the control fields [ ] and [ ] to scroll through the list of inputs (select the cursor key and then press Return). (PC operating software: Use the scroll bar.) Attention: When connecting the sensors to the rack, space constraints allow only every other MAI module slot to be used. This means that the input numbers are 916, 2532, etc. The input numbers 18, 1724, etc., which are not actually present still appear, however, in the setting matrix. In no case may any settings be made here. For each input, it is possible to select any one of the following conditions: 1st alarm, 2nd alarm, 3rd alarm, 4th alarm, failure, or locked. In the Voting option field, you can link the individual setting conditions logically together. Check box 1st-4th Alarm: If the alarm condition (limit value) for the assigned input is fulfilled, then the selected setting condition is fulfilled. Checking the check box selects the condition. Check box Failure: This setting condition is fulfilled when a failure has occurred at the assigned input. Checking the check box selects the condition. Check box Locked: This setting condition is fulfilled when the assigned input is inhibited. This condition is selected by checking the check box. Option field Voting: Here links can be made between the various setting conditions selected in the setting matrix. The number of setting conditions selected for the chosen relay driver output is shown after the / (in the field Alarm(s) of). In the option field Voting, you enter the number of conditions which must be fulfilled for the setting of the relay driver output. The following types of links can be set up in this way: Single link: Exactly one condition has been set, and the value 1 has been selected as the switching threshold. OR link: Several conditions have been set, and the value 1 has been selected as the switching threshold. That is, the selected relay output is set when any one or more than one of the selected conditions are fulfilled. It is possible in this way to configure a Common Alarm. AND link: The value set for the switching threshold is the same as the number of selected conditions; that is, all of the selected conditions must be fulfilled before the selected relay output is set. n out of m link: If m conditions have been set and the value n has been selected as the switching threshold, the selected relay output is set when n out of the m conditions are fulfilled.
SUPREMA
6-17
MSA
Startup
Attention: After finishing the configuration , check the settings you have made for correctness and plausibility to ensure that the alarms will be triggered reliably. It is recommended that the relay output driver configuration be checked after the preliminary calibration and before the connection of alarm devices by supplying test gas to the sensors. In this way, the functionality of the entire system is tested all the way from the sensor to alarm actuation. Attention: No input may be inhibited during the test.
The alarm configuration can also be checked at the sensors without test gas application by using the sensor simulation modules.
6.4.2 Behaviour of the Relay Outputs

The behaviour of a relay output depends on the parameter setting of new Alarm or the alarm settings latching or non-latching section 4 Operation of the System. Non-latching alarm: The signal is within the alarm limits: The output is at normal status. The output is permanently at alarm status. The output is at alarm status, unless the parameter setting is new Alarm (i. e. actual alarm). The output changes to normal status, if the parameter setting is new Alarm. If after 24 hours the signal is still outside the alarm limits, the output changes again to alarm status and can be acknowledged again. The output changes to normal status, regardless of whether the alarm has been acknowledged or not. The signal is outside the alarm limits: Acknowledgement by pressing the ACKNL key:
The signal is no longer outside the limits:
For non-latching alarms, the RESET key has no effect. Latching alarm: The signal is within the alarm limits: The output is at normal status. The output is permanently at alarm status. The output is at alarm status, unless the parameter setting is new Alarm (i. e. actual alarm). The output changes to normal status, if the parameter setting is new Alarm (i. e. actual alarm). The signal is outside the limit: Acknowledgement by pressing the ACKNL key:
6-18
SUPREMA
Startup
MSA
The signal is no longer outside the alarm limits, and the ACKNL key has not yet been pressed: The output is permanently at alarm status. The output is at alarm status, unless the parameter setting is new Alarm (i. e. actual alarm). The output changes to normal status, if the parameter setting is new Alarm. If after 24 hours the signal is still outside the alarm limits, the output changes again to alarm status and can be acknowledged again. The signal is no longer outside the alarm limits, and the ACKNL key has been pressed:
The signal is no longer outside the alarm limits, the ACKNL key has been pressed, and the RESET key is being pressed: The output changes to normal status If the signal is still outside the alarm limit, or if the ACKNL key has not yet been pressed, pressing the RESET key has no effect.
6.5 Preliminary Calibration

Note: Under certain conditions, some of the maintenance and service functions described here can be nonfunctional when older versions of the hardware and software of the SUPREMA system are being used. For detailed information on this, please contact the MSA Customer Service office in your area.
6.5.1 Passive Sensors

After the sensors have been allowed sufficient recovery time, which depends on the sensors and on the measuring components (see the appropriate sensor data sheets), the preliminary calibration for passive sensors must be performed on the SUPREMA system. Note: At least 2 people are required to perform the preliminary calibrations. To avoid communication problems between Person 1 operating the SUPREMA and Person 2 supplying the sensors with gas, we recommend the usage of a set of appropriate two-way radios. In addition, the required zero and test gases as well as test adapters and hose connections (see the sensor operating and maintenance instructions) for supplying the gas are a necessary precondition for the successful completion of the preliminary calibrations. The duration and flow rate of the zero gas and test gas can be found in the he associated sensor operating and maintenance instructions. Attention: The preliminary calibration may not be performed until after the preliminary adjustment of the MAI module in accordance with Section Preadjustment of Passive Sensors, has been properly completed for all connected passive sensors.
SUPREMA
6-19
MSA
Startup
6.5.2 Presetting of Passive Sensors

For the preliminary calibration, the following steps must be completed by person 1 (at the SUPREMA) and by person 2 (at the sensor in question): Person 1: Select the Maintain/Calibration menu. Select the input to be calibrated in the Measuring Point option field. Enter the gas concentration in the Zero Gas field. Note: The concentration of the test gas in the zero gas is to be entered in this field (usually 0%), not the concentration of the zero gas!
Attention: The value must be identical to the lower limit of the measuring range; that is, it must be equal to zero. Enter the test gas concentration in the Test Gas field. If the test gas is not the same as the reference gas entered in the Setup/measure points menu, select the test gas being used in the Test Gas Type field. Activate the field First calibration. Start calibration with the Start control field (select the control field, press Enter). Note: We recommend the use of test gas with a concentration of approximately 50% of the measuring range of the input. In no case should the test gas concentration be less than 25% of the extreme value of the measuring range. If possible, the test gas (the gas which used to calibrate the sensor) and the measurement gas (the gas to be monitored) should be identical. If this is not the case and a reference gas is used, the response factor of the gas concentration used must be known (see O & M instructions for the sensor, reference curve).
Attention: Exceptions to this rule are sensor types D-8101, D-8113, D-8113, D-8201, DF-8201, DF-8250, DF-8401 and DF-8603. Because of the nonlinear output signal of these sensors, they should always be calibrated to the rating [extreme value of the measuring range] provided that this is below the LEL [lower explosion limit]. Person 2: Supply the zero gas through the test adapter to the sensor assigned to the selected input (duration and flow rate according to the sensor O & M instructions). After actuating the Start field, you will be asked for the password. Enter the password or actuate the key switch. The End Calibration submenu will appear.
Person 1:
6-20
SUPREMA
Startup
MSA
The values of the preceding calibration are shown in the line OLD. The values of the current calibration are shown in the line NEW after the control field has been actuated [Store]. In a preliminary calibration, the line OLD is zero. In the Sig: field, the current measurement value UA of the input to be calibrated is shown. After the zero gas has been supplied for a sufficient period of time all 5 digits of the bar display are filled black actuate the control field [Store] to confirm the value. The value is now shown in the field CAL-ZERO/mV. After you have been informed by person 1 that the zero point calibration has been completed successfully, cut off the zero gas supply and start with the test gas supply. The current measurement value UA of the measure point to be calibrated shown in the Sig: field changes. After the test gas has been supplied for a sufficient period of time all 5 digits of the bar display are filled black confirm the value by actuating the control field [Store]. The value is now shown in the CAL-SPAN/mV field. Conclude the calibration of the selected input by actuating the control field [End]. Note: Signals UA above 600 mV are not valid for the zero point calibration. During the sensitivity calibration the value in test gas feed must be 200 mV greater than the current value in zero gas feed.
Person 2:
Person 1:
In the start calibration menu, select the next input, and repeat the procedure described above. After you have been informed by person 1 that the sensitivity calibration has been successfully completed, shut off the test gas supply and start the zero gas supply at the next sensor to be calibrated. Note: If the preadjustment was correct, the ACTUAL VALUES for the zero point will be approximately in the range of 350 mV to 450 mV. The signal voltage shown is calculated according to the formula: Signal = Cpr / 100 * 1600 mV + 400 mV (for sensors with a linear output signal), where Cpr is the concentration of the test gas as a % of the measuring range. The tolerance is approximately equal to the signal value in mV 100 mV.
Person 2:
Attention: If the signal voltage exceeds a value of 2000 mV during the test gas supply, a signal failure will be triggered in the system (the Signal Fail LED will flash). The calibration is invalid. In no case may the calibration value be accepted. Instead, terminate the calibration by actuating the control field [Cancel]. Then check the choice of test gas concentration and make sure that it is being supplied correctly. It may be necessary to check and correct the preadjustment of the input on the MAI module.
SUPREMA
6-21
MSA
Startup
6.5.3 Active Sensors

A preliminary calibration on the SUPREMA system is not required for active sensors (sensors with a 4 ... 20 mA output). The preliminary calibration is to be performed directly at the sensor in accordance with the operating and maintenance instructions of the sensor. As default values, the SUPREMA system interprets an input current of 4 mA as 0% of the measuring range and an input current of 20 mA as 100% of the measuring range. Attention: In the case of sensors which do not send a maintenance level during calibration, it is recommended that the input be inhibited in the Setup/Measure Points menu during the preliminary calibration.
Note: As part of the startup procedure, it is recommended that the correctness of the displayed values be checked either by supplying gas to the sensors or by supplying a constant current to the MAT module from a source of constant current. The method for correcting the 4 ... 20 mA input is described in section 7.1.2 Active Sensors.
6.6 Completing Startup

To check the correctness of all the completed adjustments, it is recommended that all the inputs be tested with test gas. Verify that the correct alarm is triggered and that the correct relay driver output is actuated. Keep a record of this test. Startup is complete after a successful final check of the SUPREMA system and of the completed installation and calibration procedures. Now the external alarm and warning systems can be connected. Warning: To guarantee the unambiguity of catalytic combustion sensor operation it must be made sure (e.g. by check with hand-held test instruments) each time before turning on the sensors and the system that the environmental atmosphere to be monitored by the sensors is free of combustible gases.
6-22
SUPREMA
MSA
7. Maintenance and Service

Note Under certain conditions, some of the maintenance and service functions described here can be nonfunctional in older versions of the hardware and software of the SUPREMA system. For details, contact the MSA Customer Service office in your area.
Warning: In the case of operation with catalytic combustion sensors: To guarantee the unambiguity of catalytic combustion sensor operation it must be made sure (e.g. by check with hand-held test instruments) each time before turning on the sensors and the system that the environmental atmosphere to be monitored by the sensors is free of combustible gases.
7.1 Maintenance and Adjustment

The system must be checked at regular intervals (not greater than 6 months) to ensure that it is functioning properly in accordance with the EN 50073 and the applicable international, national, industry-specific or company regulations, and the sensitivity and the zero point of the connected sensors must be adjusted as necessary in accordance with the operating instructions for the types of sensors connected to the system. Sensors which are no longer able to generate the minimum signals must be replaced.
7.1.1 Passive Sensors

Before calibration, make sure that the sensors have recovered. Note: At least 2 people are required to perform the calibration. To avoid communication problems between Person 1 operating the SUPREMA and Person 2 supplying the sensors with gas, we recommend the usage of a set of appropriate two-way radios. Again, the required zero and test gases, test adapters, and hose connections (see operating and maintenance instructions for the sensor) for supplying the gas are the necessary precondition for a successful calibration. The duration and flow rate of the zero and test gas supplies can be found in the operating and maintenance instructions as well as the sensor data sheet for the sensor in question. For the calibration, person 1 (at the SUPREMA) and person 2 (at the sensor in question) must perform the following steps: Person 1: Select the Maintain/Calibration menu. Select the input to be calibrated in the Measure Point field. Enter the gas concentration in the Zero Gas field.
SUPREMA
7-1
MSA
Note: Enter the concentration of the test gas in the zero gas in this field (usually 0%), not the zero gas concentration.
Attention: The value must be identical to the lower limit of the measuring range, which means it must be equal to zero. Enter the test gas concentration in the Test Gas field. If the test gas is different from the reference gas entered in the Setup/Measure points menu, select the test gas used in the Test Gas Type field. Start calibration with the Start control field (select the control field, press Enter). Note: We recommend the use of test gas with a concentration of approximately 50 % of the measuring range of the measure point. In no case should the test gas concentration be less than 25 % of the extreme value of the measuring range. If possible, the test gas (the gas which used to calibrate the sensor) and the measurement gas (the gas to be monitored) should be identical. If this is not the case and a reference gas is used, the response factor of the gas concentration used must be known (see O & M instructions for the sensor, reference curve).
Attention: Exceptions to this rule are sensor types D-8101, D-8113, DF-8201, DF-8250, DF-8401 and DF-8603. Because of the nonlinear output signal of these sensors, they should always be calibrated to the rating [extreme value of the measuring range] (provided that this is below the LEL [lower explosion limit]. Person 2: Supply zero gas through the test adapter to the sensor assigned to the selected measure point (duration and flow rate according to the sensor O & M instructions). After actuating the Start field, you will be asked for the password at the first measure point. Enter password or actuate the key switch. The End Calibration submenu will appear. The readouts SENS.% and UX mV are currently still not available. The values of the preceding calibration are shown in the line OLD. The values of the current calibration are shown in the line NEW after the control field has been actuated [Store]. In a preliminary calibration, the line OLD is blank. In the Signal= field, the current measurement value of the measure point to be calibrated is shown. After the zero gas has been supplied for a sufficient period of time all 5 digits of the bar display are filled black actuate the control field [Store] to confirm the value. The value is now shown in the field CAL-ZERO/mV.
Person 1:
Person 2: After you have been informed by person 1 that the zero point calibration has been completed successfully, cut off the zero gas supply and start with the test gas supply.
7-2
SUPREMA
MSA
Person 1: The current measurement value of the measure point to be calibrated is shown in the Sig: field. After the test gas has been supplied for a sufficient period of time all 5 digits of the bar display are filled black confirm the value by actuating the control field [Store]. The value is shown now in the CAL-SPAN/mV field. Conclude the calibration of the selected input by actuating the control field [End]. Note: Signals UA above 600 mV are not valid for the zero point calibration. Signals UA below 600 mV are not valid for the span calibration. A dialog menu will appear: Preliminary calibration? NO=<ESC>, YES=<ENTER>. Terminate the calibration by actuating the ESC key. Pressing the ENTER key deletes the measurement values of earlier calibrations stored in the calibration menu and in the Diagnosis/Logbook (should be used only after replacement of a sensor). In the start calibration menu, select the next input and repeat the procedure described here. After being informed by person 1 that the sensitivity calibration has been completed successfully, shut off the test gas supply and start zero gas supply at next input to be calibrated. Note: If the preadjustment was correct, the ACTUAL VALUES for the zero point will be approximately in the range of 350 mV to 450 mV. The signal voltage shown is calculated according to the formula: Signal = C / 100 * 1600 mV + 400 mV (for sensors with a linear output signal), where C is the concentration of the test gas as a % of the measuring range. The tolerance is approximately equal to the signal value in mV 100 mV.
Person 2:
Attention: If the signal voltage exceeds a value of 2000 mV during the test gas supply the calibration is invalid. In no case may the calibration value be accepted. Instead, terminate the calibration by actuating the control field [Cancel]. Then check the choice of test gas concentration and make sure that it is being supplied correctly. It may be necessary to check and correct the preadjustment of the measure point on the MAI module.
7.1.2 Active Sensors

For active sensor (sensors with an output of 4 ... 20 mA), the calibration is to be performed directly on the sensor in accordance with the relevant operating and maintenance instructions. As default values, the SUPREMA system interprets an input current of 4 mA as 0% of the measuring range and an input current of 20 mA as 100 % of the measuring range.
SUPREMA
7-3
MSA
Attention: In the case of sensors which do not transmit a maintenance level during calibration, we recommend that the measure point be locked during the preliminary calibration in the Setup/Measure point menu. In the following section, the procedure for checking and correcting the display for active sensors is described. Checking and Adjusting the Display If, in spite of correctly calibrated active sensors, the expected values (0% of the measuring range for a signal current of 4 mA and 100 % of the measuring range for a signal current of 20 mA) do not appear on the SUPREMA, the calibration on the SUPREMA must be checked and corrected if necessary. For this purpose, either the signal current of the connected sensor or a variable power source can be used. If the signal current of the sensor is used, make sure that the sensor is supplying the correct values. Tip: A simple way to correct a possibly incorrectly set measure point consists in changing the selected type of sensor in the Setup/Measure Points/Sensor Data menu. To do this, navigate to the Setup/Measure Points/Sensor Data menu, select any other type of sensor, and confirm the selection ([OK] field in the Setup/ Measure Points/Information menu). Then re-select the type of sensor actually connected and confirm. The measure point will thus be set back again to the standard setting of 4 mA = 0 % of the measuring range and 20 mA = 100 % of the measuring range. Attention: The measure point should be locked during this adjustment (to prevent an alarm from being triggered).
Note: During this calibration the measuring point must be inhibit (alarm rejection).
Note: No adjustments on the MAI module are either necessary or possible for active sensors. Calibration with a Variable Power Source One person is required for this procedure. The following steps are to be performed: Lock the measure point in question in the Setup/Measure points menu to prevent an alarm from being triggered. Then detach the cable connections of the sensor to the MAT module. Connect the variable power source to the MAT module as follows: MAT module terminal 1: + pole of the power source (signal) MAT module terminal 4: pole of the power source (GND)
7-4
Set the output current of the power source to 4 mA. Unlock the measure point in question in the Setup/Measure Points menu to allow a
SUPREMA
MSA
calibration. Select the Maintain/Calibration menu. Select the measure point to be calibrated in the Measure Point field. Enter 0 % of the measuring range in the field Zero Gas as the zero gasconcentration. Enter 100 % of the measuring range in the field Test Gas as the test gas concentration. Begin the calibration with the Start control field (select the control field, press Enter). After actuating the Start field, you will be asked for the password at the first measure point. Enter the password or actuate the key switch. The End Calibration submenu will appear. The current measurement value UA of the measure point to be calibrated will appear in the Sig: field. For an input current of 4 mA, a value of 400 mV 10 mV should be displayed here. In the field Ux= no value or ***** is displayed. If the value UA is within the tolerance range (400 mV 10 mV), confirm by actuating the control field [Store]. The value will be appear in the field CAL-ZERO / mV. Set the output current of the power source to 20 mA. The current measurement value UA of the measure point to be calibrated will appear in the Sig: field. For an input current of 20 mA, a value of 2.000 mV 10 mV should appear here. If the value UA is within the tolerance range (2.000 mV 10 mV), confirm by actuating the control field [Store]. The value will appear in the field CAL-SPAN/ mV. End the calibration of the selected measure point by actuating the control field [End]. A dialog box appears: Preliminary calibrations? NO=<ESC> YES=<ENTER>. Terminate the calibration by actuating the ESC key. Pressing the Enter key deletes the measurement values of earlier calibrations stored in the calibration menu and in the Diagnosis/Logbook menu (should be used only after replacement of a sensor). Set the power source back to 4 mA and lock the measure point again. Cut the connection between the MAT module terminal and the power source and reconnect the sensor. After allowing the sensor to recover sufficiently, unlock the measure point. In the beginning calibration menu, select the next measure point and repeat the procedure described above.
Calibration by Means of the Sensor Make sure before the calibration that the sensors have recovered. This procedure can also be used to compensate for small deviations in the output current of the sensors from the system setup of the SUPREMA (4 mA = 0 % of the measuring range, 20 mA = 100 % of the measuring range). The deviations in the current should not exceed 0.5 mA, however, or otherwise the error evaluation (leaving the measuring range in one direction or the other) will be impaired.
SUPREMA
7-5
MSA
Note: At least 2 people are required to perform the calibration. To avoid communication problems between Person 1 operating the SUPREMA and Person 2 supplying the sensors with gas, we recommend the usage of a set of appropriate two-way radios. Again, the required zero and test gases, test adapters, and hose connections (see operating and maintenance instructions of the sensor) for supplying the gases are a necessary precondition for a successful calibration. The duration and flow rate of the zero and test gas supplies can be found in the operating and maintenance instructions for the sensor in question. For the calibration, person 1 (at the SUPREMA) and person 2 (at the sensor in question) must perform the following steps: Person 1: Select the Maintain/Calibration menu. Select the input to be calibrated in the Measure Point field. Enter 0 % of the measuring range in the field Zero Gas as the zero gasconcentration. Enter the test gas concentration in the field Test Gas. If the test gas is not the same as the reference gas entered in the Setup/Measure Points menu, select the test gas being used in the field Test Gas Type. Note: Sensors with a linear output signal: The test gas concentration should be in the upper third of the measuring range. The displayed signal voltage is calculated according to the formula: Signal = C / 100 * 1600 mV + 400 mV. Sensors with a nonlinear output signal must be calibrated to the rating. (Take note of the LEL.) Signal voltage for full scale: 2,000 mV 10 mV. Start calibration with the Start control field (select the control field, press Enter). Supply the zero gas via the test adapter to the sensor assigned to the selected input (duration and flow rate as specified in the O&M instructions for the sensor). After actuating the Start field, you will be asked for the password at the first measure point. Enter the password or actuate the key switch. The End Calibration submenu will appear. The current measurement value UA of the measure point to be calibrated will appear in the Sig: field. After the zero gas has been supplied for a sufficient period of time (the value remains stable), confirm the value by actuating the control field [Store]. The value will appear in the field CAL-ZERO/mV. After being informed by person 1 that the zero point calibration has been completed successfully, shut off the zero gas supply and start test gas supply.
Person 2:
Person 1:
Person 2:
7-6
SUPREMA
MSA
Person 1: The current measurement value UA of the measure point to be calibrated will appear in the Sig: field. After the test gas has been supplied for a sufficient period of time (the value remains table), confirm the value by actuating the control field [Store]. The value will appear in the he field CAL-SPAN / mV. Conclude the calibration of the selected measure point by actuating the control field [End]. A dialog box appears: Preliminary calibration? NO=<ESC> YES=<ENTER>. End the calibration by pressing the ESC key. Pressing the ENTER key deletes the measurement values of earlier calibrations stored in the calibration menu and in the Diagnosis/Logbook menu (should be used only after replacement of a sensor). Select the next measure point in the beginning calibration menu and repeat the procedure described above. After being informed by person 1 that the sensitivity calibration has been completed successfully, shut off the test gas supply and begin with the zero gas supply at the next measure point to be calibrated.
Person 2:
7.1.3 Separate Zero Adjustment

A separate zero adjustment is possible from software versions MCP 2.02.15 and MDO 2.02.15b. If the primary calibration has already been completed, then it is possible to only adjust the zero in the course of maintenance work. The appropriate span value is then processed by the SUPREMA based on the data from the last calibration completed. The steps for zero adjustment are to be carried out as described in the previous section. After storage of the zero value ([Store] control field) the zero adjustment can be carried out by actuating the (End] control field). The following confirmation dialog must be answered by entering <YES>. Note: If the value is below the zero adjustment range, the separate zero setting is cancelled and a warning displayed. Exceeding the calculated span value is also invalid and results in cancelling of the separate zero setting. It is then recommended to carry out a complete calibration (according to Sect. 7) and if necessary replace the sensor.
Note: After the separate zero setting, no SPAN value is shown in the calibration menu and in the logbook for these settings.
SUPREMA
7-7
MSA
7.2 Sensor Simulation Modules

For function test of the SUPREMA sensor inputs, simulation modules can be used independently from the sensor type.
7.2.1 Description of Function of Sensor Simulation Module 4 ... 20mA, Catalytic Combustion, Semiconductor
Design Signal-LED
green: Sensor simulation 4 ... 20 mA, Order No.: 10030262 red: Sensor simulation Catalytic Combustion Order No.: 10030263 yellow: Sensor simulation Semiconductor Order No.: 10030264
SPAN signal potentiometer Plug Switch plugged = SPAN pulled = ZERO ZERO signal potentiometer
Figure 7-1a: Sensor simulation Module with bold switch
Test Jacks
Signal-LED
green: Sensor simulation 4 ... 20 mA, Order No.: 10030262 red: Sensor simulation Catalytic Combustion Order No.: 10030263 yellow: Sensor simulation Semiconductor Order No.: 10030264
SPAN signal potentiometer Switch Position to the LED = SPAN to the jack = ZERO ZERO signal potentiometer
Figure 7-1b: Sensor simulation Module with rocker switch
Test Jacks
Setting and Operation After plugging the sensor simulator into a MAT a desired measuring value is adjusted for operation with zero signal by means of rotation at the zero signal potentiometer. By plugging the switch another measuring value is simulated which is regulated by the span signal potentiometer. It can be measured at both of the test jacks or directly at the MAI by means of a voltmeter.
7-8
SUPREMA
MSA
Examples for MCI Check 4 ... 20 mA Sensor type: Measuring gas: Zero gas: Reference gas: Ua at open switch (Normal operation): Ua at closed switch (Alarm) : DF-9500 Carbon monoxide Air Carbon monoxide 400 mV 1.9 V
The sensor simulation module may be used only to the check and presetting and not to the calibration. for MPI Check Catalytic Combustion Sensors Sensor type: Measuring gas: Zero gas: Reference gas: Ux at open switch (Normal operation): Ux at closed switch (Alarm): for MPI Check Semiconductor Sensors Sensor type: Measuring gas: Zero gas: Reference gas: Ux at open switch: Ux at closed switch: D-8101 Acetone Air Acetone 1.6 V 1.1 V D-7100 Methane Air Methane 0 mV 100 mV
7.3 Replacement of Sensors

Sensors which are no longer able to reach the minimum signals, the zero point of which can no longer be adjusted, or which no longer function properly for some other reason must be replaced. For this purpose, inhibit the corresponding measure point in the Setup/Measure Points menu. Then perform the following steps: Remove the connector plug of the sensor from the MAT/MAT TS module or the sensor cable from the MGT 40 TS module. Pull out the old sensor, put the new (properly functioning) sensor in its place, and install it (see section 5.6 Connection of the Sensors). Reconnect the connector plug of the sensor to the MAT/MAT TS module or the sensor cable to the MGT 40 TS module.
SUPREMA
7-9
MSA
Perform a preliminary calibration as described in section 6.3 Start the Sensors , under consideration of the required sensor recovery time. Check the configuration of the sensors in the Setup/Measure Points menu. Unlock the measure point.
7.4 Replacement of Modules

When a module is found to be defective, it must be replaced. Attention: An MSA service technician must be called in to help with the diagnosis and to help decide whether the module must be replaced or not.
Attention: Generally, all plug-in modules must only be replaced when the voltage to the SUPREMA system has been shut off. Pulling out and plugging the plug-in modules as well must only be effected after having disconnected the supply voltage connections. In the following, the procedure for replacing individual modules is described.
7.4.1 Plug-In Modules

Replacement of the MCP and MDO Modules The MCP module and the MDO module are responsible for signal processing, signal management, and the storage of configuration data, among other things, in the system. The voltage to the system must therefore be shut off before these modules can be replaced. The modules must be replaced by the following sequence of steps: Safeguard the system configuration (setup/measure points, relay outputs, system). Cut off the power to the system (e.g., by disconnecting the supply voltage connections at the MIB module see figure 5-45 MIB-Module, Supply Voltage Terminals. Note: When rail-mounted relay modules are being used, the triggering of an alarm associated with the shut-off of the voltage can be prevented by locking the relays on the MRC TS module, provided that the MRC TS module is supplied with a voltage separate from that of the system (see section 5.7.2 Additional Relay Outputs). Replace the MCP, MDO or MCP and MDO modules (be careful of the ribbon cable connection between the MCP and the MDO modules). Turn the voltage supply back on. Reconfigure the system. Unlock the relays again if necessary.
Replacement of the MDA Module It is necessary to turn off the system to replace the MDA module. To prevent alarms and failure messages, the measure points assigned to the MDA module or the relays assigned to the measure points (see section 5.7.2 Additional Relay Outputs) Inhibit) must be inhibited.
7-10
SUPREMA
MSA
Replacement of MAI, MCI, and MPI Modules It is necessary to turn off the system to replace the MAI module. To avoid alarms and failure messages, the measure points assigned to the MAI module or the relays assigned to the measure points (see section 5.7.2 Additional Relay Outputs) must be inhibited. If the MPI or MCI module is also to be replaced along with the MAI module, care must be taken to ensure that the correct assignment to the connected sensors is preserved (see section 5.3.2 Inserting the Adapter Modules). When MPI modules are being replaced, the following points must be kept in mind: The preadjustment of the MAI module (see section 6.3.1 Presetting of Passive Sensors) must be performed again. The type of MPI must correspond to the type of connected sensor. (see table 5-10: Types of MPI Modules). Attention: When replacing MPI modules, always electrically separate the connected sensor to prevent damage as a result of uncompensated sensor current. When replacing MCI modules, it is not necessary to repeat the adjustment steps, but it is necessary to make sure that the modules are configured correctly. (see section 5.3.3). Replacement of the MGO Module It is necessary to turn off the system to replace the MGO module. To prevent alarms and malfunction messages, the relays must be inhibited directly on the MRC TS module (see section 5.7.2 Additional Relay Outputs). Replacement of the MAO Module It is necessary to turn off the system to replace the MAO module. The failure message can be prevented from being sent any farther by inhibiting the relays on the MST module (MOR-8 module) or on the MRC TS module (MRO 8 TS module) (see section 5.10.7 LOCR Terminal or section 5.7.2 Additional Relay Outputs).
7.4.2 Connection Modules

Replacement of MAT/MAT TS, MUT, and MGT 40 TS Modules These modules can be replaced without interrupting the system, although the function in question (sensor input, relay driver or analog output) is not available during the replacement. When the modules which implement sensor connections are replaced, the assigned measure points must be locked to prevent alarms or failure messages (see section 6.3.6.2 Set the Input Parameters). When it is necessary to replace a MUT module to which an MRC TS module is connected, the connected relays can be locked by using the LOCR connection on the MRC TS module, provided that the MRC TS module has a voltage supply separate from the system (see section 5.7.2.1 Relay Inhibit) Replacement of MRO 8/MRO 8 TS Modules It is not necessary to turn off the system to replace MRO 8/MRO 8 TS modules. Alarm devices which are connected to the modules must be deactivated, however (especially when the relays are operating Normally energised).
SUPREMA
7-11
MSA
7.5 Changing the Password

If a currently valid password is to be changed, a new password can be entered in the following way: Use the cursor key in the Setup/System menu to select the corresponding password field. Press the Enter key; you will be asked to enter the current password or to actuate the key switch. Note: If you have forgotten the current password, a higher-value password can also be entered. If the current parameterisation password is also lost, a new password can be entered by actuating the key switch. If there is no key switch to close, connect terminal contacts 1 (GND) and 2 (PSW) on the MST module (see section 5.10.8 Password Connection) with a wire jumper, provided that these terminals can be accessed safely. After entering the password or actuating the key switch (close it briefly and then open it again), leave the entry window by selecting the OK field and then press the ENTER key. You can now enter the new password in the Password and Confirmation fields of the Setup/System menu. After selecting the OK field, the new password will be accepted when the ENTER key is pressed. The password must have a minimum of four characters and may not have more than eight. Any symbol from the ASCI character set can be used. A distinction is made between upper-case and lower-case letters. If no password at all is wanted, the password can be deleted here by entering zeros. Authorization can then be granted only by the use of the key switch. If there is no key switch, authorization is open to anyone after deletion of the password. In this case, an additional security dialog is initiated with the warning that the approval of the system is revoked in the event of unauthorized changes. If no password at all is wanted, the password can be deleted here by entering blanks. Authorization can then be granted only by the use of the key switch. If there is no key switch, authorization is open to anyone after deletion of the password. In this case, an additional security dialog is initiated with the warning that the approval of the system is revoked in the event of unauthorized changes.
7.6 Plug-In Modules Status LED

In the case of the modules designed as plug-in modules, status LEDs are located in the upper left corner. The position and function of these LEDs are described in the following.
7-12
SUPREMA
MSA
7.6.1 MCP, MDA, MGO, MAO Modules
Figure 7-2: MCP, MDA, MGO, MAO Modules, Status LEDs

LED-No. Color Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 green ON: green ON: green ON: red ON: The external voltage supply is connected to the module. The internal voltage supply is connected to the module. The battery voltage supply is connected to the module. A failure has occurred in the module green ON: yellow ON: yellow ON: The module's CAN bus communications are proceeding correctly. system reset voltage failure
Table 7-1: MCP, MDA, MGO, MAO Modules, Function Status LED
In the normal case, only one of the first three LEDs is on. If no LED is on, there is a problem with the voltage supply to the module. If the failure LED (LED No. 4) is on, you should contact an MSA service technician. If this cannot be done right away, the module can be replaced if a spare unit is available (see section 7.4 Replacement of Modules). The failure which occurred is stored in the SUPREMA logbook and can be found in the Diagnosis/Logbook/System events menu.
SUPREMA
7-13
MSA
7.6.2 MAI Module
Figure 7-3: MAI Module, Status LEDs

LED EXT INT BAT Color green green green Function ON: The external voltage supply is connected to the module. ON: The internal voltage supply is connected to the module. ON: The battery voltage supply is connected to the module.
Table 7-2: MAI Module, Function Status LEDs
In the normal case, only one of the first 3 LEDs is lit. If no LED is lit, there is a problem with the voltage to the module.
7.7 Diagnostic Functions

The structure and operation of the Diagnosis menu are described in detail in section 4 Operation of the System. In the following, some of the more important functions are described in greater detail. The Diagnosis menu is divided into the submenus Logbook and Measuring Data. In the Logbook menu, a series of failures and incidents is stored and can thus be used to conduct an incident verification procedure at a later time. The current status of the system, however, can be reviewed in the Measuring Data menu.
7-14
SUPREMA
MSA
7.7.1 Logbook Functions

The logbook is divided into six history menus: Calibration System Events Signal Events Changes Supplemental Voltage Processor Temperature
The History entries are shown as list view in chronological order. Note: You can scroll vertically and horizontally through the lists by selecting the header (with the cursor key), by pressing Enter again, and finally by using the cursor keys (or by using the scroll bar in the PC operating program). Calibration History The date/time of the last four calibrations and last presettings are stored here for each measure point. If there are more than 4 calibration entries, the oldest calibration entry is overwritten. Exception: the preliminary calibration is always kept. The presetting entries are overwritten with the next similar presetting. Basically, every presetting deletes all calibration entries of the corresponding measuring point. In addition, the test and zero gases used (type of gas, concentration, and unit) are also stored as well as the associated signal voltage values (preamplified signal UA and difference voltage Ux). On the basis of the gas concentration, it is possible to use these values to determine the percentage by which the sensor signal has decreased. Note: The signal voltage values (preamplified signal UA and difference voltage Ux) and the unit are visible on the MDO module display only after scrolling with the right cursor key. System Events History Here, system events are recorded for service purposes. These serve as a source of information for the MSA service personal. Signal Events History Crossings of the alarm threshold, signal failures, confirmations and resets of alarms as well as primary power system changes are stored in this history. The date/time of the incident, if applicable, the measure point involved and a short description are given. When an alarm limit is crossed, the alarm number (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th alarm) is also recorded. The message signal failure is transmitted when: the signal is outside the measuring range; an interruption or short-circuit has occurred in the sensor cable; an MAI module is being replaced without the associated measure points having been inhibited first; or an MPI or MCI module not corresponding to the type of sensor connected is being used (see section 5.3.2 Configuration of the MAI Module)
SUPREMA
7-15
MSA
Configuration Changes History Changes of measure point parameters are stored here. An entry includes the following data: date/time the configuration was accepted as valid from the Measure Point menu; measure point no.; name of the changed parameter and new value of the changed parameter
Supply Voltage History The times when the supply voltage exceeded or fell below the limit value (internal supply, external supply, battery backup) are stored in this history. An entry is made each time a new maximum or minimum value for a power source is measured. The limit values for the supply voltage are: Minimum value: 19.2 VDC Maximum value: 32.0 VDC The entry contains: date and time of the voltage measurement name of the supply source measured voltage value
Processor Temperature History The times when the temperature of the processor on the MDA module exceeded or fell below the limit value are stored in this history. When a temperature value leaves the allowed range and exceeds or falls below a limit value, the actual temperature value is stored; when the temperature returns to the allowed range, the peak value which occurred during the deviation is stored. An entry contains: the date and time when the temperature exceeded or fell below the limit; the serial no. of MDA module; the temperature value and information on whether the incident involved a departure from the allowed range or a return to the allowed range.
7.7.2 Measurement Data

This menu is divided into the submenus Measure Points and Modules, which display the current data of the measure points and modules present in the system.
7-16
SUPREMA
MSA
7.8 System Failure Messages

F. Failure No Message Text 1 Dynamic memory overflow at Appears in case of Stack overflow or stack underflow detected Disappears in Error Fail Info 1 case of LED LED (BYTE) Restart X X Task IDD Info 2 (DWORD) Memory address Mo- Remarks/Remedial action dule all Generally software problems (e.g. wrong stack dimensions) Perhaps sequence error to No. 2,3 or 6 Hardware defect: exchange module
Error in RAM failure work memory detected (Self-test) at Error in program memory at Internal timeout at ROM failure detected (Self-test)
Internal time control detects failure
Whole RAM X tested: failurefree (after approx. 24 h) Whole ROM X tested: failurefree (after approx. 24 h) All tasks have X been reported in time CAN Controller X in normal mode
Bit pattern Memory fault bits address
all
X*
Data lost on Bus at
CAN controller detects overflow
1 = test 0 at system start, else 0 Nominal value of Taskflags (8 lowest Bit) Always 0
Checksum is = loWord should be = HiWord Taskflags is = loWord should be = HiWord Always 0
all
Hardware defect: exchange module
all
MDA MGO MAO
Fatal internal Exception Interrupt error at (e.g. write access to ROM, invalid memory address...) Buffer Overflow of the overflow at internal processing queues.
Restart
Exeption no.
Memory address
all
Restart
Queue no. Status
MDA MCP MDO
Communication error on bus at System error of configuration memory at
Error at SDO transfer (transfer of configuration and parameter data)
SDO transfer successfully ended
CAN-I/O error code
CANopen index/sub index
MCP MDO
Error on accessing flash Restart memory which contains parameter and configuration data files
Flash error code
Sector/block MCP or cell no. MDO
Perhaps sequence error of CAN bus failure. Check Bus (*System fail only if failure is standing in line more than 1 sec.) Green LED goes out if CAN overflow is detected. Perhaps Bus not terminated correctly or modules with wrong bitrate at the bus. May also be hardware defect. Hardware defect: exchange module Perhaps sequence error to No. 1, 2 or 3 Perhaps in combination with No. 4 at system overload or sequence error to CAN bus failures Perhaps CAN-bus failure: check Bus. Check MCP, MDO, MDA for incompatible software status. May occur when pulling cards out Hardware defect. Exchange module. Perhaps in combination with No. 10 or 15.
Table 7-3: System Failure Message
SUPREMA
7-17
MSA
F. Failure No. Message Text 10 Error in configuration memory at 11 Data lost at serial communication at 12 Node guarding error detected by
Appears in case of
Disappears in case of Whole flash tested errorfree (after approx. 24 h) Restart
Error Fail Info 1 LED LED (BYTE) X X Sector
Info 2 (DWORD)
Module Remarks/Remedial action Hardware defect. Exchange module Perhaps sequence error of No. 9 Data lost at PC interface or printer interface: Check cables, perhaps hardware defect: exchange MDO module CAN-Bus failure, module defect or missing: Check bus and modules. MGO is sending this message if no output data have been received for a certain time Normally software problems (not plausible internal software status) On parameter data matching records of different contents with indentical revision code have been detected: Set parameters by manual selection. Often sequence error of No. 9 or 10. Modules on wrong plug position? Several racks of the same ID (switch) in the system? MAI or MDA defect. Can also be caused by defect rack. Always appears if a MDA but not a MAI, is being plugged in a rack. MGO: Outputs shortcircuited or open.
Flash error detected (Self-test of the configuration an parameter memory) Error at serial communication
Block = low MCP Chksum = hi MDO
No. of the interface
Indication char = l0, status = hi
MDO
Module does not respond to nodeguarding, or does not send any heartbeat
All nodes respond again
ID Module failure; for MGO "0"
No of MAI, MCP CAN bus or 0; MDO for MGO: time MGO
13 Programm error at 14 Data error at
Application programm error Application data error
Restart
Application Various fault no. Data set subindex Data set index + Module-ID
MCP MDO MCP MDO
Restart
15 System The system configuconfiguration ration detected does error at not correspond to the configuration stored or is not consistent 16 Data SPI communication acquisition error between MDA error at and MAI or at digital outputs (MGO)
Restart
ID concerned Module
Type of profile + additional info
all
SPI commuX nication resp. outputs all right again
MDA: Mux OK=1 else 0 MGO: error type
MDA:error MDA type; MDA: MGO Input No. MAI/channel MGO: diagnosis code
ERROR LED: see 7.6.1 LED 4;
FAIL LED: see 4.2.2
7-18
SUPREMA
MSA
ID Rack Assignment in decimal and hexadecimal figures

Rack 1 Slot 1 2 ID dec. 1 2 ID hex. 1 2 Rack 2 Slot 1 2 ID dec. 17 18 ID hex. 11 12 Rack 3 Slot 1 2 ID dec. 33 34 ID hex. 21 22 Rack 4 Slot 1 2 ID dec. 49 50 ID hex. 31 32 Rack 5 Slot 1 2 ID dec. 65 66 ID hex. 41 42 Rack 6 Slot 1 2 ID dec. 81 82 ID hex. 51 52 Rack 7 Slot 1 2 ID dec. 97 98 ID hex. 61 62 Rack 8 Slot 1 2 ID dec. 113 114 ID hex. 71 72 3 3 3 3 19 13 3 35 23 3 51 33 3 67 43 3 83 53 3 99 63 3 115 73 4 4 4 4 20 14 4 36 24 4 52 34 4 68 44 4 84 54 4 100 64 4 116 74 5 5 5 5 21 15 5 37 25 5 53 35 5 69 45 5 85 55 5 101 65 5 117 75 6 6 6 6 22 16 6 38 26 6 54 36 6 70 46 6 86 56 6 102 66 6 118 76 7 7 7 7 23 17 7 39 27 7 55 37 7 71 47 7 87 57 7 103 67 7 119 77 8 8 8 8 24 18 8 40 28 8 56 38 8 72 48 8 88 58 8 104 68 8 120 78 9 9 9 9 25 19 9 41 29 9 57 39 9 73 49 9 89 59 9 105 69 9 121 79 10 10 A 10 26 1A 10 42 2A 10 58 3A 10 74 4A 10 90 5A 10 106 6A 10 122 7A 11 11 B 11 27 1B 11 43 2B 11 59 3B 11 75 4B 11 91 5B 11 107 6B 11 123 7B 12 12 C 12 28 1C 12 44 2C 12 60 3C 12 76 4C 12 92 5C 12 108 6C 12 124 7C 13 13 D 13 29 1D 13 45 2D 13 61 3D 13 77 4D 13 93 5D 13 109 6D 13 125 7D 14 14 E 14 30 1E 14 46 2E 14 62 3E 14 78 4E 14 94 5E 14 110 6E 14 126 7E 15 15 F 15 31 1F 15 47 2F 15 63 3F 15 79 4F 15 95 5F 15 111 6F 15 127 7F 16 16 10 16 32 20 16 48 30 16 64 40 16 80 50 16 96 60 16 112 70
Table 7-4: ID Rack Assignment in decimal and hexadecimal figures
These ID are reserved for gateways (MOD-Bus, Profibus etc.) Slot No. 16 of a rack is reserved for the MDO only. Only one MDO can be contacted in one system.
7.9 Display of Digital Messages

Message Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Sys tem error Signal error Module error CAN-Bus failure Free Meas uring Inhibit DO (Dis able Output) Calibration Sensor warm -up Meas uring range overflow New value Priority 9 8 7 6 1 3 1 1 1 10 2 2 6 4 5 1 Display (List) Meas ure point s tatus Meas ure point s tatus Meas ure point s tatus Meas ure point s tatus 1s t Alarm 2nd Alarm 3rd Alarm 4th Alarm LEDs/Relays Signal AL 1 at Signal AL 2 at Signal AL 3 at Signal AL 4 at Sys tem Fail at Signal Fail at Module failure at CAN failure at
Meas . point s tatus Signal failure
Meas ure Meas ure Meas ure Meas ure Meas ure Meas ure Meas ure
point s tatus free point s tatus m easuring point s tatus inhibited m eas uring point s tatus point s tatus calibration point s tatus s uppres sed point s tatus overflow
Inhibit at Inhibit flas hing Inhibit at Inhibit at Signal Fail at Signal blinking
Table 7-5: Display of the digital messages
The highest priority messages (1 means highest priority) are displayed first. Messages with a lower priority are displayed in addition if these use other indicating ranges for message display.
SUPREMA
7-19
MSA
7.10 LED Test

An LED test is provided (as from module version 11) for the MDO which enables a visual functional test of the front panel LEDs. This test can be carried out independently from the active operating state of the SUPREMA and does not affect the mode of operation of the SUPREMA. To carry out the LED test, please press the switch shown in the illustration. The front panel LEDs should now be illuminated (System power, fail, inhibit and Signal 1st to 4th alarm, fail). If there is an LED that is not illuminated when the switch is pressed, it is possible that the MDO module needs to be replaced.
Figure 7-4: MDO Module, Switch for LED Test
7.11 Instructions for system configuration

7.11.1 Configuration during initial installation
If there is no configuration in the SUPREMA during transfer of the configuration and the first MCP is not plugged into Slot1 of the rack, the PC program "SUPREMA Servicepack" displays an error message "transmission failed" . This can be ignored.
7.11.2 Varying or manual selection of a configuration

If there are different configurations in the SUPREMA modules, e.g. because of replacement of an MCP, a system configuration message appears when the system is switched on for the first time after the modification, see figure 7-5 System configuration message. The module from which the (effective) configuration is to be taken must be specified
7-20
SUPREMA
MSA
If the configuration is to be taken manually from a particular module, press the RESET button for approx. 1 second directly after switch-on. The system configuration message appears after the system starts so that the configuration of a module can be selected.
System configuration There are several possible system configurations available, please select the configuration to be used Module ID Configuration name [OK]
Figure 7-5: System Configuration Message
Selection of the configuration After pressing the button, the desired configuration can be selected with the cursor keys. Press OK to copy the selected configuration to other MDO and/or MCP modules. Note: If a configuration is transferred to the SUPREMA with the "SUPREMA Servicepack", this configuration is always saved in the MDO. If you are not sure that the configuration was distributed to the system, the configuration of MDO is to be selected.
7.11.3 Removal of entries from a configuration

In removing metering points from a configuration, care should be taken to ensure that all parameters of these metering points (settings, connections, etc.) are deleted in the SUPREMA before the new configuration is transferred to the SUPREMA. If the system still contains parameters from measuring points that are no longer configured after re-starting with reduced configuration, the SUPREMA stops with a SYSTEM FAILURE with the status message "system start in progress". Corrective measure: Delete the invalid parameter with the PC program "SUPREMA Servicepack". Communication with the SUPREMA is possible in this system status
SUPREMA
7-21
MSA
7-22
SUPREMA
System Expansions
MSA
8. System Expansions
Up to 256 inputs can be connected to a SUPREMA system. Up to 512 alarms can be given. A complete system for up to 64 inputs can be installed in one 19 rack. Depending on the size of the current system already in place, various additional modules will be required to expand the system. It must also be remembered that connecting additional modules, inputs, and relays increases the power demand of the system and may make it necessary to choose a new system power supply. Attention: Any module installed in addition must be registered with the help of the configuration tool in the system.
8.1 Connection of Additional Sensors

Up to 256 sensors can be connected to a SUPREMA system. One MAI module makes it possible to connect up to 8 sensors. An appropriate MCI or MPI module is required for each sensor. Per rack, a maximum of either 8 MAI modules (when the rail-mount system is used for connecting the sensors: MAT TS or MGT 40 TS module) or 4 MAI modules (when the rack-mount system is used for connecting the sensors: MAT module) are used; that is, a maximum of 64 or 32 sensors can be connected per rack. The connection of additional sensors is based on the assumption that the sensors themselves and their connecting cables have first been installed properly. The sensors are then to be connected according to the instructions described in section 5.6 Connection of the Sensors.. One of the following procedures must be followed, depending on the extent to which the system has already been expanded: 1. Not all of the 8 possible inputs on an existing MAI module have been assigned. The number of free inputs is = the number of new inputs to be connected. In this case, only additional MPI or MCI modules (corresponding to the number and type of new sensors to be connected) are required. To plug in the additional MPI or MCI modules, the MAI module must first be removed from the rack. It is not necessary to shut down the system. To avoid alarm or error messages, the inputs belonging to the MAI module (see section 6.3.6.2 Set the Input Parameters) or the relays belonging to the inputs (see section 5.7.2.1 Relay Inhibit) must be inhibited. When plugging the MPI or MCI modules into the MAI module, be sure that the modules are correctly assigned to the inputs, that the correct type of module for the sensor in question has been selected, and that the module has been configured properly. A detailed description of these topics can be found in section 5.3.2 Configure the MAI Module. After verifying that the expansions are being made correctly, plug the MAI module back into the rack. The additional inputs must now be preadjusted (passive sensors only), configured, and calibrated. These steps are described in detail in sections 6.3.1 Preadjust the Passive Sensors, 6.3.6 Configure the Sensors and 6.5 Preliminary Calibration. 2. All of the existing MAI modules are assigned, or the number of free inputs is < the number of new sensors to be connected. A sufficient number of free slots for additional MAI modules are available in the existing racks. In this case, additional MAI modules (one MAI module required for every 8 sensors) with the associated MPI/MCI modules are required, depending on the number of new sensors to be connected. Additional MAT/MAT TS/MUT/MGT 40 TS modules
SUPREMA
8-1
MSA
System Expansions
will also be needed. The new MAI modules can be plugged in while the system is running. To avoid alarm and error messages, the connected relays (see section 5.7.2.1 Relay Inhibit) must be locked. The new inputs are recognized by the system; as in case no. 1, however, they must be preadjusted (passive sensors only), configured, and calibrated. These steps are described in detail in sections 6.3.1 Preadjust the Passive Sensors and, 6.3.6 Configure the Sensors and 6.5 Preliminary Calibration. 3. All of the existing MAI modules are assigned, or the number of free inputs is < the number of new inputs to be connected. No free slots for additional MAI modules are present in the existing racks. In this case, additional MAI modules (one MAI module required for every 8 sensors) with the associated MPI/MDI modules are required, depending on the number of new sensors to be connected. Additional MAT/MAT TS/MUT/MGT 40 TS modules will also be needed. In addition, one or more new racks and the necessary CAN bus connecting cables are required. Always turn off the voltage when connecting a new rack. After the supply voltage has been turned off, mount and install the additional racks. The connection of the racks and the required configuration changes (MIB module) are described in sections 5.5 Systems with Several Racks and 5.3.1 Configure the MIB Module. Be sure to choose the correct CAN bus Bit rate and CAN node no. Note: Whenever you connect additional sensors, always make sure that the voltage supply to the system is still adequate (see section 5.11.1 Calculation of the Required Power Supply). If necessary, install a voltage supply which meets the new requirements.
8.2 Connection of Additional Relay Driver Outputs

8.2.1 Additional Relay Connections
One SUPREMA system can provide a maximum of 512 relay driver outputs. One MGO module makes 40 relay driver outputs available. A maximum of 10 MGO modules can be plugged into one rack. This number, however, is based on the use of at least one additional rack containing the appropriate MAI modules, which make it possible to connect the sensors. One of the following procedures must be followed, depending on the extent to which the system has already been expanded: 1. A sufficient number of free relay driver outputs are still present on an existing MGO module. a) Until now, only the common alarms of the MRO module plugged into the rack have been used. In this case, the MRO 8 module must be replaced by MRO 8 TS modules, which are connected with ribbon cable via MRC TS and MUT modules to the MGO module plugged into the rack (see Figure 5-33: Connection Diagram of the MRC TS and MRO 8 TS Modules). 5 MRO 8 TS modules, each with 8 relays, can be connected per MRC TS module. The connection procedure is described in detail in section 5.7.2 Additional Relay Outputs. b) MRO 8 TS modules are already installed. In this case, the connection can be made to existing MRO 8 TS modules; otherwise, additional MRO 8 TS modules must be installed.
8-2
SUPREMA
System Expansions
MSA
Note: In both cases, the relay outputs must be configured as instructed in section 6.4.1 Configure the Relay Driver Outputs. 2. An additional MGO module is required. a) Free slots are still available in the existing racks. In this case, it is necessary to install not only the additional MGO module but also additional MRO 8 TS modules, which are connected via MRC TS and MUT modules with ribbon cable to the MGO module plugged into the rack (see Figure 5-33: Connection Diagram of the MRC TS and MRO 8 TS Modules). 5 MRO 8 TS modules, each with 8 relays, can be connected per MRC TS module. The connection procedure is described in detail in section 5.7.2 Additional Relay Outputs. b) There are no free slots for MGO modules available in the existing racks. Always turn off the voltage when connecting a new rack. After turning off the voltage supply, mount and install the additional rack. The connection of the racks and the necessary configuration changes (MIB module) are described in sections 5.5 Systems with Several Racks and 5.3.1 Configuration of the MIB Module. Take special care to choose the correct CAN bus baudrate and CAN node no. Additional relay modules are to be connected as described under Point 2a). Note: In both cases, the relay outputs must be configured as instructed in section 6.4.1 Configure the Relay Driver Outputs.
Note: Whenever you connect additional outputs, always make sure that the voltage supply to the system is still adequate (see section 5.11.1 Calculation of the Required Power Supply). If necessary, install a voltage supply which meets the new requirements.
8.2.2 Additional Switching Outputs

As a rule, the same guidelines (especially those for the MGO module) apply here as to the connection of additional relays (see section 5.7.2 Additional Relay Outputs). Instead of the MRO and MRC TS modules, however, MGT 40 TS modules are required, which are connected via ribbon cable and an MUT module to the MGO module plugged into the rack (see section 5.8 Connection of Switching Outputs).
8.3 Connection of Additional Analog Outputs

A maximum of 128 analog outputs are provided by the SUPREMA, corresponding to the maximum number of sensors which can be connected. One MAO module makes 8 analog outputs available. Up to 10 MAO modules can be plugged in per rack. This is based, however, on the use of at least one additional rack containing the corresponding MAI modules, which make it possible to connect the sensors. One of the following procedures must be used, depending on the extent to which the system has already been expanded:
SUPREMA
8-3
MSA
System Expansions
1. Not all of the 8 possible analog outputs on an existing MAO module have been assigned. The number of free analog outputs is = the number of new analog outputs to be connected. No additional modules are required. The additional analog outputs can be connected to the existing MAT or MAT TS module. 2. All of the existing MAO modules are assigned, or the number of free analog outputs is < the number of new analog outputs to be connected. A sufficient number of free slots for additional MAO modules are present in the existing racks. In this case, additional MAO modules are required in correspondence with the number of new analog outputs to be connected. Attention: In the standard design with a MAT module plugged into the rack, 2 MAO modules are required because of the fixed assignment of the inputs for each group of 8 analog outputs. The modules must be plugged in next to each other (in adjacent slots). The analog outputs are connected to the second module. Additional MAT/MAT TS/MUT modules are also required. 3. All of the existing MAO modules are full, or the number of free inputs is < the number of new inputs to be connected. No free slots for additional MAO modules are available in the existing racks. In this case, additional MAO modules are required, in correspondence with number of new analog outputs to be connected. Attention: In the standard design with a MAT module plugged into the rack, 2 MAO modules are required because of the fixed assignment of the inputs for each group of 8 analog outputs. The modules must be plugged in next to each other (in adjacent slots). The analog outputs are connected to the second module. Additional MAT/MAT TS/MUT modules are also required. One or more new racks and the necessary CAN bus connecting cables will also be needed. Always turn off the voltage when connecting a new rack. After turning off the voltage supply, mount and install the additional rack. The connection of the racks and the necessary configuration changes (MIB module) are described in sections 5.5 Systems with Several Racks and 5.3.1 Configure the MIB Module. Take special care to choose the correct CAN bus baudrate and CAN node no. Note: Whenever you connect additional sensors, always make sure that the voltage supply to the system is still adequate (see section 5.11.1 Calculation of the Required Power Supply). If necessary, install a voltage supply which meets the new requirements.
8-4
SUPREMA
MSA
9. Connection of Peripherals
To simplify the operation (especially the configuration) of the SUPREMA, a PC or laptop with operating software can be connected via the RS 232-A port. A PC or laptop with MSA-Auer visualization software can also be connected to the SUPREMA via the RS 232-A port. A protocol printer can be connected via the RS 232-B interface.
9.1 Connection of a PC/Laptop

For this connection, you can use either the RS 232-A port on the MST module or the RS 232 port on the MDO module. Attention: No more than one PC/laptop may be connected to the SUPREMA system at one time, even if more than one RS232 port is available. Connecting cable: RS 232 extension, 9-pin SUB-D connector, plug/jack (do not use a null modem cable!). To connect a PC/laptop to the MDO module, the front panel screwing has to be loosened, and the front panel must be dropped.
Figure 9-1: MDO Module, RS 232 port
The terminal assignment of the RS 232 port on the MDO module is the same as that used for the RS 232-A port on the MST module (see section 5.10 System Ports (MST Module). The MST module is mounted on the rear of the rack, behind Slot 13.
SUPREMA
9-1
MSA
Figure 9-2: MST Module, RS 232-A port
The PC/laptop is connected via the serial interface (RS 232). The necessary settings for the interface are described in the following sections.
9.1.1 Operating Software

PC operating software is available as an option to improve the convenience of the operation and configuration of the SUPREMA system. The software is available on CD-ROM. It is installed on the PC/laptop by running the setup program (Setup.exe) from the CD. The PC should satisfy the following minimum requirements: Pentium I/200 MHz/32 MB of RAM Windows 98/2000/NT4.0 The operating software runs under the following operating systems: The serial interface of the PC/laptop must be configured in accordance with the following specifications: RS 232 configuration (COM1): 19200 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, parity none Note: The operating software can be connected to any COM!
Section 4.3 Operating by PC describes in detail how to use the software.
9.1.2 Display Software

On request, display software customized to customer specifications can be provided. The program is made available on CD-ROM. How to use the software is described in detail at the enclosed operation instructions.
9-2
SUPREMA
MSA
9.2 Protocol Printer

For the continuous recording of events, a protocol printer can be connected to the RS 232-B port on the MST module. The MST module is mounted on the rear of the rack, behind Slot 13.
Figure 9-3: MST Module, RS 232-B port
The terminal assignment of the RS 232-B connection is described in section 5.10.3 Printer Port. Connecting cable: RS 232 null modem cable! RS 232 configuration: 19200 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity see section 5.10.3 When a signal event occurs (alarm, error), the following single line of information is sent via this port to the connected printer:
Figure 9-4: Protocol printer, Data Structure
This output is generated each time a change occurs in the status of a sampling point, that, is, whenever the upper or lower alarm threshold is crossed (unless the alarm is self-locking), whenever a signal error is received, and whenever a self-locking alarm or a signal error is successfully reset manually (status no longer exists). The current status of the sampling point
SUPREMA
9-3
MSA
with the data structure shown in Figure 9-4: Protocol printer, Data Structure is printed out along with the date and time of the most recent change of status. Attention: This formatting can be changed by the user! Also see section 4.3.3.5 Submenu printer
9.3 Bus Connection

To connect the SUPREMA system to existing industrial control systems, it is necessary to communicate with other data buses for processing of measuring values, alarms/failures. The signal conversion necessary is realised by SUPREMA gateways. Note: 2 gateways Per CAN channel can be connected.
Attention: The gateways are not included in the approval! For the time being, the following bus systems are supported: MOD-Bus RTU Standard MOD-Bus TCP, Description of function - see Software Manual "SUPREMA Gateway CAN/ Modbus TCP with SUPREMA-CANopen Firmware" Profibus DP Further data bus systems on request.
9.3.1 SUPREMA Gateway CAN/MOD-Bus RTU (PKV30)

(Not contained in EC type test approval DMT 03 ATEX G 003 X)
The gateway is installed on a mounting rail in the cabinet and requires a 24 V dc supply voltage (X1). The SUPREMA transfers the data via the CAN bus which is connected to X2 at the gateway. For data supply to the MOD bus, there are 3 physically different serial interfaces (X3) and 3 different data formats to be selected. The gateway generally operates as a slave for the CAN bus and MOD bus. The SUPREMA and the control system must therefore initiate the gateway to send data. Enclosed with the gateway are the following 5 manuals for installation, parameters and operation: Device manual PKV 30-COS Protocol converter for CANopen Slave Bridge manual Transfer CANopen Slave to MSA AUER at the PKV30-COS Protocol manual Modbus coupling RTU Format (also called J-Bus) Operation manual ComPro Project and Service program DOS Program Protocol manual CANopen Slave
9-4
SUPREMA
MSA
Physical MOD-Bus Interface: RS 232C* (Point to Point Interface, 19200 Baud max.) RS 485 (2 [3] wire Bus Interface, 19200 Baud max.) RS 422 (4 [5] wire Bus Interface, 19200 Baud max.)
All interfaces are connected by a 9-pin D-SUB plug connector. The plug pin assignment and the interface parameters can be seen in the gateway device manual PKV 30-COS Protocol converter for CANopen Slave. Attention: for operating the gateway PKV30 via RS485 the jumper J5 inside the device has to be set to position 3-4 and the parameter RTS-Control has to be switched to YES with the COMPRO tool. See also the "device manual protocol converter for CANopen Slave" and the "Operation manual COMPRO". Data format MOD Bus RTU Standard: There are 3 different modes which can be used. Mode 1 contains the measuring value in INT16 , dimension and measuring range of the individual measuring points Mode 2* only contains the measuring values in INT16 of the individual measuring points. Mode 3 contains the measuring value as a decimal number, measuring point No., measuring point status, dimension and measuring range.
* Basic setting (See Bridge manual Transfer CANopen Slave to MSA AUER at the PKV30-COS)
Parameter setting is made by the comPro program enclosed on a floppy disc. (See operation manual Project planning and diagnostic program DOS program.) Truth Table For the status register from address 10001 on, the following truth table (1000110008) is valid for measure point MS 1 (at version 1.02.07 and PKV Firmware 1.101).
Event Measure range exceeded 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
Signal failure 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Calibration
2nd alarm
1st alarm
4th alarm
3rd alarm
Memory address Data value 10001 1st alarm 10002 2nd alarm 10003 3rd alarm 10004 4th alarm 10005 Calibration 10006 Signal failure 10007 Inhibited 10008 Measure range exceeded
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
For measure points MS 256 see above as for measure point MS 1.
SUPREMA
Inhibited 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
9-5
MSA
Setting the CANopen node address: For the gateways, the CANopen node numbers 124 = HEX 7C, switch 1 to C, switch 16 to 7 125 = HEX 7D, switch 1 to D, switch 16 to 7 provided on the PKV 30 (see also Table 7-4). Connection to the SUPREMA:
Figure 9-5: Connection Suprema Gateway CAN/MOD-BUS RTU
The CAN terminating resistor of rack 1 has not been set, therefore at the T-piece of the PKV 30 a terminating resistor is connected. Technical Data:
Supply voltage Plug connector 18 ... 30 V at 24 V, the supply current is: 200 mA max. X 1: COMBICON for supply voltage X 2: 9-pin D-SUB for CANopen Interface X 3: 9-pin D-SUB for RS 232, 485 and 422 Interface LED displays Temperature range Type of protection Weight Mounting Ready and communication, failure of the serial interface SCL 1, Status CANopen. 0 ... 50 C IP 50 500 g Mounting rail DIN EN 50022
Dimensions (L x W x H) 105 x 105 x 80 mm
Table 9-1: Technical Data Suprema Gateway CAN/MOD-Bus RTU
9.3.2 SUPREMA-Gateway CAN/Profibus DP

(Not contained in EC type test approval DMT 03 ATEX G 003 X)
9-6
SUPREMA
MSA
The SUPREMA Gateway Profibus DP can very easily be integrated to the available, SPScontrolled system. The gateway is equipped for rail mounting and supplied with a 24 V dc voltage. For the connection of the CAN interface, a Combicon plug connector is available. The 9-pin plug connector X100 is provided for connection of the Profibus interface. The following 2 manuals for installation, parameterisation and operation are enclosed with the gateway: CAN-CBM-DP PROFIBUS-DP/CAN-Gateway Hardware Manual CAN-CBM-DP PROFIBUS-DP/CAN-Gateway with SUPREMA CANopen Firmware Software Manual
Connection to the SUPREMA:
Figure 9-6: Connection Suprema Gateway CAN/Profibus DP
The CAN terminating resistor of BGT 1 has not been set. At the CAN Bus terminal( from 2 to 4), a 120 Ohm resistor is connected together with the CAN cable. Technical Data:
Supply voltage Nominal voltage: 24 V/DC 10% current consumption (at 20 C): 125 mA max. (+20 mA on TTY operation of the serial interface) Plug connector X100-SIO331 (DSUB9, plug) - serial interface X100-CBMPB (DSUB9, socket) - profibus-DP-interface X101 (6-pin screw connector UEGM) - 24 V supply voltage X400 (Combicon design, 5-pin MSTB2.5/5-5.08) - CAN or DeviceNet Temperature range Humidity Dimensions of the cabinet 0 ... 50 C environmental temperature max. 90%, noncondensing Width: 40 mm, Hight: 85 mm, Depth: 83 mm (including mounting rail and protruding connector DSUB9, without CAN/DeviceNet plug) Approx. 200 g
(W x H x D)
Weight
Table 9-2: Technical Data Suprema Gateway CAN/Profibus DP
SUPREMA
9-7
MSA
9-8
SUPREMA
Redundant Systems
MSA
10. Redundant Systems

10.1 Application/Function Safety
For the safety functions of gas warning measuring instruments, the European standards EN 50 054058, EN 61 779 part 1-5, EN 50 104 and EN 50 271 have been prepared for the monitoring of explosive gas and vapours as well as oxygen. Additionally, if systems are operated together with microcomputers, the standard EN 61 508 must be considered with regard to functional safety in a measuring and control application. This standard divides the application types into Safety Integrity Levels SIL 14. The system must be designed to meet the safety level required. For the EN 61 508 SIL 3 Safety Level, the SUPREMA must be operated with redundancy. Moreover, the system as well as the MRC TS module must not be operated with a redundancy whose failure rate is more than 6.73 * 10-6 1/h. For operation according to SIL 4, additional conditions must be met which are not planned for the SUPREMA for the time being. By retrofitting modules, a non-redundant rack system can be converted to a redundant system. There are sufficient spare slots in the rack for the additional MGO modules but not for additional relay modules, (MTO, MRC). The following module types are needed for retrofitting: MCP Module MDA Module MAR Module MGO Module MRO 8 Module MRO 16 Module Central Processing Data Acquisition Analog Redundant General Output Relay Output (8 Relay) Relay Output (2 x 8 Relay, redundant)
By adding the MCP module, operation of a second CAN bus for data acquisition and alarming as well as the necessary double modules for data acquisition and alarming, the non-redundant system can be converted to a redundant system.
10.2 Function of Redundant Systems

The circuit diagram of the redundant system shows its design and function: The signal from the sensors connected to the MAT modules is amplified by the sensor modules (MCI, MPI) to give a voltage of approx. 400 ... 2000 mV. By 2 separate A/D converters (on MAI + MAR), the measuring signal is digitised and transferred to the two processing channels A and B by passing it through the MDA modules (A + B) to the separate CAN Bus systems (channels). The signal processing and evaluation of one channel is carried out independently from the other. The Table 10-1 Modules of the Rack shows the different components of the rack for a nonredundant and a redundant system.
SUPREMA
10-1
MSA
Redundant Systems
Module Functions MDA Module MCP Module MGO Module MAI Module MAR Module = Measuring Signal Input = Measuring Signal Evaluation = Alarm Output = Analog Input (ADW 1) = Analog Redundant (ADW 2)
Figure 10-1: Circuit Diagram Rack System (redundant)
10.3 Design of the Redundant System

10.3.1 Components of the Rack
In the non-redundant version, the system is consists of only one channel (channel A). By retrofitting modules for channel B, the system can be designed to be redundant in one rack for up to 64 measuring points. Attention: Retrofitting necessary modules for redundant design must only be carried out voltage-free, i.e. the whole SUPREMA system must be switched off. The following new startup must be carried out with consideration of the necessary configuration and parameter setting steps.
10-2
SUPREMA
Redundant Systems
MSA
Note: When retrofitting, the Regulations for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Components must be followed!
Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Name MCP1 MCP 2 MCP 3 MDA 1 MDA 2 SLOT 6/POS 1 SLOT 7/POS 2 SLOT 8/POS 3 SLOT 9/POS 4 SLOT 10/POS 5 SLOT 11/POS 6 SLOT 12/POS 7 SLOT 13/POS 8 SLOT 14/POS 9 MAI MAI MAI MAI MAI MAI MAI MAI MGO MDA MDA MDA MAI + MAR MAI + MAR MAI + MAR MAI + MAR MAI + MAR MAI + MAR MAI + MAR MAI + MAR MGO MGO Non redundant (Channel A) Redundant (Channel B) MCP + MDO MCP + MDO MCP
15 SLOT 15/POS 10
Table 10-1: Modules of the Rack
By adding further racks (8 max. per system) and the appropriate modules, the system can be extended up to 256 measuring points with up to 512 outputs. The MAR modules are plugged into the MAI modules. The MGO modules: configuration is by plug-in jumpers for CAN A or CAN B The same number of MGO modules at CAN A and CAN B Connection of 2 gateways at CAN A and CAN B (MOD bus, Profi bus)
10.3.2 Installation of the MAR Module

This module is used for redundant evaluation of the input signals together with a second, redundant MDA module. It is plugged on the MAI module. The analog output signals of the MPI module or MCI module are digitised in parallel to the MAI module by a 12 bit ADC, and are transferred to the second MDA module via its own SPI Bus. Here, the function is identical to the MAI module. For connecting the MAR module, the MAI module has to be unplugged from the rack which must be voltage-free. For every MAI module, a MAR module is necessary.
SUPREMA
10-3
MSA
Redundant Systems
Figure 10-2: MAI Module with MAR Module
10.3.3 Installation of MCP and MDA Module

The second MCP module must be plugged into rack position Slot 2, and the second MDA module into rack position Slot 5. Before plugging the modules, the SUPREMA system must be voltage-free. These modules are normally operated as CAN B, a hardware configuration is not necessary.
10.3.4 Output Drivers/Relay Outputs

The MGO modules provide switching outputs (24V DC / 300 mA, short-circuit safe and overload safe) for control of information and alarms (LEDs, relays, solenoid valves etc.). In redundant systems, both channels must have the same number of MGO modules connected. If relays are needed instead of the driver outputs, because a separation of potentials is required or other voltages have to be switched, the relay modules MRO 8 TS or MRO 16 TS may be used. Both modules are suitable for G or Top Hat type DIN rail mounting and provide 8 relay outputs per module in a compact design. The MRO 8 TS module has 1 changeover contact per relay. Connection to the relay contacts is via screw terminals. The use of MRO 16 TS modules permits the redundant lay out of the following wiring and control of actuating and notice elements. At use of MRO 8 TS modules only the non-redundant control of actuating and notice elements is possible. Attention: The layout of the circuit connected to the MRO 8 TS resp. MRO 16 TS modules depends on the requirements of the respective application. It is completely up to the users responsibility to observe the valid standards and guidelines.
Note: The MRO 16 TS modules do not have changeover contacts. The working contacts of the redundant relays are connected in series. (1 or 2 contacts open = alarm). Two terminal blocks with screw terminals are used to connect to the relay contacts.
10-4
SUPREMA
Redundant Systems
MSA
10.3.5 Installation MGO Module

Before plugging in modules, the SUPREMA system must be voltage-free. The module must be configured via jumper plugs for the CAN B bus. CAN-A CAN-B BR11 + BR13 = CLOSED BR11 + BR13 = OPEN & & BR12 + BR14 = OPEN BR12 + BR14 = CLOSED
10.3.6 Connection MRO 8 TS Module

On redundant systems, the outputs of 2 MGO modules must always be connected (channel A + B). The 40 driver outputs of the MGO modules are connected to the MRC TS modules of Plug A using a 40-way ribbon cable via MUT modules at the rear of the rack. Plug B is only used if MRO 16 TS modules are connected. Using a 20-way ribbon cable each of the plugs 15 are connected to the 8 driver outputs of the MGO module to up to 5 MRO 8 TS modules.
Figure 10-3: Connection MRO 8 TS Redundant Module
The terminal connections and the relay assignment of the MRO 8 TS module are described in detail in section 5.7.2 Additional Relay Outputs. If not needed for ATEX or SIL-3 relevant purposes (e.g. indicator tablet) are only 1 set of output relays or drivers (usually only of CAN A), then a MSO module can be attached to the not occupied exit (usually CAN B) directly without use of a MUT module to the MIB. The MSO module has LED displays for the relay condition. Note: In case of failure of the bus system A the external exit is frozen to the last value.
SUPREMA
10-5
MSA
Redundant Systems
10.3.7 Connection MRO 16 TS Module

If the system is redundant, the outputs of 2 MGO modules must always be evaluated (channel A + B). The connection of up to 5 MRO 16 TS modules (40 outputs) is achieved via 1 MRC TS module. Using 20-way ribbon cables, each of the plugs, 15, are connected via the 8 driver outputs (channel A + B) of the MGO modules to up to 5 MRO 16 TS modules. The 40 driver outputs of the MGO module of channel A are connected to the MRC TS modules at Plug A using a 40-way ribbon cable via the appropriate MUT module at the rear of the rack. The 40 driver outputs of the MGO module of channel B are connected to the MRC TS modules at Plug B using a 40-way ribbon cable via the appropriate MUT module at the rear of the rack.
Figure 10-4: Connection MRO 16 TS Module

Connection Terminals Relays Function at Position 1, (first relay block) 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16 1, 9 2, 10 3, 11 4, 12 5, 13 6, 14 7, 15 8, 16 1st Alarm 2nd Alarm 3rd Alarm 4th Alarm Failure measuring value Horn Inhibit Failure Power
Table 10-2: Terminal Connections MRO 16 TS Module
Relays specified are connected in series to effect hardware redundancy. The relays 18 are selected by CAN A (MCP A), the relays 916 by CAN B (MCP B).
10-6
SUPREMA
Redundant Systems
MSA
Figure 10-5: MRO 16 TS Module
10.3.8 MAO Module

The MAO module is not made with redundancy, therefore retrofitting of MAO modules is not necessary. As standard, it is supplied configured via solder jumpers for the CAN A.
10.3.9 logic extension MLE10 (with SIL-3 Approvals)

This module can be inserted into redundant systems to implement special logic functions, switching delays, etc. for the 40 switching outputs of a MGO module. Logic extension MLE10 is connected between MGO and MRC / MGT. It is connected with the 40-pole ribbon cable. This module is checked for safety-related applications up to and including SIL3. For detailed information with regard to the use, operation and Technical Data, see the operating and maintenance instructions for logic extension MLE10, material number 10056386.
SUPREMA
10-7
MSA
Redundant Systems
10.4 Startup
The data stored in every MCP and MDO module contains information on system configuration, i.e. the modules used, supply voltages, measuring points and alarm outputs. Also included is the measuring point parameters (sensor type, calibration etc.) and switching output parameters (switching direction etc.) stored in additional maps in every MCP and MDO module. If the configuration listing does not correspond to the system status, SYSTEM FAILURE will be issued after startup. After connecting the modules, the configuration stored in the SUPREMA memory has to be updated according to the system status. For detailed information, see section 6.2 System configuration and 7.11 Instructions for system configuration
10.4.1 Configuration Tool

All parameters and configuration has to do with the PC operating program called Servicepack. Version and Article Number see chapter 15.2.2 and table 17-1.
10.4.2 Function Check

After configuration and parameter setting of the system, a functional check must be carried out: Start of System By switching OFF/ON the system, a new startup is effected. During startup, several internal system checks are carried out. A system which is working failure-free will show the following settings after startup: Front Panel Display
1.LED SYSTEM POWER 2. LED SYSTEM FAIL 3. LED SYSTEM INHIBIT 4. LED SIGNAL 1 AL 5. LED SIGNAL 2 AL 6. LED SIGNAL 3 AL 7. LED SIGNAL 4 AL 8. LED SIGNAL FAIL 9. LCD Display ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Display Listing
10-8
SUPREMA
Redundant Systems
MSA
Displays of the Modules All CAN-BUS modules have the following LED displays:
LED Function Required OFF ON* OFF OFF
LED 1 GN EXT = ON LED 2 GN INT = ON LED 3 GN BAT = ON LED 4 RT CAN-BUS Failure
LED 5 GN CAN-BUS in Operation ON
*= Rack operation via INT terminals Displays of the MAI Modules

LED LED 1-8 LED EXT LED INT LED BAT LED IBR LED ZER LED SIG Function MS 1-8 = ON EXT = ON INT = ON BAT = ON Required OFF OFF ON* OFF
IBR ON SOCKETS OFF UY ON SOCKETS OFF UA ON SOCKETS OFF FLASHING
LED of connector strip Signal Request
*= Rack operation via INT terminals Check of the Signal Processing/Alarming After a successful startup and setting of the system parameters, a functional check must be carried out: By application of test gas, alarms should to be initiated. Test of the switching output functions according to the relay configuration.
SUPREMA
10-9
MSA
Redundant Systems
10-10
SUPREMA
Technical Data
MSA
11. Technical Data

11.1 System Data
Racks per system: Number of inputs - per system: - per rack; Switching outputs/relay outputs: Analog outputs 0 - 20 mA: Operation and Display: 18 1256 up to 64 0512 0256 240 x 64 pixel graphics display cursor keyboard function keys 3 x RS232: - PC operation - printer - free 2 x CAN-Bus 19.2 V ... 32 VDC 3 x 24 VDC 85 ... 265 VAC 24 VDC 6.5 A
Interfaces:
System operating voltage: System power supply (3x redundancy): Rack power supply,150 W: - output voltage, rack power supply: - output current, rack power supply: System power supply limits to be observed:
- maximum allowable operating current feed (+24 V): 20 A - maximum rack load current of all MAI modules (+24 V): 10 A - maximum rack load current of all MGO modules (GND): 12 A Connectable sensors: - active - active - active - passive - passive - passive 4 ... 20 mA, 2-wire 4 ... 20 mA, 3-wire 4 ... 20 mA, 4-wire 3-wire 5-wire 4-wire (semiconductor sensors)
Housing:
19 rack, 3HE
Storage temperature for all parts of the system: -25 C ... +55 C
SUPREMA
11-1
MSA
Technical Data
11.2 Module Data

11.2.1 MCP Module: Central Processing Unit
Order No.: 10087413 Function - Monitoring and control of all system functions, signal evaluation for up to 256 sampling points - actuation of up to 512 relay driver outputs - parameter storage Technical Data Operating voltage feed (3 x 24 VDC): Operating current: Temperature range: Humidity: Plug connector: (pre-mating contacts for power supply) Dimensions: Weight: 14 ... 32 VDC 75 mA 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 96-channel VG terminal strip 100 x 160 mm 120 g
11.2.2 MDA Module: Data Acquisition Unit

Order No.: 10080011 Function - reads in the measurement values from the MAI module, processes the measurement signals, calculates mean values - monitors 2 x power supply voltages, 1 x battery voltage Technical Data Operating voltage feed (3 x 24 VDC): Operating current: Temperature range: Humidity: Plug connector: (pre-mating contacts for power supply) Dimensions: Weight: 14 ... 32 VDC 40 mA 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 96-channel VG terminal strip 100 x 160 mm 87 g
11.2.3 MDO Module: Display + Operation Unit

Order No.: 10087412 Function - 240 x 64 pixel backlit graphics display - system operation via cursor field - individual function keys for horn acknowledgement and alarm reset - plain-text messages for alarms and errors at the sampling points - graphic display of alarm and error states (LED field)
11-2
SUPREMA
Technical Data
MSA
- bar graphs of measurement values - display of system status (common LEDs for alarms, errors) - system clock (RTC), optional connection to a wireless clock - 2 x RS 232 (RS 485 optional), electrically isolated (laptop/printer interface) Technical Data Operating voltage feed (3 x 24 VDC): Operating current: without backlighting: with backlighting: Temperature range: Humidity: Plug connector: Dimensions: Weight: 14 ... 32 VDC 100 mA 200 mA 5 C ... 55 C 0 ...90 % relative humidity noncondensing 40-channel ribbon cable 107.5 x 211 mm 365 g
11.2.4 MGO Module: General Output Unit

Order No.: 10083804 Function 40 driver outputs for relays + LEDs (24 VDC/0.3 A) Technical Data Operating voltage feed (3 x 24 VDC): Operating current logic: Total load current, switching outputs: Nominal switching voltage: Nominal switching current: Maximum driver IC limit data (8 outputs per driver) - output current: (all outputs ON, per output) - output current: (1 output ON) - total current of all outputs of one driver IC: Temperature range: Humidity: Plug connector: (pre-mating contacts for power supply) Dimensions: Weight: 14 ...32 V 40 mA 12 A 24 VDC 0.3 A
500 mA 1A
4A 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 96-channel VG terminal strip 100 x 160 mm 100 g
11.2.5 MHD TS Module: Modular High Driver

Order No.: 10038420 The MHD uses 10 IC drivers for driving 40 capacitive or inductive outputs (output 14, 58, 912 etc.). The drivers are over-temperature- and over-voltage-safe. The maximum power loss per driver is limited, the more outputs are active the less must be the current per output.
SUPREMA
11-3
MSA
Technical Data
Technical Data Relay driver supply INT, EXT, BAT : maximum input current(24V terminals): No-signal current consumption (all outputs off): Output current: Maximum current 1 output: Maximum current 1 driver: Maximum current all drivers: Temperature range: Humidity: 19 ... 32 VDC 12 A 95 mA at 24 V 300 mA/output typical 1A 2 A (4 x 500 mA) 12 A (40 x 300 mA) 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 150 x 90 x 60 mm approx. 165 g
Dimensions: Weight:
11.2.6 MAI Module: Analog Input Unit

Order No.: 10021051 Function - module for holding the sensor modules (MCI, MPI, MFI, MSI) - 12-bit ADC, 11 channels, measures signal voltage + output voltage (24 V) - terminals on the MAT module (24 V, GND, signal) - 3 status LEDs - sensor monitoring (measurement signal (PLH/PLT), sensor current, remote measurement cable) - data transmission to the MDA module via SPI bus Technical Data Operating voltage feed (3 x 24 VDC): Internal power draw: Allowable total power draw: (with 8 sensor modules) Temperature range: Humidity: 18.5 ... 32 VDC typically 50 mA 3 A, maximum
5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 96-channel VG terminal strip 100 x 160 mm 95 g
Plug connector: (pre-mating contacts for power supply) Dimensions: Weight:
11.2.7 MPI WT100 Module: Passiv Input Unit

Order No.: 10021028 Function - power source for passive sensors (24 VDC) - supply module for WT sensors - sensor current, 100-400 mA - prepares the Ux bridge signal
11-4
SUPREMA
Technical Data
MSA
Technical Data Operating voltage feed: Operating current: Maximum load: (at operating voltage of 19.2 V and sensor current of 400 mA) Setting range, constant current: Setting range, zero point: Setting range, sensitivity: Temperature range: Humidity: 19.2 ... 32 V 460 mA, maximum 36 ohms
180 ... 400 mA 130 mV (Ux) 4 ... 190 mV (Ux) 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90% relative humidity noncondensing 46 x 24 mm 12 g
Dimensions: Weight:
11.2.8 MPI WT10 Module: Passiv Input Unit

Order No.: 10024279 Function - power source for passive sensors (24 VDC) - supply module for WT sensors - sensor current, 100 ... 400 mA (depending on components installed) - prepares the Ux bridge signal Technical Data Operating voltage feed: Operating current: Maximum load: (at operating voltage of 19.2 V and sensor current of 400 mA) Setting range, constant current: Setting range, zero point: Setting range, sensitivity: Temperature range: Humidity: Dimensions: Weight: 19.2 ...32 V 460 mA, maximum 28 ohms
180 ... 400 mA 50 mV (Ux) 5 ...27 mV (Ux) 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 46 x 24 mm 12 g
11.2.9 MPI HL8101 Module: Passiv Input Unit

Order No.: 10024276 Function - power source for passive sensors (24 VDC) - supply module for HL sensors - sensor current, 100 ...400 mA - prepares the Ux bridge signal
SUPREMA
11-5
MSA
Technical Data
Technical Data Operating voltage feed: Operating current: Maximum load: (at operating voltage of 19.2 V and sensor current of 210 mA) Setting range, constant current: Setting range, zero point: Setting range, sensitivity: Temperature range: Humidity: 19.2 ... 32 V 240 mA, maximum 36 ohms
100 ... 230 mA 820 ohms 50 ohms (semiconductor resistor) 24 ... 1100 mV 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 46 x 24 mm 12 g
Dimensions: Weight:
11.2.10 MPI HL8113 Module: Passiv Input Unit

Order No.: 10024280 Function - power source for passive sensors (24 VDC) - supply module for HL sensors - sensor current, 100 ... 400 mA - prepares the Ux bridge signal Technical Data Operating voltage feed: Operating current: Maximum load: (at operating voltage of 19.2 V and sensor current of 210 mA) Setting range, constant current: Setting range, zero point: Setting range, sensitivity: Temperature range: Humidity: 19.2 ... 32 V 240 mA, maximum 36 ohms
100 ... 230 mA 10 Kohms 1 K 24 ... 1100 mV 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 46 x 24 mm 12 g
Dimensions: Weight:
11.2.11 MCI/MCI BFE Module: Current Input Unit

Order No. MCI BFE: 10044020 Function - current/voltage source for active 4 ... 20 mA sensors (24 VDC) - maximum current load for sensor supply 400 mA - current limitation for sensor power supply (0.7 ... 2 A) - voltage output short circuit-resistant
11-6
SUPREMA
Technical Data
MSA
- current limitation for 4 ... 20 mA signal input (30 mA) - multiplier resistor, 100 ohms (4 ... 20 mA = 0.4 ... 2.00 V) - signal input options MCI: 4 ... 20 mA Technical Data Operating voltage feed: Operating current: Current input (current limitation): Contact input: 0 ... 100 mV signal voltage input: 0 ... 24 V input: Temperature range: Humidity: 18.5 ... 32 V 1 mA 0 ... 30 mA 0 ... 27.5 V 0 ... 112 mV 0 ... 27.5 V 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 46 x 24 mm 7g
Dimensions: Weight:
11.2.12 MRO 8 Module: Relais Output Unit

Order No.: 10018946 Function - relay module, installed on rear of rack - 8 relays for common alarms, 1st-4th alarms, error, horn, inhibit, power - actuated by the MGO module - relays locked via the MST module (LOCR) - switching status display (green LED, made = ON) Technical Data Relay operating voltage: Relay operating current: Contact type: Contact load capacity: Temperature range: Humidity: 24 VDC 7 mA change-over contact see relay contact data 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 125 x 69 mm 142 g
Dimensions: Weight:
11.2.13 MRC TS Module: Relais Connector

Order No.: 10021676 Function - connection module for 5 MRO 8 TS/MRO 16 TS modules on MUT module - divides 2 x 40-channel FRC ribbon cables over 5 x 20-channel MRO ribbon cables - connections for EXT, INT, and BAT relay power supplies - connection for relay locking
SUPREMA
11-7
MSA
Technical Data
Technical Data Relay operating voltage: (INT, EXT, BAT) Relay operating current: Relay operating current 5 x MRO 8 TS: Relay operating current 5 x MRO16 TS: Temperature range: Humidity: 19 ... 32 VDC 7 mA 280 mA 560 mA 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 90 x 153 x 65 mm 180 g
Dimensions: Weight:
11.2.14 MRO 8 TS Module: Relais Output Unit (Rail-Mount Installation)

Order No.: 10021674 Function - relay module, installed on mounting rail - actuated by the MGO module - relays locked via the MRC TS module (LOCK) - switching status display (green LED, made = ON) Technical Data Relay operating voltage: Relay operating current: Contact type: Contact load capacity: Temperature range: Humidity: 19 ... 32 VDC 7 mA change-over contact see relay contact data 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 90 x 71 x 68 mm 160 g
Dimensions: Weight:
11.2.15 MRO 16 TS Module: Redundant Relais Output Unit (Rail-Mount Installation)

Order No.: 10021430 Function - relay module, installed on mounting rail - actuated by 2 MGO modules - relays locked via the MRC module (LOCK) - switching status display (green LED, made = ON) - series connection of 2 contacts - connection across 2 terminals - contacts closed = status good
11-8
SUPREMA
Technical Data
MSA
Technical Data Relay operating voltage: Relay operating current: Contact type: Contact load capacity: Temperature range: Humidity: 19 ... 32 VDC 7 mA normally open see relay contact data 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 90 x 103 x 65 mm 201 g
Dimensions: Weight:
11.2.16 Relay Contact Data

Maximum switching voltage: Nominal current: Maximum switching power: - AC voltage: - DC voltage (from load limit curve) 400 VAC 300 VDC 3A
1500 VA 24 VDC/3 A 50 VDC/0.3 A 100 VDC/0.1 A
11.2.17 MAO Module: Analog Output Unit

Order No.: 10021050 Function - 4 ... 20 mA output driver, measurement signal outputs - optionally with electrically isolated outputs - data transmission via the CAN bus Technical Data Operating voltage feed: Operating current: Temperature range: Humidity: 19.2 ... 32 V 150 mA (maximum) 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 500 ohms 0 ... 24 mA 100 x 160 mm 127 g
Maximum load: Output current 4 ... 20 mA: Dimensions: Weight:
SUPREMA
11-9
MSA
Technical Data
11.2.18 MIB Module: Interconnection Board

Order No.: 10032525 Function - rack rear-panel wiring for 3 x MCP, 2 x MDA, 8 x MAI, 2 x MGO modules - power supply for all modules (INT, EXT, BAT) - connection for 3 x 24 VDC feed, screw terminals - provides uninterruptible 24-V-system power - data transfer between the modules over a CAN or SPI bus - 2 system error relay, 1 change-over contact, 3 connecting terminals - DIL switch for CAN rack ID, CAN bit rate, CAN bus terminating resistor - 7 dedicated slots for 3 x MCP, 2 x MDA, and 2 x MGO modules - 7 free slots for MAI, MGO, MAO modules - electric connection for the inserted modules - connection modules (MST, MUT etc.) are plugged into the rear of the MIB Technical Data Operating voltage feed: Maximum allowable operating current: feed (+24 v) (GND): Feed connector cross section: Power supply terminals: Setting elements: (rack no., CAN bit rate) Contact load capacity, system error relay Temperature range: Humidity: 19.2 ... 32 V 20 A 32 A 4 mm2 , flexible 6 mm2 , rigid EXT, INT, BAT 10-channel DIL switch
3A 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 377 x 128 mm 650 g
Dimensions: Weight:
11.2.19 MAT Module: Analog Terminal Unit

Order No.: 10015759 Function - connecting terminals for remote measuring heads Technical Data Number of measuring head connections: Number of terminals per sampling point: Allowable wire cross section 8 5 1,5 mm2
11-10
SUPREMA
Technical Data
MSA
Temperature range: Humidity:
5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 125 x 50 mm 155 g
Dimensions: Weight:
11.2.20 MSP Module: System Power Unit

Order No.: 10020340 Function - rack power supply, 150 VA Technical Data Operating voltage, feed: Maximum operating current: Maximum switch on current: Power correction factor: Interference emissions: Output voltage: Maximum output current: Temperature range: Humidity: 85 ... 265 VAC 2 A(100 VAC Input); 1 A(200 VAC Input) 50 A at 230 V (cold start) according to EN 61000-3-2 according to EN 55011/EN 55022-B 24 VDC 6.5 A 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 65 x 92 x 198 mm 850 g
Dimensions: Weight:
11.2.21 MST Module: System Terminals

Order No.: 10020133 Function - connection module for system expansions - installation at rear of rack - connection ports: CAN A, CAN B, RS 232 (IPC), RS 232 (printer) - alarm reset, horn reset Technical Data Allowable wire cross section: Temperature range: Humidity: 1.5 mm2 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 125 x 76 mm 102 g
Dimensions: Weight:
SUPREMA
11-11
MSA
Technical Data
11.2.22 MFI Module: Fire Input Unit

Order No.: 10046265 Function - Power supply for up to 20 fire detectors - Evaluate status of the switches - Conductor control - Connection of zener barrier or current separator optional - Operation with an external power supply is optional. - Earth current fault monitor - Output for earth current fault Technical Data Internal supply voltage: External supply voltage: External battery reverse polarity protection: Operating current: Output voltage: Output current: Temperature range: Humidity: Dimensions: Weight: 19.2 ... 32 V 23 ... 32 V Yes max. 47 mA max. 22 V max. 42 mA 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 46 x 24 mm 10 g
11.2.23 MSI Module: Switch Input Unit

Order No.: 10048285 Function - Power supply for external switches - Evaluate status of the switches - The operation with an external power supply is optional. Technical Data Internal supply voltage: External supply voltage: External battery reverse polarity protection: Operating current: Output voltage: Output current: Temperature range: Humidity: Dimensions: Weight: 19.2 ... 32 V 19.2 ... 32 V Yes max. 30 mA max. 15 V max. 8 mA 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 46 x 24 mm 8g
11-12
SUPREMA
Technical Data
MSA
11.2.24 MAT TS 320 Module: Flammable/Toxic Adapter

Order No. Flammable: 10049234 Order No. Toxic: 10049235 Function - Terminal connectors for gas detectors Technical Data No. of measure gas detectors: No. of terminals per gas detector: Maximum wire cross section: Temperature range: Humidity: Dimensions: Weight: 8 Flammable: 3 Toxic: 2 2,5 mm2 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 155 x 90 x 60 mm 200g
11.2.25 MAT TS 330 Module: Fire Input (Qatar Version)

Order No.: 10049236 Function - Terminals for fire detectors, push-button switches, smoke detectors Technical Data Number of fire detectors: Number of terminals per fire detector: Reset input: Maximum wire cross section: Supply voltage INT EXT BAT: Maximum power consumption: Outputs: Earth fault : Voltage control: Temperature range: Humidity: Changeover Relay contact Changeover Relay contact (24DC electrically separated) 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 155 x 90 x 60 mm 260 g 8 2 Connection: 10-way ribbon cable Connection for a normally open contact 10 mA maximum 2.5 mm2 19 ... 32 VDC 1A
Dimensions: Weight:
SUPREMA
11-13
MSA
Technical Data
11.2.26 MRD Module: Dummy Relay

Order No.: 10052880 Function A Dummy Relay Module simulates the load provided by a Relay Output Module (MRO). A system fail will be triggered if each Relay Connection Module (MRC) output connector (X3 to X7) is not connected to either an MRO or a MRD. Operating temperature range: Storage temperature range: Operating voltage: Humidity: Dimensions: Weight: -20 C ... 55 C -20 C ... 50 C 18 ... 32 VDC 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing approx. 29 x 30 x 8 mm approx. 5 g
11.2.27 MAR Module: Analog Redundant

Order No.: 10022152 Function This module is used for the redundant processing of input signals. The measurement values are digitised in parallel with the MAI module by a 12-bit ADC and transferred to the second MDA (B). The function here is identical to that of the MAI module. The supply and input signal take-over are provided by the MAI. In redundant systems, a MAR module is required for every MAI module. Temperature range: Humidity: Dimensions: Weight: 5 C ... 55 C 0 ... 90 % relative humidity noncondensing 95 x 24 mm 15 g
11-14
SUPREMA
MSA
12. SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheets

The individual sensor connections are illustrated below. In addition, passive sensors are monitored by SUPREMA for open or short circuits and these failures are reported as shown. For active sensors, the input current signal is monitored, so that each failure is detected and reported by the SUPREMA system. There are also lists containing details of the operating current, power requirement of the sensors, the maximum allowable cable lengths (maximum allowable cable resistance) and the screening. For further information on the sensors, please see the Operating and Maintenance Instructions for the individual sensor types. Attention! For passive sensors, a 3-wire operation is conform to the requirements according EN 61779-1 to output resistance up to 1.7 Ohm per lead resp. up to 3.4 Ohm loop resistance. If the loop resistance exceed 3.4 Ohm the 5-wire Operation mode is recommended generally.
Attention! Only at use of the MCI module with part no. 10043997 and 10044020 meets the requirements according to EN 61779-1 for active sensors at 3-wire operation.
SUPREMA
12-1
MSA
12.1 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7010 (3-wire)

Order No.: D0791601
The cable screen is only connected to the SUPREMA. The sensor cable must be installed interruption-free (no terminal boxes, terminal distribution etc.). The bridges -X1/1 -X1/2 and -X1/4 -X1/5 may alternatively be set as solder jumpers on the MAT and MAT TS module.
Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Attention! WT 100 = catalytic combustion (Order No.: 10030263) Before connecting measuring head, reduce sensor current to minimum! MPI/WT 10/passive/3-wire/Constand current/Presetting required
Connection data:
Bridge current Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet
270 mA/300 mA only for methane 330 mA 6.2 V 1.8 W (without cable length) 3-core, 80 % screened 28 ohms 850 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7 ... 14 mm, with connection Pg 21 up to17 mm 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 PG 13.5 (can be extended to Pg 21) Wall mounting IP 54/EN 60529 II 2G EEx d e IIC T5/T6 DMT 98 ATEX E 016 X -20 C to +40 C (T6) / -20 C to +55 C (T5) 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
Conditions for use:
Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate Temperature Humidity
12-2
SUPREMA
MSA
Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H Housing material
950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.24 kg 150 mm x 88 mm x 158 mm Aluminium Die cast (polyester-coated)
For further details see operation manual. (Order No.:D0791150)
Startup: Presetting:
Presetting required > before first calibration Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module. Bridge current setting > 270 mA or 300 mA (for CH4) Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 ... 450 mV Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas > Measuring range level Ua = 1950 ... 2100 mV or by means of the value of the existing gas concentration according to: Ua (mV) = C / 100 * 1600 + 400 C = Span gas concentration in % of measuring range
Warm-up period: Function test:
120 s according to EN 50054, 15 min minutes for presetting, 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: Integrated span gas inlet piece with 0,5 l/min, (for standard test gases) or test cap with 1,0 l/ min, (Order No.: D6079762) or splashwater-proof housing SG 70 with 1 l/min or pump adapter PA 70 with 1.0 l/ min
Calibration:
Calibration procedure according to SUPREMA operation manual For measuring components allowed, measuring ranges, lower alarm levels and conditions for calibration see list of components (Order No.: D0792420) Possible other measuring components and measuring ranges on request.
Open or Short Circuit Fault Indication: X = Signal failure (FAIL-LED) XX = Alarm LEDs, Signal exceeded, Signal failure (FAIL-LED) XXX = only alarms XXXX = no change of indication
Open-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Open-circuit at max. cable length Failure indication Wire -X1/2 X Wire -X1/2 X Wire -X1/3 X Wire -X1/3 X Wire -X1/4 X Wire -X1/4 X Bridge -X1/1 /-X1/2 XX Bridge -X1/4 /-X1/5 X Disconnect plug of MAT (TS) X
Short-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Short-circuit at max. cable length Failure indication At conductor resistance 0 ... 1.7 Ohm per lead
Wire -X1/2/-X1/3 XX Wire -X1/2/-X1/3 XX XX
Wire -X1/2/-x1/4 X
Wire -X1/3/-X1/4 X
Wire Wire -X1/2/-X1/4 -X1/3/-X1/4 XXXX X X X
SUPREMA
12-3
MSA

Order No.: D0791601
The cable screen is only connected to the SUPREMA.

Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Attention! WT 100 = catalytic combustion (Order No.: 10030263) Before connecting measuring head, reduce sensor current to minimum! MPI/WT 10/passive/5-wire/Constant current /Presetting required
Connection data:
270 mA/300 mA only for methane 330 mA 6.2 V 1.8 W (without cable length) 5-core, 80 % screened 28 ohms 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7...14 mm, alternatively with PG 21 up to 17 mm 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 PG 13.5 (can be extended to Pg 21)
Conditions for use:
Wall mounting IP 54/EN 60 529 II 2G EEx d e IIC T5/T6 DMT 98 ATEX E 016 X -20 C to +40 C (T6) / -20 C to +55 C (T5) 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
12-4
SUPREMA
MSA
Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H Housing material Startup: Presetting:
950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.24 kg 150 mm x 88 mm x 158 mm Aluminum Die cast (polyester-coated)
Presetting required > before first calibration and when changing sensor Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module. Bridge current setting > 270 mA or 300 mA (for CH4) Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 ... 450 mV Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas -> Measuring range level at Ua = 1900 ... 2100 mV or by means of the value of the existing gas concentration according to: Ua (mV) = C (Span gas concentration in % of measuring range)/100 * 1600 + 400 120 s according to EN 50054, 15 minutes for presetting, 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: Integrated span gas inlet piece with 0.5 l/min, (for standard test gases) or test cap with 1.0 l/ min, (Order No.: D6079762) or splashwater-proof housing SG 70 with 1l/min or pump adapter PA 70 with 1.0 l/ min
Calibration:
Open or Short Circuit Fault Indication: X = Signal failure (FAIL -LED) XX = Alarm LEDs, Signal exceeded, Signal failure (FAIL-LED) XXX = only alarms XXXX = no status indication (signal change)
Open-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Wire -X1/1 XX Wire -X1/2 X Wire -X1/3 X Wire -X1/4 X Wire -X1/5 X Disconnect plug of MAT (TS) X
Open-circuit at max. cable length Failure indication
Wire -X1/1 XX
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/5 X
Disconnect plug of MAT (TS) X
Shor-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Shor-circuit at max. cable length Failure indication
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/2 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/2 XXXX
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/3 XX Wire -X1/1/ -X1/3 XX
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/4/ -X1/5 XX Wire -X1/4/ -X1/5 XXXX
SUPREMA
12-5
MSA

Order No.: D0791610
The cable screen is only connected to the SUPREMA. The sensor cable must be installed interruption-free (no terminal boxes, terminal distribution etc.). The bridges -X1/1 -X1/2 and X1/4 -X1/5 can also be set as solder bridges on the MAT and MAT TS module.
Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Attention!
MPI/WT 10/passive/3-wire/Constant current/Presetting required
WT 100 (Order No.: 10030264) Before connecting measuring head, reduce sensor current to minimum!
Connection data:
270 mA/300 mA only for methane 330 mA 2.8 V 1.0 W (without cable length) 3-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms 1200 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7...14 mm, with connection Pg 21 up to 17 mm 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 PG 13.5 (can be extended to Pg 21) Wall mounting IP 54/EN 60529 II 2G EEx d e IIC T5/T6 DMT 98 ATEX E 016 X -20 C to +40 C (T6) / -20 C to +55 C (T5) 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
Conditions for use:
12-6
SUPREMA
MSA
950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.24 kg 150 mm x 88 mm x 158 mm Aluminum Die cast (polyester-coated)
Presetting required > before first calibration and when changing sensor Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module. Bridge current setting > 270 mA or 300 mA (for CH4) Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 ... 450 mV Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas > Measuring range level at Ua = 1900 ... 2100 mV or by means of the value of the existing gas concentration according to: Ua (mV) = C (Span gas concentration in % of measuring range) / 100 * 1600 + 400 120 s according to EN 50054, 15 minutes for presetting, 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: Integrated span gas inlet piece with 0.5 l/min, (standard test gases) or test cap with 1.0 l/min, (Order No.: D6079762) or splashwater-proof housing SG 70 with 1 l/min or pump adapter PA 70 with 1.0 l/min
Calibration:
Open-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Open-circuit at max. cable length Failure indication Short-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Short-circuit at max. cable length Failure indication At conductor resistance 0 ... 1.7 Ohm per lead Wire -X1/2 X Wire -X1/2 X Wire -X1/2 /-X1/3 XX Wire -X1/2/-X1/3 XX XX Wire -X1/3 X Wire -X1/3 X Wire -X1/4 X Wire -X1/4 X Bridge -X1/1 /-X1/2 XX Bridge -X1/4 /-X1/5 X Disconnect plug of MAT (TS) X
Wire Wire -X1/2 /-X1/4 -X1/3/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-7
MSA

Order No.: D0791610

Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Attention! WT 100 (Order No.: 10030264) Before connecting measuring head, reduce sensor current to minimum! MPI/WT 10/passive/5-wire/Constant current/Presetting required
Connection data:
270 mA/300 mA only for methane 330 mA 2.8 V 1.0 W (without cable length) 5-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms 1500 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7...14 mm, with connection Pg 21 up to 17 mm 0.75 ... 1,5 mm2 Standard PG 13.5 (can be extended to Pg 21) Wall mounting IP 54 II 2G EEx d e IIC T5/T6 DMT 98 ATEX E 016 X -20 C to +40 C (T6) / -20 C to +55 C (T5) 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
Conditions for use:
12-8
SUPREMA
MSA
950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.24 kg 150 mm x 88 mm x 158 mm Aluminium Die cast (polyester-coated)
Presetting required > before first calibration and when changing sensor Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module. Bridge current setting > 270 mA and 300 mA (for CH4) Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 ... 450 mV Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas > Measuring range level at Ua = 1900 ... 2100 mV or by means of the value of the existing gas concentration according to: Ua (mV) = C (Span gas concentration in % of measuring range) / 100 * 1600 + 400 60 s according to EN 50054, 15 minutes for presetting, 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: Integrated span gas inlet piece with 0.5 l/min (for standard test gases) or test cap with 1.0 l/min (Order No.: D6079762) or splashwater-proof housing SG 70 with 1 l/min or pump adapter PA 70 with 1.0 l/min
Calibration:
Calibration procedure according to SUPREMA operation manual For measuring components allowed, measuring ranges, lower alarm levels and for calibration conditions see list of components (Order No.: D0792420) Possible other measuring components and measuring ranges on request.
Open or Short Circuit Fault Indication: X = Signal failure (FAIL-LED) XX = Alarm LEDs, Signal exceeded, Signal failure (FAIL-LED) XXX = only alarms XXXX = no status indication (signal change)
Open-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Open-circuit at max. cable length Failure indication Short-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Short-circuit at max. cable length Failure indication Wire -X1/1 XX Wire -X1/1 XX Wire -X1/1/ -X1/2 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/2 XXXX Wire -X1/2 X Wire -X1/2 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/3 XX Wire -X1/1/ -X1/3 XX Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/3 X Wire -X1/3 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/3 XX Wire -X1/2/ -X1/3 XX Wire -X1/4 X Wire -X1/4 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/5 X Wire -X1/5 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X Disconnect plug of MAT (TS) X Disconnect plug of MAT (TS) X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/4/ -X1/5 XX Wire -X1/4/ -X1/5 XXXX
SUPREMA
12-9
MSA
12.5 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7400

Order No.: D0714702
The cable screen is only connected to the SUPREMA. Remove 2 x 120 ohms! (located in sensor 7400) Alternatively, the bridges -X1/1 -X1/2 and -X1/4 -X1/5 can be set as solder bridges on the MAT and MAT TS module.
Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Attention! Connection data: WT 100 (Order No.: 10030263) Before connecting measuring head, reduce sensor current to minimum! Bridge current Maximum power consumption Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H 310 mA for all measuring components 350 mA 1 W (without cable length) 3-core, 80 % screened 8 ohms loop resistance 300 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 12 mm 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 PG 13.5 Wall mounting IP 54 (Housing) EN 60529 none 0 C up to +40 C 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 0.26 kg 94 mm x 58 mm x 135 mm MPI/WT 10/passive/3-wire/Constant current/Presetting required
12-10
SUPREMA
MSA
Presetting required > before first calibration and when changing sensor Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module. Bridge current setting > 270 mA resp. 300 mA (for CH4) Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 ... 450 mV Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas > Measuring range level at Ua = 1950 ... 2100 mV or by means of the value of the existing gas concentration according to: Ua (mV) = C (Span gas concentration in % of measuring range) / 100 * 1600 + 400 60 s according to EN 50054, 15 minutes for presetting, 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: Test cap (Calibration Adapter Assembly) 0.25 l/min Calibration procedure according to SUPREMA operation manual For measuring components allowed, measuring ranges, lower alarm levels and conditions for calibration see list of components. Possible other measuring components and measuring ranges on request.
Warm-up period: Function test: Calibration:
Open-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Wire -X1/2 X Wire -X1/3 X Wire -X1/4 X Bridge -X1/1 /-X1/2 XX Bridge -X1/4 /-X1/5 X Disconnect plug of MAT (TS) X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire Wire -X1/2/-X1/4 -X1/3/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-11
MSA

Order No.: D0715618
The cable screen is only connected to the SUPREMA. Alternatively, the bridges -X1/1 -X1/2 and -X1/4 -X1/5 can be set as solder bridges on the MAT and MAT TS module.
Connection data:
270 mA/300 mA only for methane 350 mA 3V 1W (without cable length) 3-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms (Cable resistance) 1200 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7 ... 13.5 mm 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 PG 13.5 Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 (Ex) sd 3n G5 III B/E -24529 -20 C to +40 C 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
Conditions for use:
12-12
SUPREMA
MSA
950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 430 g 80 mm x 55 mm x 125 mm Die-cast housing Polyamide 6
Presetting required > before first calibration and when changing sensor Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module. Bridge current setting > 270 mA resp. 300 mA (for CH4) Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 ... 450 mV Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas > Measuring range level Ua = 1950 ... 2100 mV or by means of the value of the existing gas concentration according to: Ua (mV) = C (Span gas concentration in % of measuring range) / 100 * 1600 + 400 60 s according to EN 50054, 15 minutes for presetting, 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: PK10 with 1.0 l/min or PV10 with 1.0 l/min or splashwater-proof housing with 1 l/min
Calibration:
Calibration procedure according to SUPREMA operation manual For measuring components allowed, measuring ranges, lower alarm levels and conditions for calibration see list of components. (Order No.: D0792420) Possible other measuring components and measuring ranges on request.
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire Wire -X1/2/-X1/4 -X1/3/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-13
MSA

Order No.: D0715618
Connection data:
270 mA/300 mA only for methane 350 mA 3V 1 W (without cable length) 5-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms 1500 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7...13,5 mm 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 Pg 13.5
Conditions for use:
Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 (Ex) sd 3n G5 III B/E -24529 -20 C to +40 C 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
12-14
SUPREMA
MSA
Calibration:
Wire -X1/1 XX
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/5 X
Short-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Short-circuit at max. cable length Failure indication
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X
SUPREMA
12-15
MSA

Order No.: D0715619
The cable screen is only connected to the SUPREMA. Alternatively, the bridges -X1/1 -X1/2 and -X1/4 -X1/5 can be set as solder bridges on the MAT resp. MAT TS module.
Connection data:
310 mA for all measuring components 350 mA 3V 1 W (without cable length) 3-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms (Cable resistance) 1200 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7 ... 13.5 mm 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 PG 13.5 Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 (Ex) sd 3n G5 III B/E -24529 -20 C to +40 C 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
Conditions for use:
12-16
SUPREMA
MSA
Presetting required > before first calibration and when changing sensor Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module. Bridge current setting > 310 mA for all measuring components Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 ... 450 mV Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas > Measuring range level Ua = 1950 ... 2100 mV or by means of the value of the existing gas concentration according to: Ua (mV) = C (Span gas concentration in % of measuring range) / 100 * 1600 + 400 60 s according to EN 50054, 15 minutes for presetting, 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: PK10 with 1.0 l/min or PV10 with 1.0 l/min or splashwater-proof housing with 1 l/min
Calibration:
Calibration procedure according to SUPREMA operation manual For measuring components allowed, measuring ranges, lower alarm levels and conditions for calibration see list of components. Possible other measuring components and measuring ranges on request.
Open-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Bridge -X1/1 /-X1/2 XX
Bridge -X1/4 /-X1/5 X
Wire -x1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire Wire -X1/2/-X1/4 -X1/3/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-17
MSA

Order No.: D0715619
Connection data:
310 mA for all measuring components 350 mA 3V 1 W (without cable length) 5-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms 1500 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7 ... 13.5 mm 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 Pg 13.5
Conditions for use:
12-18
SUPREMA
MSA
Presetting required > before first calibration and when changing sensor Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module. Bridge current setting > 310 mA for all measuring components Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 ... 450 mV Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas > Measuring range level Ua = 1950 ... 2100 mV or by means of the value of the existing gas concentration according to: Ua (mV) = C (Span gas concentration in % of measuring range) / 100 * 1600 + 400 60 s according to EN 50054, 15 minutes for presetting, 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: PK10 with 1.0 l/min or PV10 with 1.0 l/min or splashwater-proof housing with 1 l/min
Calibration:
Wire -X1/1 XX
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/1 XX
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X
SUPREMA
12-19
MSA

Order No.: D0715690
Connection data:
270 mA/300 mA only for methane 350 mA 3V 1 W (without cable length) 3-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms (Cable resistance) 1200 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7 ... 13.5 mm 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 PG 13.5
Conditions for use:
12-20
SUPREMA
MSA
Calibration:
Open-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Open-circuit at max. cable length Failure indication Short-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Short-circuit at max. cable length Failure indication At conductor resistance 0 ... 1.7 Ohm per lead Wire -X1/2 X Wire -X1/2 X Wire -X1/2/-X1/3 XX Wire -X1/2/-X1/3 XX XX Wire -X1/3 X Wire -X1/3 X Wire -X1/4 X Wire -X1/4 X Bridge -X1/1 /-X1/2 XX Bridge -X1/4 /-X1/5 X Disconnect plug of MAT (TS) X
Wire Wire -X1/2/-X1/4 -X1/3/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-21
MSA

Order No.: D0715690

Connection data:
270 mA/300 mA only for methane 350 mA 3V 1 W (without cable length) 5-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms 1500 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7 ... 13,5 mm 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 Pg 13.5
Conditions for use:
12-22
SUPREMA
MSA
Calibration:
Wire -X1/1 XX
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X
SUPREMA
12-23
MSA
12.12 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7711 K/D-7711 K-PR (3-wire)

Order No.: D0715642
Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Attention! Connection data: WT 100 (Order No.: 10030263) Before connecting measuring head, reduce sensor current to minimum! Bridge current K: 300 mA for all measuring components K-PR: 310 mA for all measuring components Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate Temperature Humidity 330 mA 3.0 V 1,0 W (without cable length) 3-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms 1200 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7 ... 13.5 mm 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 Pg 13.5 Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 II 2G EEx d II C T4 PTB 01 ATEX 1152 X -40 C to +100 C 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing MPI/WT 100/passive/3-wire/Constant current/Presetting required
12-24
SUPREMA
MSA
950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 0.72 kg 50 mm x 40 mm x 50 mm 1.4305, V2A
Presetting required > before first calibration and when changing sensor Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module. Bridge current setting > 300 mA for all measuring components Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 ... 450 mV Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas > Measuring range level Ua = 1950 ... 2100 mV or by means of the value of the existing gas concentration according to: Ua (mV) = C (Span gas concentration in % of measuring range) / 100 * 1600 + 400 60 s according to EN 50054, 15 minutes for presetting, 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: PK10 with 1.0 l/min or PV10 with 1.0 l/min
Calibration:
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire Wire -X1/2/-X1/4 -X1/3/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-25
MSA
12.13 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7711 K/D-7711 K-PR (5-wire)

Order No.: D0715642
Connection data:
Bridge current
K: 300 mA for all measuring components K-PR: 310 mA for all measuring components
Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate Temperature Humidity
330 mA 3.0 V 1.0 W (without cable length) 5-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms 1500 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7 ... 13.5 mm 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 Pg 13.5 Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 II 2G EEx d II C T4 PTB 01 ATEX 1152 X -40 C to +100 C 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
12-26
SUPREMA
MSA
950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 0.72 kg 50 mm x 40 mm x 50 mm 1.4305 V2A
Calibration:
Wire -X1/1 XX
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/1 XX
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X
SUPREMA
12-27
MSA
12.14 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet D-7152 K (3-wire)

Order No.: D0715685
The cable screen is only connected to the SUPREMA. Alternatively, the bridges -X1/1 -X1/2 and -X1/4 -X1/5 can be set as solder bridges on the MAT or MAT TS module.
Connection data:
Bridge current Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Junction box
310 mA for all measuring components 330 mA 3.0 V 1.0 W (without cable length) 3-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms (Cable resistance) 1200 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7 ... 13.5 mm 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 E Ex e (Order No.: D0715205)
Conditions for use:
Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 II 2G EEx d II C T6 PTB 01 ATEX 1152 X -40 C to +60 C 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
12-28
SUPREMA
MSA
Calibration:
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire Wire -X1/2/-X1/4 -X1/3/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-29
MSA

Order No.: D0715685

Connection data:
Bridge current Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Sensor Cable Junction box Cross section per wire allowed Cable diameter
310 mA for all measuring components 330 mA 3.0 V 1.0 W (without cable length) 5-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms 1500 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 9 mm (1.5 m connection line, 5-core potted) E Ex e (Order No.: D0715205) 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 7 ... 13.5 mm
Conditions for use:
Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 II 2G EEx d II C T6 PTB 01 ATEX 1152 X -40 C to +60 C 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
12-30
SUPREMA
MSA
Calibration:
Wire -X1/1 XX
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/1 XX
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X
SUPREMA
12-31
MSA

Order No.: D0715601
The cable screen is only connected to the SUPREMA. Alternatively, the bridges -X1/1 -X1/2 and -X1/4 -X1/5 can be set as solder bridges on the MAT resp. MAT TS module.
Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Attention! Connection data:
WT 100 (Order No.:10030263) Before connecting measuring head, reduce sensor current to minimum! Bridge current Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Junction box 270 mA/300 mA only for methane 330 mA 3.0 V 1.0 W (without cable length) 3-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms (Cable resistance) 1200 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7 ... 13.5 mm 0.75 ...1.5 mm2 E Ex e (Order No.: D0715205)
Conditions for use:
Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 II 2G EEx d II C T6 PTB 01 ATEX 1152 X -40 C to + 60 C 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
12-32
SUPREMA
MSA
Presetting required > before first calibration and when changing sensor Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module. Bridge current setting > 270 mA/300mA only for methane Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 ... 450 mV Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas > Measuring range level Ua = 1950 ... 2100 mV or by means of the value of the existing gas concentration according to: Ua (mV) = C (Span gas concentration in % of measuring range) / 100 * 1600 + 400 60 s according to EN 50054, 15 minutes for presetting, 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: PK10 with 1.0 l/min or PV10 with 1.0 l/min
Calibration:
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire Wire -X1/2/-X1/4 -X1/3/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-33
MSA

Order No.: D0715601
Connection data:
Bridge current Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cable diameter
270 mA/300 mA only for methane 330 mA 3.0 V 1.0 W (without cable length) 5-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms (Cable resistance) 1500 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7 ... 13.5 mm 9 mm (1.5 m connection line, 5-core potted)
Cross section per wire allowed Junction box Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate Temperature Humidity
0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 E Ex e (Order No.: D0715205) Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 II 2G EEx d II C T6 PTB 01 ATEX 1152 X -40 C to +60 C 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
12-34
SUPREMA
MSA
Presetting required > before first calibration and when changing sensor Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module. Bridge current setting > 270 mA/300 mA only for methane Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 ... 450 mV Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas > Measuring range level Ua = 1950 ... 2100 mV or by means of the value of the existing gas concentration according to: Ua (mV) = C (Span gas concentration in % of measuring range) / 100 * 1600 + 400 60 s according to EN 50054, 15 minutes for presetting, 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: PK10 with 1.0 l/min or PV10 with 1.0 l/min
Calibration:
Wire -X1/1 XX
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/1 XX
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X
SUPREMA
12-35
MSA
12.18 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Series 47K-ST, -PRP (3-wire)

Order No.: according to ordering information
The cable screen is only connected to the SUPREMA. Alternatively, the bridges -X1/1 -X1/2 and -X1/4 -X1/5 can be set as solder bridges on the MAT 10 module resp. MAT 10 TS module.
Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Attention! Connection data: WT (= catalytic combustion), (Order No.: 10030263) Before connecting measuring head, reduce sensor current to minimum! Bridge current Maximum nominal current Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Connection box EEx d 2 x 3/4 NPT Connection box EEx e 2 x M25 x 1.5 mm Conditions for use: Mounting Explosion protection/Sensor Certificate/Sensor Terminal box EEx d 2 x 3/4 NPT Dimensions W x D x H Weight Temperature 310 mA 350 mA 1.0 W typical (without cable length) 3-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7 ... 12 mm 1.0 ... 2.5 mm2 Order No.: 10051080 Order No.: 10051091 Wall mounting II 2G EEx d IIC T4 (-40 C ... +90 C) ST II 2G EEx d IIC T6 (-40 C ... +40 C) PRP INERIS 03 ATEX 0208 CESI 012 ATEX 091 100 x 100 x 100 mm 400 g -40 C ... +55 C (T5) / -40 C ... +40 C (T6) MPI/WT 100/passive/3-wire/Constant current/Presetting required
12-36
SUPREMA
MSA
Terminal box EEx e 2 x M25 x 1.5 mm Dimensions W x D x H Weight Temperature Humidity Pressure 47 K-ST/47 K-PRP
KEMA 99 ATEX 3853 90 x 90 x 75 mm 490 g -40 C ... +60 C (T5) / -40 C ... +40 C (T6) 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 800 ... 1200 hPa
For further details see operation manual. (Order no.: 10052472)
Presetting required > before first calibration and when changing sensor Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module. Bridge current setting > 310 mA Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 ... 450 mV Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas > Measuring range level Ua = 1950 ... 2100 mV or by means of the value of the existing gas concentration according to: Ua (mV) = C (Span gas concentration in % of measuring range) / 100 * 1600 + 400
15 minutes for presetting 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: test cap with 1.0 l/min (Order-No.: 10049316) Calibration procedure according to SUPREMA operation manual For measuring components allowed, measuring ranges, lower alarm levels and conditions for calibration see list of components. (Order-No.: D0792420) Possible other measuring components and measuring ranges on request.
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Short-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication
Wire -X1/2 /-X1/3 XX
Wire Wire -X1/2 /-X1/4 -X1/3/-X1/4 X X
Short-circuit at max. cable length Failure indication
Wire -X1/2 /-X1/3 XX
Wire Wire -X1/2 /-X1/4 -X1/3 /-X1/4 XXXX X X X
At output resistance 0 ... 1.7 Ohm XX per wire
SUPREMA
12-37
MSA
12.19 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Series 47K-ST, -PRP (5-wire)

Order No.: according to ordering information
The cable screen is only connected to the SUPREMA. Alternatively, the bridges -X1/1 -X1/2 and -X1/4 -X1/5 can be set as solder bridges on the MAT 10 resp. MAT 10 TS module.
Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Attention! Connection data: WT (= catalytic combustion), (Order No.: 10030263) Before connecting measuring head, reduce sensor current to minimum! Bridge current Maximum nominal current Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Connection box EEx d 2 x 3/4 NPT Connection box EEx e 2 x M25 x 1.5 mm Conditions for use: Mounting Explosion protection/Sensor Certificate/Sensor Terminal box EEx d 2 x 3/4 NPT Dimensions W x D x H Weight Temperature 310 mA 350 mA 1.0 W typical (without cable length) 5-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms 1500 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7 ... 12 mm 1.0 ... 2.5 mm2 Order No.: 10051080 Order No.: 10051091 Wall mounting II 2G EEx d IIC T4 (-40 C ... +90 C) ST II 2G EEx d IIC T6 (-40 C ... +40 C) PRP INERIS 03 ATEX 0208 CESI 012 ATEX 105 100 x 100 x 100 mm 400 g -40 C ... +60 C (T5) / -40 C ... +40 C (T6) MPI/WT 100/passive/5-wire/Constant current/Presetting required
12-38
SUPREMA
MSA
Terminal box EEx e 2 x M25 x 1.5 mm Dimensions W x D x H Weight Temperature Humidity Pressure 47 K-ST/47 K-PRP
KEMA 99 ATEX 3853 90 x 90 x 75 mm 490 g -40 C ... +55 C (T5) / -40 C ... +40 C (T6) 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 800 ... 1200 hPa
For further details see operation manual. (Order no.: 10052472)
Presetting required > before first calibration and when changing sensor Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module. Bridge current setting > 310 mA Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 ... 450 mV Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas > Measuring range level Ua = 1950 ... 2100 mV or by means of the value of the existing gas concentration according to: Ua (mV) = C (Span gas concentration in % of measuring range) / 100 * 1600 + 400
15 minutes for presetting 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: test cap with 1.0 l/min (Order-No.: 10049316) Calibration procedure according to SUPREMA operation manual For measuring components allowed, measuring ranges, lower alarm levels and conditions for calibration see list of components. (Order-No.: D0792420) Possible other measuring components and measuring ranges on request.
Wire -X1/1 XX
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/1 XX
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X
SUPREMA
12-39
MSA

Order No.: D0715672
The cable screen is only connected to the SUPREMA. Alternatively, the bridge -X1/4 -X1/5 may be performed as a solder-bridge on the MAT resp. on the MAT TS module. (The bridge is from status G of MPI module no longer required.)
MPI-HL 8101/passive/4-wire/Constant current/Presetting required
HL (Order No.: 10030264) Before connecting measuring head, reduce sensor current to minimum!
Connection data:
118 mA 2 mA 150 mA 10 V approx. 0.6 W (without cable length) 4-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms 1500 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7 ... 13.5 mm 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 Pg 13.5
Conditions for use:
12-40
SUPREMA
MSA
Presetting required > before first calibration and when changing sensor Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module. Bridge current setting > 118 mA for all components Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 ... 450 mV Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas > Measuring range level Ua = 1950 ... 2100 mV
15 minutes for presetting, 48 hours for calibration Span gas application via: PK 10 with 1.0 l/min or PV 10 with 1.0 l/min
Calibration:
Open-circuit at min. cable length Failure indication
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Bridge -X1/4 / -X1/5 XXXX
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Short-circuit min. cable length Failure indication Short-circuit max. cable length Failure indication
Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XXXX Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XXXX
Wire Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/3 -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/3 XX X XX
Wire Wire -X1/2/-X1/4 -X1/3/-X1/4 XXXX XX
Wire Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/3 -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/3 XX XXXX X
Wire Wire -X1/2/-X1/4 -X1/3/-X1/4 XXXX X
SUPREMA
12-41
MSA

Order No.: D0715674
The cable screen is only connected to the SUPREMA. Alternatively, the bridge -X1/4 -X1/5 may be performed as a solder-bridge on the MAT resp. on the MAT TS module. (The bridge is from status G of MPI module no longer required.)
Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Attention! HL (Order No.: 10030264) Before connecting measuring head, reduce sensor current to minimum! MPI-HL 8113/passive/4-wire/Constant current/Presetting required
Connection data:
165 mA 2 mA 190 mA 10 V approx. 0.9 W (without cable length) 4-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms 1500 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7 ... 13.5 mm 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 Pg 13.5
Conditions for use:
12-42
SUPREMA
MSA
15 minutes for presetting, 48 hours for calibration Span gas application via: PK10 with 1.0 l/min or PV10 with 1.0 l/min
Calibration:
Open-circuit at min. cable length Failure indication
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Bridge -X1/4 / -X1/5 XXXX
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Short-circuit at min. cable length Failure indication Short-circuit at max. cable length Failure indication
SUPREMA
12-43
MSA

Order No.: D0715643
The cable screen is only connected to the SUPREMA. Alternatively, the bridge -X1/4 -X1/5 may be performed as a solder-bridge on the MAT resp. on the MAT TS module. (The bridge is from status G of MPI no longer required.)
MPI-HL 8101/passive/4-wire/Constant current/Presetting required
HL (Order No.: 10030264) Before connecting measuring head, reduce sensor current to minimum!
Connection data:
118 mA 2 mA 150 mA 10 V approx. 0.6 W (without cable length) 4-core, 80 % screened 36 ohms 1500 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 7 ... 13.5 mm 0.75 ... 1.5 mm2 Pg 13.5 Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 (Ex) sd 3n G5 III B/E -27349 -20 C to +40 C 10 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
Conditions for use:
12-44
SUPREMA
MSA
15 minutes for presetting, 48 hours for calibration Span gas application via: PK10 with 1.0 l/min or PV10 with 1.0 l/min
Calibration:
Open-circuit at min. cable length Failure indication Wire -X1/1 X Wire -X1/2 X Wire -X1/3 X Wire -X1/4 X Bridge -X1/4/ -X1/5 XXXX Disconnect plug of MAT (TS) X
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Short-circuit at min. cable length Failure indication Short-circuit at max. cable length Failure indication
SUPREMA
12-45
MSA
12.23 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet DF-7010

Order No.: D0792602
Connection module: Sensor simulation module:
MCI (active/3-wire/4 ... 20 mA linear/current supply)
4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262)
Connection data:
Supply voltage Maximum power consumption Power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet
16 ... 32 VDC 120 mA 4.0 W (without cable length) 3-core, 80 % screened 200 ohms 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 6 ... 12 mm 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 Pg 13.5
Conditions for use:
Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H
Wall mounting IP 54 according to EN 60529 II 2G EEx d m e[[ib]] IIC T6 DMT 99 ATEX E 023 X -20 C to +40 C 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.5 kg 150 x 88 x 158
For further details see operation manual. (Order No.: D0792151)
12-46
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup:
After switching on the supply voltage, the DF-7010 initiates a self-test. Ia = 3 mA (adjustable) > After 5 minutes, the instrument changes over to measuring operation. Ia = 4 mA Explosion range: Before opening the terminal compartment, power to the measuring head must be switches off.
Status signals:
On SUPREMA operation, the adjustable status signals CALIBRATION and FAILURE must be set to the following values: Calibration > 3 mA Failure > 2 mA Cable defect > 0 mA Indication at the SUPREMA display: Signal error
Function test:
Span gas application via: Integrated span gas inlet piece with 0.5 l/min, (for standard test gases) or test cap with 1.0 l/min, (Order No.: D6079762) or splashwater-proof housing SG 70 with 1 l/min or pump adapter PA 70 with 1.0 l/min
Calibration:
New or modified calibration is made on the spot by means of the AUER CONTROL operation module. Operation manual AUER-CONTROL Order No.: 0792-124 Calibration demand of SUPREMA measuring points > (INHIBIT/alarm suppression) current output in calibration mode > 3 mA After confirmation, changeover to measuring operation. Approved measuring components, calibrating conditions, measuring ranges, alarm levels and linearisation tables see list of components: (Order No.: D0792420) Possible other measuring components on request.
Sensor substitution module
4 ... 20 mA/Order No.: 10030262
Open-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Open-circuit at max. cable length Failure indication Short-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Short-circuit max. cable length Failure indication
Wire -X1/1 X Wire -X1/1 X Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Wire -X1/2 X Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 X Wire -X1/4 X
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-47
MSA

Order No.: D0792611

Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Connection data: 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) Supply voltage Operation current Power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Type test approval Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Housing material Dimensions W x D x H 16 ... 32 VDC approx. 100 mA 2.5 W (without cable length) 3-core, 80 % screened 200 ohms 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 12 mm 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 Pg 13.5 Wall mounting IP 54 according to EN 60529 II 2G EEx d m e[[ib]] IIC T6 DMT 99 ATEX E 023 X -20 C to +40 C 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.5 kg Aluminium Die cast (polyester-coated) 150 mm x 88 mm x 158 mm MCI (active/3-wire/4 ... 20 mA linear/current supply)
12-48
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup:
After switching on the supply voltage, the DF-7010 initiates a self-test. Ia = 3 mA (adjustable) > After 5 minutes, the instrument changes over to measuring operation. Ia = 4 mA Explosion range: Before opening the terminal compartment, power to the measuring head must be switches off.
Status signals:
On SUPREMA operation, the adjustable status signals CALIBRATION and FAILURE must be set to the following values: Calibration > 3 mA Failure > 2 mA Cable defect > 0 mA Indication at the SUPREMA display: Signal error
Function test:
Span gas application via: Integrated span gas inlet piece with 0.5 l/min, (for standard test gases) or test cap with 1.0 l/min (Order No.: D6079762) or splashwater-proof housing SG 70 with 1 l/min or pump adapter PA 70 with 1.0 l/min
Calibration:
New or modified calibration is made on the spot by means of the AUER CONTROL operation module. Operation manual AUER-CONTROL Order No.: 0792-124 Calibration demand of SUPREMA measuring points > (INHIBIT/alarm suppression) current output in calibration mode > 3 mA After confirmation, changeover to measuring operation. Approved measuring components, calibrating conditions, measuring ranges, alarm levels and linearisation tables see list of components: (Order No.: D0792420) Possible other measuring components on request.
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
Short-circuit max. cable length Failure indication
Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-49
MSA

Order No.: D0756661

Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Connection data: 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) Supply voltage Maximum power consumption Power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Type test approval Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H Housing material 13 ... 30 VDC 50 mA 1.5 W (without cable length) 3-core, 80 % screened 200 ohms 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 13.5 mm 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2 spring terminals Cable gland PG 13.5 mm Wall mounting IP 42/EN 60529 no none -20 C to +40 C 10 up to 90 % rel. humidity 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 0.65 kg 100 mm x 95 mm x 165 mm Stainless steel plate MCI (active/3-wire/4 ... 20 mA non-linear/current source)
12-50
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup:
DF-8201 is consisting of VHL10 + TGS813 (S1 and S2 open) Connection according to drawing 0756D-413 (part of the operation manual)
2 hours minimum (for operation readiness), 48 hours for calibration Application of span gas or reference gas via test cap (Order No.: D6079762) (0,5 l/min) Do not using dry testgas. Approved measuring components, calibrating conditions, measuring ranges, alarm levels and linearisation tables see list of components: Possible other measuring components on request.
Open or Short Circuit Fault Indication: X = Signal failure (FAIL-LED) XX = Alarm LEDs, Signal exceeded, Signal failure (FAIL-LED) XXX = only alarms XXXX = Shift of Measurement value
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 XX
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 XX
Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-51
MSA

Order No.: D0756662
MCI (active/3-wire/4 ... 20 mA/current supply)
HL (Order No.: 10030264)
Connection data:
Supply voltage Maximum power consumption Power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet
13 ... 30 VDC 50 mA 1.5 W (without cable length) 3-core, 80 % screened 200 ohms 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 13.5 mm 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2 spring terminals Cable gland PG 13.5 mm Wall mounting IP 42/EN 60529 no none -20 C to +40 C 10 up to 90 % rel. humidity 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 0.65 kg 100 mm x 95 mm x 165 mm Stainless steel plate
Conditions for use:
Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Type test approval Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H Housing material
12-52
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup:
DF-8250 is consisting of VHL10 + TGS812 (S1 and S2 closed) Connection according to drawing 0756D-413 (part of the operation manual)
2 hours minimum (for operation readiness), 48 hours for calibration Application of span gas or reference gas via test cap (Order No.: D6079762) (0.5 l/min) Do not using dry testgas. Approved measuring components, calibrating conditions, measuring ranges, alarm levels and linearisation tables see list of components: Possible other measuring components on request.
Open or Short Circuit Fault Indication: X = Signal failure (FAIL-LED) XX = Alarm LEDs, Signal exceeded, Signal failure (FAIL-LED) XXX = only alarms XXXX = Change of Measurement value
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 XX
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 XX
Short-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Short-circuit max. cable length Failure indication
Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-53
MSA

Order No.: D0745720

Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Connection data: 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) Supply voltage Maximum power consumption Power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Type test approval Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H 16 ... 32 VDC 200 mA (Switch-on current 400 mA short-term) 5 W (without cable length) 3-core, 80 % screened 400 ohms 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 12 mm 0.75 ... 2.5 mm2 PG 13.5 Wall mounting IP 54 according to EN 60529 none none -20 C to +40 C 5 ... 90 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 900 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.1 kg 120 mm x 82 mm x 130 mm MCI (active/3-wire/4 ... 20 mA non-linear/current supply)
12-54
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup: Warm-up period: Function test:
After switching on the operational voltage, the measuring head is ready for operation after approx. 15 minutes. 15 minutes minimum (for presetting), 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: PK10 with 1.0 l/min or PV10 with 1.0 l/min or splashwater-proof housing with 1 l/min
Calibration:
Open or Short Circuit Fault Indication: X = Signal failure (FAIL-LED) XX = Alarm LEDs, Signal exceeded, Signal failure (FAIL-LED) XXX = only alarms
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 XX
Wire -xX1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 XX
Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X (a)
Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
(a) After removing the short-circuit, disconnect for a short-time wire -X1/4 or unplug/MAT (TS).
SUPREMA
12-55
MSA

Order No.: D0793703

Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Connection data: 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) Supply voltage Power consumption Maximum power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet 16 ... 24 VDC 5 W (without cable length) 200 mA/Switch-on current up to 400 mA 3-core, 80 % screened 200 ohms 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 14 mm (16 mm special design) 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 Plug connection MCI (active/3-wire/4 ... 20 mA non-linear/current supply)
Conditions for use:
Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Type test approval Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H
Wall mounting/Hanging device IP 54 according to EN 60529 none none -20 C to +40 C 20 ... 90 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.4 kg 120 mm x 80 mm x 122 mm
12-56
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup: Function test:
After switching on the operational voltage, the smoldering fire detector is ready for operation after approx. 15 minutes. Application of span gas for smoldering fire detector 0793-050 with the function tester FT-8501 0793-750 When measuring head is connected to SUPREMA, measuring head LED has no function.
Calibration:
The smoldering fire detector is supplied with smoldering fire calibration. Calibration only at the manufacturers.
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 XX
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 XX
Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-57
MSA

Order No.: D0793705
Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Connection data:
MCI (active/3-wire/4 ... 20 mA non-linear/current supply)
4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) Supply voltage Power consumption Maximum power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet 16 ... 24 VDC 5 W (without cable length) 200 mA/Switch-on current up to 400 mA 3-core, 80 % screened 200 ohms 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 14 mm (16 mm special design) 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 Plug connection Wall mounting IP 54 according to EN 60529 none none -20 C to +40 C 20 ... 90 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.4 kg 120 mm x 80 mm x 122 mm
Conditions for use:
12-58
SUPREMA
MSA
Calibration:
Open-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Wire -X1/1 X Wire -X1/2 X Wire -X1/4 XX Disconnect plug of MAT (TS) X
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 XX
Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-59
MSA

Order No.: D0793730
MCI (active/2-wire/4 ... 20 mA linear/current supply)
4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262)
Connection data:
Supply voltage Maximum power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet
16 ... 32 VDC 50 mA 2-core, 80 % screened 200 ohms 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 14 mm 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 Connection plug Wall mounting IP 54 according to EN 60529 none none -20 C to +40 C 5 ... 90 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.4 kg 120 mm x 80 mm x 122 mm
Conditions for use:
12-60
SUPREMA
MSA
Calibration:
Open or Short Circuit Fault Indication: X = Signal failure (FAIL-LED) XX = Alarm LEDs, Signal exceeded, Signal failure (FAIL-LED)
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/4 X
SUPREMA
12-61
MSA

Order No.: 10044123
MCI (active/3-wire/4 ... 20 mA non-linear/current supply)
4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) Supply voltage Maximum power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet 16 ... 32 VDC 120 mA 3-core, 80 % screened 200 ohms 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 6 ... 12 mm 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 PG 13.5
Conditions for use:
Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Type test approval Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H Housing material
Wall mounting IP 54 according to EN 60529 II 2G EEx d m e[[ib]] IIC T6 DMT 99 ATEX E021X -20 C to +40 C 20 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 900 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.5 kg 150 mm x 88 mm x158 mm Aluminium Die cast (polyester-coated)
12-62
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup: Warm-up period: Function test:
After switching on the operational voltage, the measuring head is ready for operation after approx. 15 minutes. 15 minutes minimum (for presetting), 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: Test cap with 0.5 l/min (Order No.: D6079762) Splashwater-proof housing SG 70 with 1 l/min Pump adapter PA 70 with 1.0 l/min
Calibration:
Calibration procedure according to SUPREMA operation manual Calibration of the DF-8603 according to operation manual For measuring components allowed, measuring ranges, lower alarm levels and conditions for calibration see list of components. (Order No: D0792420) Possible other measuring components and measuring ranges on request.
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-63
MSA

Order No.: D0756 xxx (xxx-according to the list of components)

Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Connection data: 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) Supply voltage Maximum power consumption Cable type Power consumption Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Housing material Dimensions W x D x H Case material 10 ... 30 VDC 40 mA 2-core, 80 % screened 1 W (without cable length) 500 ohms 2000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 14 mm (16 mm special design) 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 Cable gland Pg 13.5 mm Wall mounting IP 42 none none min -10 to -40 C (depending on component) 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 0.65 kg Stainless steel (CrNi) 100 mm x 95 mm x 165 mm Plate of High-grade steel MCI (active/2-wire/4 ... 20 mA linear)
12-64
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup:
Installation of electrochemical cells is made by user or service staff. Installation of type A or B according to installation instructions is part of the operation manual. (Order No.: D0765129) After x minutes (depending from measuring cell) > Ia = 4 mA
Function test: Calibration:
Application of span gas or reference gas via test cap (Order No.: D6079762) (1 l/min) Depending on component (according to list of components) Approved measuring components, calibrating conditions, measuring ranges, alarm levels and linearisation tables see list of components: D0792420 Possible other measuring components on request.
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
SUPREMA
12-65
MSA
12.33 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet DF-9500 EX

Order No.: D0742xxx (xxx-according to the list of components)
The cable screen is connected at the SUPREMA and the DF 9500. The zener barrier must be installed apart from the explosion range.
Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Safety barrier allowed: Connection data: SB 2427, complete (Order No.: 10034362) Supply voltage Supply current Maximum power consumption Power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet 14 ... 28 VDC 4 ... 30 mA 50 mA 0,4 W (without cable length) 2-core, 80 % screened 500 ohms with Safety barrier 2000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 9 ... 13.5 mm 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 PG 13.5 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) MCI (active/2-wire/4 ...0 mA linear/current sink)
Conditions for use:
Wall mounting IP 42 (Sensor) IP 63 (Housing) II 2G EEx ia IIC T6 DMT 01 ATEX E 152 X min. 20 C to +40 C (depending on component) min. 20 ... 80 % rel. humidity (depending on component)
12-66
SUPREMA
MSA
Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H Housing material Startup: Warm-up periods: Function test: Calibration:
900 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.0 kg 122 mm x 81 mm x 152 mm Polyester
For connections see operation manual. For O2 < 60 s according to EN 50104: The warm-up periods are depending on the component and can be seen in the list of components. Application of span gas or reference gas via: PK 10 resp. PV 10 (1 l/min) Depending on component (according to list of components) Approved measuring components, calibrating conditions, measuring ranges, alarm levels and codes see list of components: D 0742 E 458 Possible other measuring components on request.
Open-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Wire -X1/1 X Wire -X1/2 X Disconnect plug of MAT (TS) X
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
SUPREMA
12-67
MSA

The cable screen is connected at the SUPREMA and the DF-9500.

Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Connection data: 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) Supply voltage Supply current Maximum power consumption Power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H Housing material 14 ... 28 VDC 4 ... 30 mA 50 mA 1 W (without cable length) 2-core, 80 % screened 500 ohms 2000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 9 ... 13.5 mm 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 PG 13.5 Wall mounting IP 42 (Sensor) IP 63 (Housing) II 2G EEx ia IIC T6 DMT 01 ATEX E 152 X min. 20C to + 40 C (depending on component) min. 20 ... 80 % rel. humidity (depending on component) 900 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.0 kg 122 x 81 x 152 mm Polyester MCI (active/2-wire/4 ... 20 mA linear/sink)
12-68
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup:
The input modules (MCI) are presetted at 4 ... 20 mA. Check with the sensor simulation module possible. After startup, longer dead periods and sensor changes, the warm-up period of the electrochemical sensors is 3 hours minimum.
Warm-up periods: Function test: Calibration:
For O2 <60 s according to EN 50104: The warm-up periods are depending on the component and can be seen in the list of components. Application of span gas or reference gas via: PK 10 resp. PV 10 (1 l/min) Depending on component (according to list of components) Approved measuring components, calibrating conditions, measuring ranges, alarm levels and codes see list of components: D 0742 E 458 Possible other measuring components on request.
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
SUPREMA
12-69
MSA
12.35 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet DF-9500 Tr (Current Separator)

Screening: Attention!
The screen is connected to the screen rail in the rack and also at the measuring head. Near the current separator, the screen can be connected to terminals. Do not connect the screen to potential terminal. Screen connections must be kept separate from potential ground. MCI (active/2-wire/4 ... 20 mA linear/sink)
Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Current separator approved: Connection data:
4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262)
KFDO-CS_Ex1.51P (Order No.: 10029683) Supply voltage Supply current Maximum power consumption Power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet 14 ... 28 VDC 4 ... 30 mA 50 mA 0.4 W (without cable length) 2-core, 80 % screened 500 ohms with current separator 2000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 9 ... 13.5 mm 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 PG 13.5 Wall mounting IP 42 (Sensor) IP 63 (Housing) II 2G EEx ia IIC T6 DMT 01 ATEX E 152 X min. 20 C to +40 C (depending on component) min. 20 ... 80 % rel. humidity (depending on component)
Conditions for use:
12-70
SUPREMA
MSA
Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H Housing material
900 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.0 kg 122 x 81 x 152 mm Polyester
Startup: Warm-up periods: Function test: Calibration:
For connections see operation manual. For O2 < 60 s according to EN 50104: The warm-up periods are depending on the component and can be seen in the list of components. Application of span gas or reference gas via: PK 10 resp. PV 10 (1 l/min) Depending on component (according to list of components) Approved measuring components, calibrating conditions, measuring ranges, alarm levels and codes see list of components: D 0742 E 458 Possible other measuring components on request.
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
SUPREMA
12-71
MSA
12.36 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet FlameGard

Order No.: D 0770772
4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) Supply voltage Detector power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet approved 18 ... 32 VDC via power pack 150 mA /200 mA Peak 2-core, 80 % screened (Signal line) 600 ohms 420 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 14 mm 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 EExd M20 x 1.5 with reduction 25 x 1.5 Wall mounting above adjustment bracket IP 67 according to NEMA 250 type 6 EEx d IIB T6 Ex 96C1067 A -20 C up to +55 C 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 3.5 kg 132 mm x 120 mm x 132 mm
Conditions for use:
Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection SIRA Certificate No. Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H
12-72
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup:
After switching on the supply voltage, the instrument initiates a self-test. Ia = 3 mA (adjustable); > After approx. 5 minutes, the instrument changes over to measuring operation. Ia = 4 mA Explosion range: Before opening the terminal compartment, power to the measuring head must be switched off.
Status signals:
Failure > 2 mA: Cable defect > 0 mA Indication at the SUPREMA display: Signal failure
Flame test According to operation manual.
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 X Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 X
SUPREMA
12-73
MSA
12.37 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet GD 10

Order No.: D0770 731 Standard Methane D0770 732 Standard Ethene D0770 733 Standard Propane D0770 603 Special Calibration
The cable screen is connected at the SUPREMA.

Connection module: Sensor simulation module: 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) MCI (active/3-wire/4 ... 20 mA/current supply)
Connection data:
Supply voltage Current consumption Switch-on current Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet For explosion protection
18 ... 32 VDC approx. 3,5 W (without cable length) 0,3 A at 0.3 s 3-core, 80 % screened 500 ohms 840 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 5.0 ... 9.0 mm (for enclosed Ex cable inlet) 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2 Both sides possible/M20 x 1.5 Approved cable inlet and Blind plug necessary EEx e ( M20 x 1,5)
Conditions for use:
Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Temperature
Wall mounting/or by flange IP 66/IP 67 EN 60529 CENELECE Ex d IIC T6 (EEx e for terminal connection) -25 C up to +55 C (-40 C up to +70 C for storage)
Humidity
0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
12-74
SUPREMA
MSA
Pressure Weight Dimensions Housing material
950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 2.9 kg Diameter approx. 100 mm; Length approx. 250 mm Stainless steel(ASMT 316/DIN1.4401)
Startup:
After switching on the supply voltage, the instrument initiates a self-test. Ia = 0 mA; > After approx. 60 sec. the instrument changes over to measuring operation. Ia = 4 mA (Zero) Explosion range: Before opening the terminal compartment, power to the measuring head must be switched off.
Status signals:
If the optics is contaminated more than 70 % > Ia is reaching 1 mA Indication at the SUPREMA display: Signal failure Sensor failure (failure of electronics or measuring path break) > Ia reaches 0 mA Indication at the SUPREMA display: Signal failure
Function test:
Span gas application via gas inlet piece: Weather protection housing > 4.0 l/min (at approx. 0 m/s wind speed) Flow cell > approx. 1.0 l/min (independent from the wind velocity)
Calibration:
New calibrations or calibration changes can only be made by MSA AUER service personnel or by specialists authorized by MSA AUER. For approved measuring components, calibrating conditions, measuring ranges, alarm levels and linearisation tables see list of components (Order No.: D0770405) or appendix 2 of the operation manual Possible other measuring components on request.
Open or Short Circuit Fault Indication: X = Signal failure (FAIL-LED) XX = Alarm LEDs, Signal exceeded, Signal failure (FAIL-LED) XXX = only alarms XXXX = INHIBIT / supressed
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
Wire -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-75
MSA
12.38 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet IR-3600

Order No.: D0745603
The cable screen is connected at the SUPREMA
4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) Supply voltage Connection 230 VAC/50 Hz/10 VA with non-fused earthed conductor connection Cable type signal Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed 2-core, 80 % screened 500 ohms 420 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 6 ... 12 mm power supply and output contact cables 4 ... 8 mm for signal cable 1.5 mm2 Wall mounting IP 54 none 0 C up to +35 C, up to +45 C short-time 20 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 2 kg 184 mm x 135 mm x 193 mm
Conditions for use:
Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H
12-76
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup: Warm-up period: Calibration/IR 3600
After switching on the operational voltage, the measuring head is ready for operation after approx. 5 minutes. 5 minutes for presetting, 30 minutes for calibration According to operation manual
Calibration/SUPREMA Calibration procedure according to SUPREMA operation manual For measuring components allowed, measuring ranges, lower alarm levels see operation manual Possible other measuring components and measuring ranges on request.
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 X Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 X
SUPREMA
12-77
MSA
12.39 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Contact

Connection: potential-free contact
Connection module:
MCI (BR101 and BR102 open) Standard configuration (passive/2-wire/4 ... 20 mA/current supply)
Sensor simulation module: 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) R1 = 2.7 k (0.5 W) R2 = 1.8 k (0.5 W) Connection data: Cable type Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Min. contact closure time 2-core, 80 % screened 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 12 mm 0.75 ... 2.5 mm2 2 seconds
Ohms resistors to generate an input current:
Configuration Menu:
Settings/Measuring points/Sensor data Sensor Measuring range Unity Settings/Measuring points/Alarms 1th alarm/level Above alarm level Below alarm level Latching 2 to 4 alarm 2 to 4 level
nd th nd th
Pressure button 0 ... 100 Units any 30.00 Alarm contact is shut Alarm contact is opened Alarm latching deactivated deactivated
12-78
SUPREMA
MSA
The left-hand cursor key has to be activated in the input field limit value (2nd to 4th alarm) as long as only zeros are displayed. Then press the lower cursor key: the field content is deleted (indication: ), the alarm is deactivated (PC operation software: to delete field inputs (DEL key, then confirm by the ENTER key).
All other inputs in the Settings/Measuring Points menu may be chosen freely. Note: The potential-free contacts can also be used to carry out a lamp test or relay status of contacts. Use of these contacts for this purpose is identical to an alarm and will also trigger the collective alarm.
SUPREMA
12-79
MSA
12.40 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet SafEye Type 2xx

Order No.: D070xxx (xxx-according to type key)

Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Attention! 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) Voltage supply for detector and luminous source from 2 separate power packs. MCI (active/2-wire/4 ... 20 mA linear/current source)
Connection data:
Supply voltage Current consumption detector Current consumption luminous source Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet approved
18 ... 32 VDC (2 x external) 150 mA/200 mA Peak 100 mA/220 mA Peak 3-core, 80 % screened 600 ohms 420 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 14 mm 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 EExd M20 x 1.5 with reduction 25 x 1.5
Conditions for use:
Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection SIRA Certificate No. Temperature Humidity
Wall mounting above adjustment bracket IP 67 according to NEMA 250 type 6 EEx d IIB T6 Ex 96C1067 A -20 C up to +55 C 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
12-80
SUPREMA
MSA
Pressure Weight detector Weight source Dimensions W x D x H (detec.) Dimensions W x D x H (source) Startup:
950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 3.9 kg approx. 4.9 kg 132 mm x 115 mm x 132 mm 132 mm x 115 mm x 132 mm
After switching on the supply voltage, the instrument initiales a self-test. Ia = 3 mA (adjustable); > After 5 minutes, the instrument changes over to measuring operation. Ia = 4 mA Explosion range: Before opening the terminal compartment, power to the measuring head must be switched off.
Status signals:
Calibration > 3 mA ; Failure > 2 mA: Cable defect > 0 mA Indication at the SUPREMA display: Signal failure
IR test filter Calibration demand of SUPREMA measuring points > (INHIBIT/ alarm suppression) current output in calibration mode > 3 mA After confirmation, changeover to measuring operation. For approved measuring components, calibrating conditions, measuring ranges, alarm levels and linearisation tables see list of components. (Order No.: 0770406) Possible other measuring components on request.
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 X Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 X
SUPREMA
12-81
MSA
12.41 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet SafEye Type 4xx/UV

Order No.: D070xxx (xxx-according to type key)
MCI (active/2-wire/4 ... 20 mA linear/current source)
4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) Voltage supply for detector and luminous source from 2 separate power packs.
Connection data:
Supply voltage Current consumption detector Current consumption source Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet
18 ... 32 VDC (2 x extern) 150 mA/200 mA Peak 100 mA/220 mA Peak 2-core, 80 % screened 600 ohms 420 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 14 mm 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 EExd M20 x 1.5 with reduction 25 x 1.5
Conditions for use:
Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection SIRA Certificate No. Temperature Humidity
Wall mounting above adjustment bracket IP 67 according to NEMA 250 type 6 EEx d IIB T6 Ex 96C1067 A -20 C up to +55 C 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
12-82
SUPREMA
MSA
Pressure Weight detector Weight source Dimensions W x D x H (detec.) Dimensions W x D x H (source) Startup:
950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 3.9 kg approx. 4.9 kg 132 mm x 115 mm x 132 mm 132 mm x 115 mm x 132 mm
After switching on the supply voltage, the instrument initiales a self-test. Ia = 3 mA (adjustable); > After 5 minutes, the instrument changes over to measuring operation. Ia = 4 mA Explosion range: Before opening the terminal compartment, power to the measuring head must be switched off.
Status signals:
Calibration > 3 mA ; Failure > 2 mA: Cable defect > 0 mA Indication at the SUPREMA display: Signal failure
UV test filter Calibration demand of SUPREMA measuring points > (INHIBIT/ alarm suppression) current output in calibration mode > 3 mA After confirmation, changeover to measuring operation. For approved measuring components, calibrating conditions, measuring ranges, alarm levels and linearisation tables see list of components. (Order No.: 0770406) Possible other measuring components on request.
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 X Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 X
SUPREMA
12-83
MSA
12.42 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Type 410 WT (3-wire)

Order No.: 10000135 (Alu) M25 10000137 (V2A) M20
The cable screen is only connected to the SUPREMA. Perhaps remove 2 x 120 ohms! Alternatively, the bridges -X1/1 -X1/2 and -X1/4 -X1/5 can be set as solder bridges on the MAT or MAT TS module.
Connection data:
Bridge current Maximum power consumption Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet
310 mA for all measuring components 350 mA 1 W (without cable length) 3-core, 80 % screened 8 ohms loop resistance 300 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 12 mm 0.75 ... 2.5 mm2 Ex-M25 / M20 Wall mounting IP 54 according to EN 60529 EXs IIC T6 -25 C up to +55 C (-20 C up to +40 C in the explosion range) (-25 C ... +55 C for storage)
Conditions for use:
Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Temperature
Humidity
5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
12-84
SUPREMA
MSA
Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H Startup: Presetting:
950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.2 kg 120 mm x 72 mm x 140 mm
Presetting required > before first calibration and when changing sensor Connect the digital multimeter to the test sockets on the MAI module. Bridge current setting > 310 mA for all measuring components Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 ... 450 mV Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas > Measuring range level Ua = 1950 ... 2100 mV or by means of the value of the existing gas concentration according to: Ua (mV) = C (Span gas concentration in % of measuring range) / 100 * 1600 + 400
15 minutes minimum for presetting, 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: Test cap (Calibration Adapter Assembly) 0,25 l/min
Calibration:
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Bridge -X1/1/-X1/2 XX
Bridge -X1/4/-X1/5 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire Wire -X1/2/-X1/4 -X1/3/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-85
MSA
12.43 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Type 451

Measuring range: CO, Order No.: 10000163 Measuring range: 0 ... 50 ppm H2S, Order No.: 10000166

Connection module: Sensor simulation module: 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) MCI (active/2-wire/4 ... 20 mA linear/current sink)
Connection data:
14 ... 30 VDC 50 mA 2-core, 80 % screened 500 ohms 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 14 mm 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 EEXe II M20/M25 Wall mounting IP 65 Exsd IIC T6 EX88Y5200X -20 C up to +40 C 15 ... 90 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.7 kg 120 mm x 72 mm x 218 mm
Conditions for use:
Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection BASEEFA Certifikate No. Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H
12-86
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup:
Explosion range: Before opening the terminal compartment, power to the measuring head must be switched off. After startup, longer dead periods and sensor changes, the warm-up period of the electrochemical sensors is 3 hours minimum.
The warm-up periods are depending on the component and are to be seen in the list of components. Application of span gas or reference gas via: Test cap Depending on component (according to list of components) For approved measuring components, calibrating conditions, measuring ranges, alarm levels and codes see list of components. Possible other measuring components on request.
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
SUPREMA
12-87
MSA
12.44 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Type 460

Measuring range: 0 ... 25 Vol.-% O2, (0 ... 60 mV), no module, Order No.: 10000169

Connection module: Sensor simulation module: 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) MCI (active/2-wire/4 ... 20 mA linear/current sink)
Connection data:
14 ... 30 VDC 50 mA 2-core, 80 % screened 500 ohms 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 14 mm 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 EEXe II M20/M25
Conditions for use:
Wall mounting IP 65 Exsd IIC T6 EX88Y5200X -15 C to +40 C 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.7 kg 120 mm x 72 mm x 218 mm
12-88
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup:
Explosion range: Before opening the terminal compartment, power to the measuring head must be switched off. After startup, longer dead periods and sensor changes, the warm-up period of the electrochemical sensors is 3 hours minimum.
The warm-up periods are depending on the component and are to be seen in the list of components. Span gas application or reference gas application via test cap (Calibration Adapter Assembly) Depending on component (according to list of components) For approved measuring components, calibrating conditions, measuring ranges, alarm levels and codes see list of components. Possible other measuring components on request.
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
SUPREMA
12-89
MSA
12.45 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Type 490/O2

Measuring range: 0 ... 25 % O2, Order No.: 10000162

Connection module: Sensor simulation module: 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) MCI (active/2-wire/4 ... 20 mA/current sink)
Connection data:
14 ... 30 VDC 50 mA 2-core, 80 % screened 500 ohms 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 8 ... 14 mm 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 EEXe II M20 / M25
Conditions for use:
Wall mounting IP 65 Exsd IIC T6 EX88Y5200X -5 C to +40 C 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 1.7 kg 120 mm x 72 mm x 218 mm
12-90
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup: Status signals:
Explosion range: Before opening the terminal compartment, power to the measuring head must be switched off. Calibration > 3 mA ; Failure > 2 mA: Cable defect > 0 mA Indication at the SUPREMA display: Signal failure
Test filter For approved measuring components, calibrating conditions, measuring ranges, alarm levels and codes see list of components. Possible other measuring components on request.
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
SUPREMA
12-91
MSA
12.46 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet UltimaX (2-wire for Tox and O2)
Order No.: 10044xxx (xxx-according to order sheet)

Connection module: Sensor simulation module: 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) MCI (active/2-wire/4 ... 20 mA/current sink)
Connection data:
Supply voltage Maximum power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed
19 ... 30 VDC 40 mA 2-core, 80 % screened 500 ohms 1600 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 9 ... 17 mm 0.75 ... 2.5 mm2
Conditions for use:
Mounting
Wall mounting/Mounting with mounting clamp Separate sensor possible (remote sensor)
Ingress protection Certificate
IP 66/IP 67 EN 60529 DMT 02 ATEX E 202 X II 2G EEx d IIC T4, -40 C Ta +60 C
Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H Housing material
-40 C to +60 C see operation manual 15 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 800 ... 1200 hPa approx. 4.7 kg 160.3 mm x 99.3 mm x 261.1 mm Stainless steel (ASMT 316/DIN 1.4401)
For further details see operation manual, Order No.: 10046690
12-92
SUPREMA
MSA
After switching on the supply voltage the UltimaX initiates a self-test. After approximately 30 sec. the instrument changes over to measuring operation. The warm-up periods are depending on the component and can be seen in the list of components. Application of span gas or reference gas via UltimaX test cap Dependent from component (see list of components) For approved measuring components, calibrating conditions, measuring ranges, alarm levels and codes see list of components. Possible other measuring components on request.
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/4 X
SUPREMA
12-93
MSA
12.47 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet UltimaX (3-wire for Explosive Gases/Tox and O2)

Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Variant: Variant: Connection data: 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) Tox and O2 with electrochemical cell explosive gases with catalytic sensors Supply voltage Maximum power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length 19 ... 30 VDC Electrochemical: 60 mA/Catalytic: 200 mA 3-core, 80 % screened 500 ohms Electrochemical: 2000 m/Catalytic: 800 m (1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Conditions for use: Mounting 9 ... 17 mm 0.75 ... 2.5 mm2 Wall mounting/Mounting bracket Remote sensor option Ingress protection Certificate IP 66/IP 67 EN 60529 DMT 02 ATEX E 202 X II 2G EEx d IIC T4, -40 C Ta +60 C Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H Housing material -40 C to +60 C see operation manual 15 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 800 ... 1200 hPa approx. 4.7 kg 160.3 mm x 99.3 mm x 261.1 mm Stainless steel (ASMT 316/DIN 1.4401) MCI (active/3-wire/4 ... 20 mA/current source)
12-94
SUPREMA
MSA
After switching on the supply voltage the UltimaX initiates a self-test. After approximately 30 sec. the instrument changes over to measuring operation. The warm-up periods depend on the gas. Application of span gas or reference gas via UltimaX test cap Depending on gas (see list of gases) For allowed measuring ranges, lower alarm levels and conditions for calibration see list of gases. Possible other gases on request.
Open-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Wire -X1/1 X Wire -X1/2 X Wire -X1/4 X Disconnect plug of MAT (TS) X
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-95
MSA
12.48 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet UltimaX IR


Connection module: Sensor simulation module: 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) MCI (Infrared/active/3-wire/4 ... 20 mA/current source)
Connection data:
Supply voltage Maximum power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed
19 ... 30 VDC 350 mA 3-core, 80 % screened 500 ohms 500 m (1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 9 ... 17 mm 0.75 ... 2.5 mm2
Conditions for use:
Mounting
Wall mounting/Mounting bracket Remote sensor option
Ingress protection Certificate
IP 66/IP 67 EN 60529 DMT 02 ATEX E 202 X II 2G EEx d IIC T4, -40 C Ta +60 C
Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H Housing material
-40 C to +60 C see operation manual 15 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 800 ... 1200 hPa approx. 4.7 kg 160.3 mm x 99.3 mm x 296.5 mm Stainless steel (ASMT 316/DIN 1.4401)
12-96
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup: Function test: Calibration:
After switching on the supply voltage the instrument initiates a self-test. After approximately 30 sec. the instrument changes over to measuring operation. Span gas via UltimaX IR test cap New calibrations or calibration changes can only be made by MSA AUER service personnel or by specialists authorized by MSA AUER. For allowed measuring ranges, lower alarm levels and conditions for calibration see list of gases: Possible other measuring components on request.
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-97
MSA
12.49 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Ultima-XI


Connection module: MCI (IR / active / 3-wire / 420 mA / current source)
Sensorsimulation module: 4 ... 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262)
Connection data:
Supply voltage Maximum power consumption Cable type Maximum load Maximum cable length Cross section per wire allowed
10 ... 30 VDC 200 mA 3-core, 80 % screened 600 Ohm 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 0,75 - 4,0 mm ( 12 AWG - 22 AWG)
Conditions for use:
Mounting Ingress protection Certificate
Wall mounting IP 66/IP 67 EN 60529 DMT 02 ATEX E 202 X II 2G EEx d IIC T5, -40 C Ta +60 C
Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions Housing material
-40 C +60 C see operation manual 15 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 800 ... 1200 hPa ca. 3 kg 64 x 203 mm Stainless steel (ASMT 316/ DIN 1.4401)
12-98
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup: Function test: Calibration:
After switching on the supply voltage the instrument initiates a self-test. After approximately 65 sec. the instrument changes over to measuring operation. Application of span gas or reference gas via Ultima XI test cap New calibrations or calibration changes can only be made by MSA AUER service personnel or by specialists authorized by MSA AUER. For approved measuring components, calibrating conditions, measuring ranges, alarm levels and codes see list of components. Possible other measuring components on request.
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
Wire Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 -X1/2/-X1/4 X X
SUPREMA
12-99
MSA
12.50 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Fire Detector Apollo Series 65 (not explosion-proof) Internal Power Supply (without safety barrier)

*1 Apollo Fire Detector Series 65 Connect according to Apollo Mounting support 45681-200 Series 60/65 connection diagram. Max. 20 Fire Detectors *2 End of Line Resistor 2K2/0,5 W according to Apollo connection diagram 45681-200 Connection module: MFI (Fire Input Module) Configuration: Internal power supply, without Zener barrier. (Switch position S101: 1 + 2 = ON, 3 + 4 = OFF) Adjust potentiometer P101 to left position Connection data: Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cross section per wire allowed Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate Temperature 42 mA 22 V 1.5 W (including cable length) 2-core, 80 % screened 10 ohms (cable resistance) 400 m (1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 Type SMOKE detector -20 C to +60 C Type HEAT detector -20 C to +90 C Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions Housing material 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 120 kg Diameter 100 mm x 50 mm
12-100
SUPREMA
MSA
Simulation of normal operation / Alarm / RESET / Open or short-circuit fault indication:

Simulation Normal operation END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Alarm END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 1.0 K 1% 0.5 W between terminals 3 and 4 RESET Connect wire jumper between terminals 3 and 4 Open-circuit of line END OF LINE resistor 2K2 not connected Line short-circuit END OF LINE resistor short-circuited Failure message after 45 s maximum. Failure message Alarm message disappears, normal operation. Failure message after 45 s maximum appears. Alarm message Normal operation Effect
SUPREMA
12-101
MSA
12.51 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Fire Detector Apollo Series 65 (not explosion-proof) External Power Supply (without safety barrier)

*1 Apollo Fire Detector Series 65 Connect according to Apollo Mounting support 45681-200 Series 60/65 diagram. Max. 20 Fire Detectors *2 End of Line Resistor 2K2/0.5 W in the last detector according to connection Connection module: MFI (Fire Input Module) Configuration: External power supply, without Zener barrier. (Switch position S101: 1 + 2 + 4 = OFF, 3 = ON) Adjust potentiometer P101 to left position Connection data: Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cross section per wire allowed Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate Temperature 42 mA 22 V 1.5 W (including cable length) 2-core, 80 % screened 50 ohms (cable resistance) 2000 m (1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 Type SMOKE detector -20 C to +60 C Type HEAT detector -20 C to +90 C Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions Housing material 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 120 kg Diameter 100 mm x 50 mm Plastic
12-102
SUPREMA
MSA

Simulation Normal operation External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Alarm External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 1.0 K 1 % 0.5 W between terminal 3 and 4 RESET Connect wire jumper between terminals 3 and 4 Open-circuit of line External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 not connected Line short-circuit External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor short-circuited Interruption of the supply voltage External power supply 23 ... 32 V not connected END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Failure message Failure message max. 45 s after short-circuit Failure message Alarm message disappears, normal operation. After max. 45 s failure message appears. Alarm message Normal operation Effect
SUPREMA
12-103
MSA
12.52 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet for Push-Button Detector (not explosion-proof) Internal Power Supply (without safety barrier)

*1 Push-button detector Se Tec DKM-KR42 with LED max. 20 pieces Connect according to diagram inside the push-button detector *2 End of Line Resistor 2K2 / 0.5 W according to connection diagram inside the detector Connection module: MFI (Fire Input Module) Configuration: Internal power supply, without Zener barrier. (Switch position S101: 1 + 2 = ON, 3 + 4 = OFF) Adjust potentiometer P101 to left position Connection data: Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cross section per wire allowed Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions Housing material 42 mA 22 V 1.5 W (including cable length) 2-core, 80 % screened 10 ohms (cable resistance) 400 m (1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 125 x 125 x 36 mm Plastic
12-104
SUPREMA
MSA

Simulation Normal operation END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Alarm END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 1.0 K 1% 0.5 W between terminals 3 and 4 RESET Connect wire jumper between terminals 3 and 4 Alarm message disappears, normal operation. After approximately 45 s failure message appears. Alarm message Normal operation Effect
Open-circuit of line END OF LINE resistor 2K2 not connected Line short-circuit END OF LINE resistor short-circuited Failure message after max. 45 s. Failure message
SUPREMA
12-105
MSA
12.53 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet for Push-Button Detector (not explosion-proof) External Power Supply (without safety barrier)

*1 Push-button detector Se Tec DKM-KR42 with LED max. 20 pieces Connect according to diagram inside the push-button detector *2 End of Line Resistor 2K2 / 0.5 W according to connection diagram inside the detector Connection module: MFI (Fire Input Module) Configuration: External power supply, without Zener barrier. (Switch position S101: 1 + 2 + 4 = OFF, 3 = ON) Adjust potentiometer P101 to left position Connection data: Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cross section per wire allowed Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions Housing material 42 mA 22 V 1.5 W (including cable length) 2-core, 80 % screened 50 ohms (cable resistance) 2000 m (1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 125 x 125 x 36 mm Plastic
12-106
SUPREMA
MSA

Simulation Normal operation END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Alarm END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 1.0 K 1% 0.5 W between terminals 3 and 4 RESET Connect wire jumper between terminals 3 and 4 Alarm message disappears, normal operation. After approximately 45 s failure message appears. Alarm message Normal operation Effect
Open-circuit of line END OF LINE resistor 2K2 not connected Line short-circuit END OF LINE resistor short-circuited Failure message after max. 45 s. Failure message
SUPREMA
12-107
MSA
12.54 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Explosion-proof Push-Button Detector with Barrier Z 787

*1 Connect push-button detector according to manufacturers specification; MEDC NG16 6JF Type BGI WIRING DIAGRAM BGE/I/W + PBE/IW Contact type: NORMALLY OPEN (terminal 23 inside the detector) Carry out installation according to NFPA 72 With resistor 2.2 KOhms / 0.5 W in series with the contact; max. 10 Pieces With zener diode 10 V / 1.3 W in series with the contact; max. 20 Pieces Check polarity *2 End of Line Resistor 2K2 / 0.5 W to be mounted in the last mounting support of the detection zone circuit or in the portable detector according to the documents specified under *1. *3 Indication of leakage current. In the case of failure, the OPEN COLLECTOR transistor is conducting to terminal 5 Connection module: MFI (Fire Input Module) Configuration: External power supply, with Zener barrier (Switch position S101: 1 + 2 = OFF, 3 + 4 = ON) Set potentiometer P101 to left position. Connection data: Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cross section per wire allowed Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions Housing material 42 mA 22 V 1.5 W (including cable length) 2-core, 80 % screened 50 ohms (cable resistance) 2000 m (1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 Wall mounting IP 54 according to DIN 400 50 yes BASEEFA 03ATEX0084X -20 C to +55 C approx. 1100 g 120 x 125 x 75 mm Aluminium, pressure-resistant
12-108
SUPREMA
MSA

Simulation Normal operation External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 10 K 0.5 W between terminal 1 and 2 Alarm External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 1.0 K 1 % 0.5 W between terminal 3 and 4 RESET Connect wire jumper between terminals 3 and 4 Open-circuit of line External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 not connected Line short-circuit External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor short-circuited Interruption of the supply voltage External power supply 23 ... 32 V not connected END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Leakage current External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 10 K 0.5 W between terminal 1 and 2 Connect resistor 18 K between terminals 4 and 5, or connect resistor 330R between terminals 3 and 5. Failure message Voltage of terminals 12 shall be >22 V Failure message after max. 45 s Failure message Failure message Normal operation After max. 45 s failure message appears. Alarm message Voltage of terminal 12 shall be <0.1 V Normal operation Effect
SUPREMA
12-109
MSA
12.55 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Ex-Fire Detector Apollo Series 60 with Barrier Z 787

*1 Connect according to manufacturers specification for Apollo Series 60: SERIES 60 INTRINSICALLY SAFE SYSTEM DRAWING Z209883. Carry out installation according to NFPA 72. Only the mounting support Order No. 45681-207 specified in the data sheets must be used. For each detection zone circuit, max. 20 fire detectors are allowed. *2 End of Line Resistor 2K2 / 0.5 W has to be mounted in the last mounting support of the detection zone circuit or in the portable detector according to the documents specified under *1 *3 Indication of leakage current. In the case of failure, the OPEN COLLECTOR transistor is conducting to terminal 5 Connection module: MFI (Fire Input Module) Configuration: External power supply, with Zener barrier (Switch position S101: 1 + 2 = OFF, 3 + 4 = ON) Set potentiometer P101 to left position. Connection data: Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cross section per wire allowed Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate 42 mA 22 V 1.5 W (including cable length) 2-core, 80 % screened 50 ohms (cable resistance) 2000 m (1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 yes BASEEFA EX97D2054 BAS02ATEX1288 Temperature SMOKE detector -20 C to +60 C HEAT detector -20 C to +105 C Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 153 g including mounting support Diameter 100 mm x 50 mm including mounting support Housing material Plastic
12-110
SUPREMA
MSA

Simulation Normal operation External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 10 K 0.5 W between terminal 1 and 2 Alarm External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 1.0 K 1 % 0.5 W between terminal 3 and 4 RESET Connect wire jumper between terminals 3 and 4 Open-circuit of line External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 not connected Line short-circuit External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor short-circuited Interruption of the supply voltage External power supply 23 ... 32 V not connected END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Leakage current External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 10 K 0.5 W between terminal 1 and 2 Connect resistor 18 K between terminals 4 and 5, or connect resistor 330R between terminals 3 and 5. Failure message Voltage of terminals 12 shall be >22 V Failure message Failure message Failure message Normal operation After max. 45 s failure message appears. Alarm message Voltage of terminal 12 shall be <0.1 V Normal operation Effect
SUPREMA
12-111
MSA
12.56 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Explosions-Proof Fire Detector CERBERUS DO1101EX/DT1101EX with Barrier Z 787

*1 Connect according to manufacturers specification. CERBERUS DO1101EX / DT1101EX: Document No. e1469. Only the mounting support Order No. 45681-207 specified in the data sheets must be used. For each detection zone circuit, max. 20 fire detectors are allowed. Carry out installation according to NFPA 72 *2 End-of-Line Resistor 2K2 / 0.5 W to be mounted in the last mounting support of the detection zone circuit or in the portable detector according to the documents specified in *1. *3 Indication of leakage current. In the case of failure, the OPEN COLLECTOR transistor is conducting to terminal 5 Connection module: MFI (Fire Input Module) Configuration: External power supply, with Zener barrier (Switch position S101: 1 + 2 = OFF, 3 + 4 = ON) Set potentiometer P101 to left position. Connection data: Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cross section per wire allowed Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate 42 mA 22 V 1.5 W (including cable length) 2-core, 80 % screened 50 ohms (cable resistance) 2000 m (1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 EEXib IICT4 DO 1101A-EX PTB 02 ATEX 2135 DT1101A-EX: PTB 02 ATEX 2097 Temperature DO1101: -25 C to +50 C DT1101: -25 C to +70 C Humidity DO1101: 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing DT1101: 0 ... 100 % rel. hum.; surface condensing Pressure Weight Dimensions 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 130 g Diameter 115 mm x 55 mm including mounting support Housing material Plastic
12-112
SUPREMA
MSA

Simulation Normal operation External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 10 K 0.5 W between terminal 1 and 2 Alarm External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 1.0 K 1 % 0.5 W between terminal 3 and 4 RESET Connect wire jumper between terminals 3 and 4 Open-circuit of line External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 not connected Line short-circuit External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor short-circuited Interruption of the supply voltage External power supply 23 ... 32 V not connected END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Leakage current External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 10 K 0.5 W between terminal 1 and 2 Connect resistor 18 K between terminals 4 and 5, or connect resistor 330R between terminals 3 and 5. Failure message Voltage terminal 12 must be 23 ... 32 V Failure message Failure message after max. 45 s Failure message Normal operation After max. 45 s failure message appears. Alarm message Voltage of terminal 12 shall be <0.1 V Normal operation Effect
SUPREMA
12-113
MSA
12.57 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Explosion-Proof Push-Button Detector with Barriers MTL 728 and MTL 710

*1 Connect push-button detector according to manufacturers specification. MEDC NG16 6JF Type BGI. WIRING DIAGRAM BGE/I/W + PBE/IW Contact type: NORMALLY OPEN (terminals 2-3 inside the detector). Carry out installation according to NFPA72 With resistor 1.8 K / 0.5 W in series with the contact; max. 10 Pieces With zener diode 10 V /1.3 W in series with the contact; max. 20 Pieces Check polarity *2 End-of-Line Resistor 2K2 / 0.5 W to be mounted in the last mounting support of the detection zone circuit or in the portable detector according to the documents specified in *1 *3 Indication of leakage current. In the case of failure, the OPEN COLLECTOR transistor is conducting to terminal 5 Connection module: MFI (Fire Input Module) Configuration: External power supply, with Zener barrier (Switch position S101: 1 + 2 = OFF, 3 + 4 = ON) Set potentiometer P101 to left position. Connection data: Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cross section per wire allowed Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions Housing material 42 mA 22 V 1.5 W (including cable length) 2-core, 80 % screened 50 ohms (cable resistance) 2000 m (1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 Wall mounting IP 54 according to DIN 400 50 yes BASEEFA 03ATEX0084X -20 C to +55 C approx. 1100 g 120 x 125 x 75 mm Aluminium, pressure-resistant
12-114
SUPREMA
MSA

Simulation Normal operation External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 10 K 0.5 W between terminal 1 and 2 Alarm External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 1.0 K 1 % 0.5 W between terminal 3 and 4 RESET Connect wire jumper between terminals 3 and 4 Open-circuit of line External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 not connected Line short-circuit External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor short-circuited Interruption of the supply voltage External power supply 23 ... 32 V not connected END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Leakage current External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 10 K 0.5 W between terminal 1 and 2 Connect resistor 18 K between terminals 4 and 5, or connect resistor 330R between terminals 3 and 5. Failure message Voltage terminal 12 must be 23 ... 32 V Failure message after max. 45 s Failure message Failure message Normal operation After max. 45 s failure message appears. Alarm message Voltage of terminal 12 shall be <0.1 V Normal operation Effect
SUPREMA
12-115
MSA
12.58 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Explosion-Proof Fire Detector Apollo Series 60 with Barriers MTL 728 and MTL 710

*1 Connect according to manufacturers specification Apollo Series 60: SERIES 60 INTRINSICALLY SAFE SYSTEM DRAWING Z209883. Carry out installation according to NFPA72. Only the mounting support Order No. 45681-207 specified in the data sheets must be used. For each detection zone circuit, max. 20 fire detectors are allowed *2 End-of-Line Resistor 2K2 / 0.5 W to be mounted in the last mounting support of the detection zone circuit or in the portable detector according to the documents specified in *1 *3 Indication of leakage current. In the case of failure, the OPEN COLLECTOR transistor is conducting to terminal 5 Connection module: MFI (Fire Input Module) Configuration: External power supply, with Zener barrier (Switch position S101: 1 + 2 = OFF, 3 + 4 = ON) Set potentiometer P101 to left position. Connection data: Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cross section per wire allowed Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate 42 mA 22 V 1.5 W (including cable length) 2-core, 80 % screened 50 ohms (cable resistance) 2000 m (1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 yes BASEEFA EX97D2054 BAS02ATEX1288 Temperature SMOKE detector -20 C to +60 C HEAT detector -20 C to +105 C Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 153 g including mounting support Diameter 100 mm x 50 mm including mounting support Housing material Plastic
12-116
SUPREMA
MSA

Simulation Normal operation External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 10 K 0.5 W between terminal 1 and 2 Alarm External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 1.0 K 1 % 0.5 W between terminal 3 and 4 RESET Connect wire jumper between terminals 3 and 4 Open-circuit of line External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 not connected Line short-circuit External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor short-circuited Interruption of the supply voltage External power supply 23 ... 32 V not connected END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Leakage current External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 10 K 0.5 W between terminal 1 and 2 Connect resistor 18 K between terminals 4 and 5, or connect resistor 330R between terminals 3 and 5. Failure message Voltage terminal 12 must be 23 ... 32 V Failure message Failure message Failure message Normal operation After max. 45 s failure message appears. Alarm message Voltage of terminal 12 shall be <0.1 V Normal operation Effect
SUPREMA
12-117
MSA
12.59 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Explosion-Proof Fire Detector CERBERUS DO1101EX/DT1101EX with Barriers MTL 728 and MTL 710

*1 Connect according to manufacturers specification. CERBERUS Document No. e1469 Tyco M600 Series smoke and heat detectors. Document 01B-04-D12 Issue 1, Date 7/02 Only the mounting support Order No. 45681-207 specified in the data sheets must be used. *2 End-of-Line Resistor 2K2 / 0.5 W to be mounted in the last mounting support of the detection zone circuit or in the portable detector according to the documents specified under *1 *3 Indication of leakage current. In the case of failure, the OPEN COLLECTOR transistor is conducting to terminal 5. Connection module: MFI (Fire Input Module) Configuration: External power supply, with Zener barrier (Switch position S101: 1 + 2 = OFF, 3 + 4 = ON) Set potentiometer P101 to left position. Connection data: Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cross section per wire allowed Conditions for use: Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate 42 mA 22 V 1.5 W (including cable length) 2-core, 80 % screened 50 ohms (cable resistance) 2000 m (1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 Wall mounting IP 42 according to DIN 400 50 EEXib IICT4 DO 1101A-EX PTB 02 ATEX 2135 DT1101A-EX: PTB 02 ATEX 2097 Temperature DO1101: -25 C to +50 C DT1101: -25 C to +70 C Humidity DO1101: 0 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing DT1101: 0 ... 100 % rel. hum.; surface condensing Pressure Weight Dimensions Housing material 950 ... 1100 hPa approx. 130 g Diameter 115 mm x 55 mm including support Plastic
12-118
SUPREMA
MSA

Simulation Normal operation External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 10 K 0.5 W between terminal 1 and 2 Alarm External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 1.0 K 1 % 0.5 W between terminal 3 and 4 RESET Connect wire jumper between terminals 3 and 4 Open-circuit of line External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 not connected Line short-circuit External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor short-circuited Interruption of the supply voltage External power supply 23 ... 32 V not connected END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Leakage current External power supply 23 ... 32 V connected according to circuit diagram END OF LINE resistor 2K2 connected according to circuit diagram Connect resistor 10 K 0.5 W between terminal 1 and 2 Connect resistor 18 K between terminals 4 and 5, or connect resistor 330R between terminals 3 and 5. Failure message Voltage terminal 12 must be 23 ... 32 V Failure message Failure message after max. 45 s Failure message Normal operation After max. 45 s failure message appears. Alarm message Voltage of terminal 12 shall be <0.1 V Normal operation Effect
SUPREMA
12-119
MSA
12.60 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Contact

Connection module: MSI
Connection data:
Maximum nominal current Maximum nominal voltage Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cross section per wire allowed
8 mA 15 V 1.0 W (including cable length) 2-core, 80 % screened 50 ohms (cable resistance) 2000 m (1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 depending on the switch type no depending on the switch type depending on the switch type depending on the switch type depending on the switch type depending on the switch type depending on the switch type depending on the switch type
Conditions for use:
Mounting Ingress protection Explosion protection Certificate Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions Housing material
12-120
SUPREMA
MSA
Open or short-circuit fault indication at the following configuration: S101: 1 and 2 = ON; 3 and 4 = OFF (External power supply) S102: 1 and 2 = ON; 3 and 4 = OFF (Contact type NO) S103: 3 and 4 = ON (overall line control) X = Signal failure (FAIL) XX = Signal - Alarm N = Failure case has no effect
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/5 X
Open-circuit at max. Wire cable length -X1/1 Failure indication X
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Short-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module
Wire -X1/1 with -X1/2 X Wire -X1/1 with -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/1 with -X1/4 X Wire -X1/1 with -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1 with -X1/5 N Wire -X1/1 with -X1/5 N
Wire -X2/4
Wire -X2/5
Wire -X4/5
Failure indication Short-circuit at max. cable length
X Wire -X2/4
X Wire -X2/5
X Wire -X4/5
Failure indication
SUPREMA
12-121
MSA
12.61 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet SafEye Xenon 700

Order No.: according to order sheet
The power supplies of detector and Flash Source have to be separated.

Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Connection data: 4 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) Supply voltage Detector power consumption Light source power consumption Cable type Maximum burden Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet Conditions for use: Mounting Explosion protection/Sensor 18 ... 32 V DC 220 mA/300 mA with heated optics 220 mA/300 mA with heated optics 3-core, 80 % screened (signal line) 600 ohms according to operation manual 8 ... 13 mm 1.0 2.5 mm2 2 x 3/42 14 NPT or 2 x M 25 (EExd) Wall mounting above adjustment bracket II 2G EEx d IIC T4 (-40 C ... +90 C) ST II 2G EEx d IIC T6 (-40 C ... +40 C) PRP Ingress protection Approvals Explosion protection Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Detector/Source Dimensions detector Dimensions source IP 66 and IP 67 according to EN 60529 SIRA 03 ATEX 1409 X Ex II 2(1) G D EExde (ia) IIC T5 -20 C ... +55 C 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 1100 hPa 4,2 kg / 4,5 kg 210 mm x 145 mm x 154 mm 255 mm x 135 mm x 175 mm MCI 10 (active/3-wire/4 ... 20 mA/as standard designed as power source)
For further details see operation manual. (Order No.: 10055103)
12-122
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup:
After switching on the supply voltage, the instrument initiates a self-test. > After this, the instrument changes over to measuring operation. Ia = 5 mA (normal operation) Explosion range: Before opening the terminal compartment, power to the measuring head must be switched off.
Status signals:
Failure / BIT error > 2 mA: Cable defect > 0 mA Indication at the SUPREMA display: Signal failure
Function test:
Flame test with IR3 fire simulator
Open or Short Circuit Fault Indication: X = Signal failure (FAIL -LED) XX = Alarm LEDs, Signal exceeded, Signal failure (FAIL-LED)
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 X Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 X
SUPREMA
12-123
MSA
12.62 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Flame Gard XI

MCI 10 (active/3-wire/4 ... 20 mA/as standard designed as power source)
4 20 mA (Order No.: 10030262) Supply voltage Detector power consumption Cable type Maximum burden Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Cable inlet 18 ... 32 VDC via power pack 150 mA/200 mA in case of alarm 3-core, 80 % screened (signal line) 600 ohms according to operation manual 8... 12 mm 1.0 2.5 mm2 2 x 14 NPT or 2 x M 25 (EExd)
Conditions for use:
Mounting Explosion protection/Sensor
Wall mounting above adjustment bracket II 2G EEx d IIC T4 (-40 C ... +90 C) ST II 2G EEx d IIC T6 (-40 C ... +40 C) PRP
Ingress protection Approvals Explosion protection
IP 66 and IP 67 according to EN 60529 SIRA 03 ATEX 1409 X Ex II 2(1) G D EExde (ia) IIC T5 ATEX II 2 (1) GD
Temperature Humidity Pressure Weight Dimensions W x D x H
-40 C ... +70 C 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 950 1100 hPa Approx. 3,4 kg 140 mm x 150 mm x 123 mm
12-124
SUPREMA
MSA
Startup:
After switching on the supply voltage, the instrument initiates a self-test. > After this, the instrument changes over to measuring operation. Ia = 5 mA (normal operation) Explosion range: Before opening the terminal compartment, power to the measuring head must be switched off.
Status signals:
Failure / BIT error > 2 mA: Cable defect > 0 mA Indication at the SUPREMA display: Signal failure
Function test:
Flame test with IR3 fire simulator
Open or Short Circuit Fault Indication: X = Signal failure (FAIL -LED) XX = Alarm LEDs, Signal exceeded, Signal failure (FAIL-LED)
Wire -X1/1 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 X Wire -X1/1/-X1/4 X
SUPREMA
12-125
MSA
12.63 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Series 47K-HT (3-wire)

The cable screen is only connected to the SUPREMA. Alternatively, the bridges -X1/1 -X1/2 and -X1/4 -X1/5 can be set as solder bridges on the MAT10-TS module.
Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Attention! Connection data: WT (= catalytic combustion) (Order No.: 10030263) Before connecting measuring head, reduce sensor current to minimum! Bridge current Maximum nominal current Power consumption Cable type Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Connection box II 2 G EEx e II/ PTB 00 ATEX 1063 Wall angle bracket with connection of potential equalization 280 mA 350 mA 1.0 W typical (without cable length) 3 -core, 80 % screened 36 ohms 1000 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 6 ...12 mm 1.0 2.5 mm2 Order No.: 10062674 Order No.: 10048829 MPI-WT 100/passive/3-wire/Constant current/Presetting required
Constant cable length of sensor 2.0 m Conditions for use: Mounting Explosion protection/ Sensor Certificate/Sensor Dimensions W x D x H Weight Temperature Wall mounting II 2 G EEx d IIC T3 (-40 C ... +160 C) HT INERIS 03 ATEX 0208 100 x 100 x 100 mm 400 g -40 C ... +55 C (T5)/-40 C ... +40 C (T6)
12-126
SUPREMA
MSA
Terminal box EEx e 2 x M25 x 1.5 mm Dimensions W x D x H Weight Temperature Humidity Pressure
KEMA 99 ATEX 3853 90 x 90 x 75 mm 490 g -20 C ... +55 C (T5)/-20 C ... +40 C (T6) 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing 800... 1200 hPa
Presetting required > before first calibration and when changing sensor Connect digital voltmeter to MAI card jacks. Bridge current setting > 310 mA Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 450 mV
Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas -> Measuring range level Ua = 1950 ... 2100 mV or by means of the value of the existing gas concentration according to: Ua (mV) = C (Span gas concentration in % of measuring range) / 100 * 1600 + 400 Warm-up period: Function test: Calibration: 15 minutes for presetting, 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: test cap with 1,0 l/ min. (Order No. 10049316) Calibration procedure according to SUPREMA operation manual For measuring components allowed, measuring ranges, lower alarm levels and conditions for calibration see list of components (Order No.: D0792420) Possible other measuring components and measuring ranges on request.
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/2/-X1/3 XX Wire -X1/2 /-X1/3 XX
Wire Wire -X1/2/-X1/4 -X1/3/-X1/4 X X
Wire Wire -X1/2 /-X1/4 -X1/3 /-X1/4 XXXX X X X
At output resistance 0 ... 1.7 Ohm XX per wire
SUPREMA
12-127
MSA
12.64 SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheet Series 47K-HT (5-wire)

The cable screen is only connected to the SUPREMA. Alternatively, the bridges -X1/1 -X1/2 and -X1/4 -X1/5 can be set as solder bridges on the MAT10-TS module.
Connection module: Sensor simulation module: Attention! Connection data: WT (= catalytic combustion) (Order No.: 10030263) Before connecting measuring head, reduce sensor current to minimum! Bridge current Maximum nominal current Power consumption Cable type: Maximum loop resistance Maximum cable length Cable diameter Cross section per wire allowed Connection box II 2 G EEx e II/ PTB 00 ATEX 1063 with cable inlet EEx e II KEMA 99 Wall angle bracket with connection of potential equalization Constant cable length of sensor Conditions for use: Mounting Explosion protection/HT Sensor Certificate/Sensor EG Type Approval Air velocity Humidity 280 mA 350 mA 1.0 W typical (without cable length) 35 -core, 80 % screened 36 ohms 1500 m (at 1.5 mm2 cross section per wire) 6 ...12 mm 1.0 2.5 mm2 Order No.: 10062674 MPI-WT 100/passive/5-wire/Constant current/Presetting required
Order No.: 10048829 2.0 m Wall mounting II 2G EEx d IIC T3 (-40 C ... +160 C) HT INERIS 03 ATEX 0208 DMT 03 ATEX G 003 x (SUPREMA) 0 6 m/s 5 ... 95 % rel. humidity; noncondensing
12-128
SUPREMA
MSA
Pressure
800 ... 1200 hPa
For further details see operation manual. (Order No.: 10052472) Startup: Presetting: Presetting required > before first calibration and when changing sensor Connect digital voltmeter to MAI card jacks. Bridge current setting > 280 mA Zero adjustment by zero gas > Zero setting to Ua = 400 450 mV
Sensitivity adjustment with measuring gas -> Measuring range level Ua = 1950 ... 2100 mV or by means of the value of the existing gas concentration according to: Ua (mV) = C (Span gas concentration in % of measuring range)/100 * 1600 + 400 Warm-up period: Function test: Calibration: 15 minutes for presetting, 2 hours for calibration Span gas application via: test cap with 1,0 l/ min. (Order No. 10049316) Calibration procedure according to SUPREMA operation manual For measuring components allowed, measuring ranges, lower alarm levels and conditions for calibration see list of components (Order No.: D0792420) Possible other measuring components and measuring ranges on request.
Open or Short Circuit Fault Indication: X = Signal failure (FAIL -LED) XX = Alarm LEDs, Signal exceeded, Signal failure (FAIL-LED) XXX = only alarms XXXX = no status indication (signal change)
Wire -X1/1 XX
Wire -X1/2 X
Wire -X1/3 X
Wire -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/5 X
Shor-circuit at the MAT (TS) Module Failure indication Shor-circuit at max. cable length Failure indication
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/1/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/2/ -X1/5 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/4 X
Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X Wire -X1/3/ -X1/5 X
SUPREMA
12-129
MSA
12-130
SUPREMA
Dimensions
MSA
13. Dimensions
13.1 Rack
SUPREMA
13-1
MSA
Dimensions
13.2 Rail-mounted Modules

13.2.1 MRO 8 TS Module
13.2.2 MRO 16 TS Module
13-2
SUPREMA
Dimensions
MSA
13.2.3 MRC TS Module
13.2.4 MGT 40 TS Module
SUPREMA
13-3
MSA
Dimensions
13.2.5 MHD TS Module
13.2.6 MAT TS Module
13-4
SUPREMA
Marking, Certificates and Approvals
MSA
14. Marking, Certificates and Approvals according to the Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)
Manufacturer: MSA AUER GmbH Thiemannstrae 1 D-12059 Berlin Product: Type of protection: SUPREMA see Remote Sensor, the control system must be installed outside of the hazardous area DIN EN 61779-1 : 2001-07 DIN EN 61779-4 : 2001-04 DIN EN 61779-5 : 2001-07 DIN EN 50104 : 2002-10 DIN EN 50271 : 2002-05 EN 50402 : 2006-03 Marking: II (1) G (2) G
Performance:
EC-Type Examination Certificate: DMT 03 ATEX G 003 X SEE BG 213.013 Quality Assurance Notification: 0158 Year of Manufacture: Serial No.: see label see label
EMC Conformance according to the Directive 89/336/EC DIN EN 50270 : 2007-05 Typ 2, DIN EN 61000 - 6 - 4 : 2002-08 LVD Conformance according to the Directive 73/23/EC DIN EN 61010 : 2002-08
SUPREMA
14-1
MSA
EC Declaration of Conformity The manufacturer or his in the community established authorized representative MSA AUER GmbH Thiemannstrae 1 D-12059 Berlin declares that the product: SUPREMA based on the EC-Type Examination Certificate: DMT 03 ATEX G 003 X complies with the ATEX directive 94/9/EC, Annex III. Quality Assurance Notification complying with Annex IV of the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC has been issued by DMT in Essen, Notified Body number: 0158. The product complies with the directive 96/98 / EC (MarED), based on the EC-Type Examination Certificate: SEE BG 213.013
The quality survaillance is under the control of SEE BG, Notified Body number: The product is in conformance with the EMC directive 89/336/EC, amended by 91/263/EC, 92/31/EC, 93/68/EC, with the following harmonised standards: DIN EN 50270 :2007-05 Typ 2, DIN EN 61000 - 6 - 4 :2002-08
0736
We further declare that the product complies with the provisions of LVD Directive 73/23/EC as amended by Directive 93/68/EC, with the following harmonised standard: DIN EN 61010 :2002-08
Dr. Axel Schubert R & D Instruments
Berlin, September 2007
14-2
SUPREMA
MSA
14.1 Special Conditions for Secure Use According to EG Type Test Approval DMT 03 ATEX G 003 X
Alarm outputs configured as new Alarm shall not be used for safety-relevant purposes. The operation of the system fail relays, as well as the relays of the modules connected, must be regularly checked as part of the preventative maintenance (see 7.1). Passive remote measuring heads must always be connected to 5-core cable when the 3-core cable length allowed for proper cable control has been exceeded. In the case of measurement combustible gases the alarm threshold for the main alarm must be in the latching mode. When operating the gas warning System with 4 ... 20 mA interface remote measuring heads with 3-core cable at MCI modules Mat. No. 10021029 or 10041567, the user must take into account that short circuits of the measuring head cable are not recognized in all cases. The proper state of the cable leading to the remote measuring head has to be checked regularly. When switching together with 4 ... 20 mA interface remote measuring heads, the specification of the 4 ... 20 mA interface as well as the behaviours below 4 mA and above 20 mA have to be taken into account. When operating the gas warning system, the user must consider that for most of the remote measuring heads to be connected the signalisation of special status at the outputs of measuring values is not different from measuring values which only just lie below the measurement range beginning. Moreover, not all special status are signalised at the outputs of measuring values. When operating the system with a large number of measure points and relay outputs, the directions for parameter setting of the relay outputs laid down this operation manual have to be kept to. When in the field use of the D-7010 remote measuring heads environmental temperatures of above 40 C cannot be excluded, the alarm levels must not be higher than 90 % of the setting required according to the safety-relevant limit value. If the D-7010 remote measuring head has been set at ambient temperatures below +10 C, a new setting has to be carried out when +20 C are exceeded for a longer period. When the D-7010 remote measuring head has been exposed to concentrations above the measuring range level, zero and sensitivity have to be checked and readjusted, if necessary. If the D-7010 or D-7100 remote measuring heads are used with the SG 70 splashwaterproof housing, the following measures must be taken: - The alarm levels must not exceed 75 % of the setting which is necessary with regard to the safety-relevant limits. - Before start-up it must be made sure that, in view of the considerably longer setting periods, the possible rising speed of the measure gas concentration in the field use cannot lead to safety-endangering situations. - Application of span gas via the span gas inlet for calibration and setting must only be done in calm ambient air.
SUPREMA
14-3
MSA
Module MIB 20 MCP 10 MDO 10 MDA 10 MDA 20 MGO 10 MGO 20 MAO 10 MAI 20 MAR 10 MST 10 MPI 10 WT 100 MPI 10 WT 10 MCI 20 MAT 10 MAT 10 TS MUT 10 MRC 10 TS MRO 10 8 MRO 10 8 TS MRO 10 16 TS MRD 10 SUPREMA Rack-Type 20/E 20 (With or without internal 150 W power supply) SUPREMA CAN BRIDGE CBM MGT 40 TS SUPREMA CAN LWL Converter
Layout version 2 10,11 11,12,13,14 10 2 15 2 6 6 6 8 6 11 4 6 4 3 7 3 3 2
Meaning Interconnection Board Central Processing Unit Display & Operation Data Acquisition Data Acquisition General Output General Output Analog Output Unit Analog Input Unit Analog Redundant System Terminals Passive Sensor Input Current Input Analog Terminal Analog Terminal Universal Terminal Relay Connection Relay Output (8 Relays) Relay Output (8 Relays) Relay Output (16 Relays) Relay Dummy
10034641 10026772 10052948
Table 14-1: Modules tested according to DMT 03 ATEX G 003 X
Passive Remote Sensors according to DMT 03 ATEX G 003 X D-7010 D-7100 D-715 K D-7152 K D-7711 K D-7711 K-PR Series 47 K-ST Series 47 K-PRP Series 47 K-PHT
14-4
SUPREMA
Special conditions
MSA
15. Special conditions to comply with the requirements of DIN EN 61508 for SIL 13 according to TUEV Certificate
15.1 Conditions for configuration, installation, operation and maintenance
15.1.1 Common Conditions for safety operation
The following criteria have to be considered for all safety-related applications 1. The Locking (Inhibit) of measuring inputs is only allowed during maintenance and repair. 2. After any configuration or parameterisation a verification has to be completed by reading back the data and comparing with the SUPREMA configuration or parameterisation software. 3. The alarm conditions of the SUPREMA must be periodically checked together with the typical gas calibration checks. 4. The alarm and relay functions must be tested at least once per year. 5. The locking (inhibit) of measuring points must be safety related processed via the inhibit relay. 6. Failure of measuring points must be safety related signalled via the MS-Fail relay. 7. Sensor cables must be protected from mechanical damage (e. g. by using armoured cable). 8. The relays must be energised under normal conditions. 9. The relay contacts must be protected with a fuse rated at 0.6 of the nominal specified relay contact current. 10. The system fail relay contacts must be safety related processed for warning purposes. 11. All inputs of MSI module must be used in open and short circuit detection mode. 12. In galvanically coupled system components the ground connections of all power supply must be connected. 13. In case of failure of any component the repair or replacement must be completed within 72 hours. 14. Only modules and components with the Hardware and Software Versions specified in chapter 4 may be used. 15. The notes in the Operation Manual for installation, operation and maintenance have to be considered. 16. An ambient temperature above 40 C is to be avoided. 17. All devices connected to one MRO module must have the same voltage level. 18. The ground fault current recognition of the MFI modules is to be tested at least annually. 19. External power supplies must fulfil, as a minimum, the requirements of EN 60950 and EN 50178. 20. During installation of the SUPREMA - Fire and Gas Warning System the national regulations and standards must be complied with. 21. The installation of the SUPREMA - Fire and Gas Warning System has to be done in such a way that a maximum degree of pollution 1 (EN 60664-1) is ensured (no or only dry, not conductive contamination arises. The contamination does not have influence). 22. In the case of using the MLE modules the conditions which are described in Technical Report No: 968/EZ 163.04/04 dated 2004-11-22 are to be considered.
SUPREMA 15-1
MSA
Special conditions
Additional conditions to fulfill the requirements of IEC 61508 for a certain SIL In addition to the general conditions the following criteria have be considered for a specified SIL: SIL 1: A configuration 1 has to be installed in accordance with chapter 15.1.2.
SIL 2: A configuration 1 has to be installed in accordance with chapter 15.1.2. By installing a configuration 2 in accordance with chapter 15.1.2. and using the MRO 10 8 and/or MRO 10 8 TS modules the contacts of the relays for the same alarm (Alarm A and Alarm B) of subsystem A and B have to be interconnected serially or processed safety-related. (By using of the MRO 16 TS modules this interconnecting is already internally realized.) SIL 3: A redundant configuration 3 has to be installed in accordance with chapter 15.1.2. Two independent sensors have to be used in the same area. The sensors in the same area have to be connected to different MAI 20 (analogue input) modules. By installing a configuration 3 in accordance with chapter 15.1.2 and using the MRO 10 8 and/or MRO 10 8 TS modules the contacts of the relays for the same alarm (Alarm A and Alarm B) of subsystem A and B have to be interconnected serially or processed safety-related. (By using of the MRO 16 TS modules this interconnecting is already internally realized.)
15.1.2 Permitted system expansions over CAN BUS

SUPREMA central
SUPREMA central
SUPREMA satellite
SUPREMA central
CAN Bridge
SUPREMA satellite
SUPREMA central
CAN Bridge CAN/Fibre Optic Fibre Optic CAN/Fibre Optic
SUPREMA satellite
Figure 15-1: System expansions with CAN BUS and single-channel-configuration
15-2
SUPREMA
Special conditions
MSA
SUPREMA central
SUPREMA central
CAN CA A l < 20 20m
SUPREMA satellite
CAN CA B
SUPREMA central
CAN CA A
CAN Br idge
SUPREMA satellite
CAN Br idge
CAN CA B
SUPREMA central
CAN Bri dge

CAN CA A
CAN/Fibre Optic Fibre O ptic
CAN/Fibre Optic
SUPREMA satellite
CAN Bri dge

CAN CA B
CAN/Fibre Optic Fibre O ptic
CAN/Fibre Optic
Figure 15-2: System expansions with CAN BUS and redundant configuration
Configuration 1
Figure 15-3: In case of a single-channel-configuration the MLE Modules can not be used
SUPREMA
15-3
MSA
Special conditions
Configuration 2
Figure 15-4: Configuration without MLE 10 Modules
Figure 15-5: Configuration with MLE 10 Modules
15-4
SUPREMA
Special conditions
MSA
Configuration 3
Figure 15-6: Configuration without MLE 10 Modules
Figure 15-7: Configuration with MLE 10 Modules
SUPREMA
15-5
MSA
Special conditions
15.2 Listing of the permitted Hardware Modules and Software Versions

15.2.1 Permitted Hardware Modules
Module MIB 20 MCP 10 MDO 10 MDA 10 MDA 20 MGO 10 MGO 20 MAI 20 MAR 10 MST 10 MSI 10 MFI 10 MCI 20 MCI 20 BFE MAT 10 MAT 10 TS MPI 10 WT 100 MPI 10 WT 10 MPI 10 HL 8101 MPI 10 HL 8113 MUT 10 MRC 10 TS MRO 10 8 MRO 10 8 TS MRO 10 16 TS MAT TS 320 FLAMMABLE MAT TS 320 TOXIC MRD 10 MGT 40 TS Layout Version 2 10 11, 12, 13 9 10 2 12 15 2 6 6 8 4 5 7 11 4 6 6 Meaning Interconnection Board Central Processing Unit Display & Operation Data Acquisition Data Acquisition General Output General Output Analog Input Unit Analog Redundant System Terminals Switch Input Fire Input Current Input Analog Terminal Analog Terminal Passive Sensor Input
MLE 10 Logic Extension Modules SUPREMA Rack-Type 20/E 20 (with or without internal 150 W power supply) SUPREMA CAN BRIDGE CBM SUPREMA CAN-LWL Konverter - Fibre Optics Converter
4 3 7 3 3 1 1 1 2 10026772 (item number) 4
Universal Terminal Relay Connection Relay Output (8 Relays) Relay Output (8 Relays) Relay Output (16 Relays) Analog Terminal Analog Terminal Relay Dummy General Terminal
For non safety-related applications (e.g. analog output, data communication to a PLS) the following components can also be used:
Module Layout Version Meaning MAO 10 6 Analog Output Unit MHD 10 2 High Driver SUPREMA PKV 30-COS/AUER
15-6
SUPREMA
Special conditions
MSA
15.2.2 Permitted Software Versions

Modul SUPREMA Softwareversion 1.03.17 2.06.01 MDA 10 MGO 10 MDA 20 MGO 20 MDO 10 1.02.02 MDA MA01 2.02.06 MGO MA01 2.01.01 3.01.01 2.02.16 2.02.18 2.02.19x 2.06.01 MCP 10 2.02.16 2.02.18 2.02.19x (x: a,b,c) 2.06.01 MAI MA01 CPLD MAR MA01 CPLD 2.02.01 Controller MAO MA01 CPLD MLE 10_4_XXX_YYY_ZZ (XXX_YYY_ZZ: Ident. No. of the customer specified application, for which a separate suitable qualification has to be verified.) Controller (x: a,b,c) Controller CPLD Controller CPLD Controller Controller Controller Komponente Bedienprogramm mit Konfigurator
Servicepack 1.03.20
MAI 20 MAR 10 MAO 10 MLE 10
15.2.3 Possible Configurations and Acquirable SILs

The following table shows, which configuration has to be selected, to fulfill the requirements of a special SIL. (LDM = Low Demand Mode; HDM = High Demand or Continuous Mode)
SIL 1 Configuration 1 Configuration 2 Configuration 3 LDM X X X HDM X X X LDM X X X SIL 2 HDM LDM SIL 3 HDM
SUPREMA
15-7
MSA
Special conditions
Depending on the selected configuration the following safety-relevant parameters have to be considered while implementing the safety loop: Safety-relevant parameters without using the MLE 10 Modules
PFH Configuration 1 With and without CAN Modules: < 4*10-7 Configuration 2 With and without CAN Modules: < 6*10-8 Without CAN Modules: = 2,4*10-8 With CAN-Bridge: = 3,4*10-8
-8 Configuration 3 With CAN-Bridge and CAN-LWL: = 4,3*10
PFD < 2*10-3 < 2*10

-4
SFF 92% 94%
HFT 0 1
1
< 1*10-5
94%
Except Inputmodules (MCI, MPI, MFI, MSI);
HFT = 0!
Safety-relevant parameters using the MLE 10 Modules

PFH Configuration 1 With and without CAN Modules: < 4*10-7 Configuration 2 With and without CAN Modules: < 7*10-8 Without CAN Modules: = 3,4*10 With CAN-Bridge: = 4,4*10-8
-8
PFD < 2*10 < 2*10

-3 -4
SFF 92% 94%
HFT 0 1
1
-8 Configuration 3 With CAN-Bridge and CAN-LWL: = 5,3*10
< 2*10-5
94%
Except Inputmodules (MCI, MPI, MFI, MSI);
HFT = 0!
Concerning the configuration variations it has to be considered, that the sensors were not part of the test and their suitability for the respective Safety Integrity Level (SIL) has to be proven seperately.
15-8
SUPREMA
Special conditions
MSA
15.3 TUEV-Certificate
SUPREMA
15-9
MSA
Special conditions
15-10
SUPREMA
Special conditions
MSA
16. Special conditions to comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 for a SUPREMA Fire and Gas Warning System
16.1 Safety Conditions
1. The requirements in NFPA 72 for installation, operation and maintenance must be complied with. 2. The installation of the SUPREMA Fire and Gas Warning System may only be made by technical personnel, that are familiar with the requirements of NFPA 72. 3. If alarm devices are used for the indication of an alarm status, RESET of these devices must be by an external time delay relay (see NFPA 72; Cap. 4.4.3.5.8). 4. Inputs from manually actuated alarms are to be separated from inputs for automatic alarms (e.g. fire alarms). 5. The alarms on the display must clearly indicate the place of their origin. 6. A buffered power supply (e. g. accumulator) has to be used as redundant voltage supply. 7. The earth fault monitoring of the sensors and alarm devices must be ensured. 8. Only sensors, alarm units and alarm devices with NFPA approval may be used. They must correspond to the specification in the Operation Manual. The required terminal resistance and the max. number per line has to be considered. 9. After any configuration or setting of parameters a verification has to be completed by reading back the data and comparing it with the SUPREMA configuration or parameter setting software.
SUPREMA
16-1
MSA
Special conditions
16-2
SUPREMA
MSA
17. Ordering Information

17.1 Modules and Accessories
Order No. 10087413 10015759 10022311 10050713 10050714 10043997 10044020 10021028 10024279 10024276 10024280 10046265 10048285 10080011 10083804 10018946 10021676 10021674 10021430 10021050 10026772 10019468 10026178 10029124 10050715 10087412 10050782 10054728 10050801 10054729 10069677 Name SUPREMA MCP 10, 25 MHz, (SW 2.06.xx) SUPREMA MAT Analog Terminals SUPREMA MAT TS Analog Terminals (rail) SUPREMA MAI 20 Analog Input SUPREMA MAR 10 Analog Redundant SUPREMA MCI 20 Current Input SUPREMA MCI 20 BFE Current Input SUPREMA MPI WT100 Passive Input SUPREMA MPI WT10 Passive Input SUPREMA MPI HL8101 Passive Input SUPREMA MPI HL8113 Passive Input SUPREMA MFI 10 Fire Input SUPREMA MSI 10 Switch Input SUPREMA MDA 20 Data Acquisition SUPREMA MGO 20, General Output Board SUPREMA MRO 8 Relay Output SUPREMA MRC TS Relay Connection SUPREMA MRO 8 TS Relay Output (rail) SUPREMA MRO 16 TS Relay Output (rail) SUPREMA MAO Analog Output SUPREMA MGT 40 TS Terminals (rail) SUPREMA MUT Universal Terminal SUPREMA FRC-40 Flat Ribbon Cable SUPREMA FRC-40 Flat Ribbon Cable Type S SUPREMA MST 10 System Terminal SUPREMA MDO 10, 25MHz, (SW 2.06.xx) SUPREMA Rack (w/o pw sup,w MDO) SUPREMA Rack-E20 150 W (w pw sup,w/o MDO) SUPREMA Rack (w/o pw sup,w/o MDO) SUPREMA Rack 20 (150 W) (w pw sup,w MDO) MSO module
SUPREMA
17-1
MSA
Order No. 10030078 10030079 10030080 10030081 10030082 10030083 10030084 10030085 10030086 10030087 10029644 10030031 10049041 10035191 10031949 10032215 10034641 10052948 10038420 10030262 10030263 10030264 10052880 10088494 10060041
Name SUPREMA CAN-Bus Terminator, D-SUB, female SUPREMA CAN-Bus Terminator, D-SUB, male SUPREMA CAN-Bus T-Piece SUPREMA CAN-Bus Cable, 5 m, D-SUB, male/male SUPREMA CAN-Bus Cable, 5 m, D-SUB, female/female SUPREMA CAN-Bus Cable, 5 m, D-SUB, female/male SUPREMA CAN-Bus Cable, 0,5 m, D-SUB, female/male SUPREMA CAN-Bus Cable, 0,5 m, D-SUB, female/female SUPREMA CAN-Bus Cable, 0,5 m, D-SUB, male/male SUPREMA Flat Ribbon Cable, D-SUB SUPREMA RS 232 Cable, 2 m SUPREMA Manual, German SUPREMA Manual, English Printer EPSON LX-300+ SUPREMA Gateway CAN/MODBUS RTU SUPREMA Gateway CAN/PROFIBUS DP SUPREMA CAN Bridge CBM (29 Identifier) SUPREMA CAN/LWL SUPREMA MHD TS Module SUPREMA Sensor Simulations Module 4 ... 20 mA SUPREMA Sensor Simulations Module WT SUPREMA Sensor Simulations Module HL SUPREMA Dummy Relay SUPREMA Servicepack for software version 2/06/01 SUPREMA Gateway CAN/MODBUS TCP
Table 17-1: Order No., Modules and Accessories
17-2
SUPREMA
MSA in Europe
Northern Europe
Regional Head Office Netherlands MSA Nederland Kernweg 20, NL-1627 LH Hoorn Phone +31 [229] 25 03 03 Telefax +31 [229] 21 13 40 E-Mail info@msaned.nl Belgium MSA Belgium Duwijckstraat 17, B-2500 Lier Phone +32 [3] 491 91 50 Telefax +32 [3] 491 91 51 E-Mail msabelgium@msa.be Great Britain MSA Britain East Shawhead Coatbridge ML5 4TD Scotland Phone +44 [12 36] 42 49 66 Telefax +44 [12 36] 44 08 81 E-Mail info@msabritain.co.uk Sweden MSA NORDIC Kopparbergsgatan 29 SE-214 44 Malm Phone +46 [40] 699 07 70 Telefax +46 [40] 699 07 77 E-Mail info@msanordic.se MSA SORDIN Rrlggarvgen 8 SE-331 53 Vrnamo Phone +46 [370] 69 35 50 Telefax +46 [370] 69 35 55 E-Mail info@sordin.se Norway MSA NORDIC Florasvingen 6 NO-1890 Rakkestad Phone [+47] 47 85 47 43 Telefax [+47] 69 22 11 08 E-Mail info@msanordic.se
Eastern Europe
Regional Head Office Germany MSA AUER Thiemannstrasse 1 D-12059 Berlin Phone +49 [30] 68 86-25 99 Telefax +49 [30] 68 86-15 77 E-Mail mee@auer.de Czech Republic MSA AUER Czech Nad Obc II 32 CZ-140 00 Praha 4 Phone +420 [2] 41 440 537 Telefax +420 [2] 41 440 537 E-Mail infoPraha@msa-auer.cz Hungary MSA AUER Hungaria Francia t 10 H-1143 Budapest Phone +36 [1] 251-34 88 Telefax +36 [1] 251-46 51 E-Mail info@msa-auer.hu Poland MSA AUER Polska ul. Wschodnia 5A PL-05-090 Raszyn Phone +48 [22] 711-50 00 Telefax +48 [22] 711-50 19 E-Mail biuro@msa-auer.com.pl Russia MSA AUER Russia Leninsky Prospekt 2 9th floor, Office 14 RUS-119 049 Moscow Phone +7 [495] 544 93 89 Telefax +7 [495] 544 93 90 E-Mail msa-moscow@auer.de
Southern Europe
Regional Head Office Italy MSA Italiana Via Po 13/17 I-20089 Rozzano [MI] Phone +39 [02] 89 217-1 Telefax +39 [02] 8 25 92 28 E-Mail info-italy@msa-europe.com Spain MSA Espaola Narcs Monturiol, 7 Pol. Ind. del Sudoeste E-08960 Sant-Just Desvern [Barcelona] Phone +34 [93] 372 51 62 Telefax +34 [93] 372 66 57 E-Mail info@msa.es France MSA GALLET Zone Industrielle Sud F-01400 Chtillon sur Chalaronne Phone + 33 [474] 55 01 55 Telefax + 33 [474] 55 47 99 E-Mail message@msa-gallet.fr
Central Europe
Regional Head Office Germany MSA AUER Thiemannstrasse 1 D-12059 Berlin Phone +49 [30] 68 86-0 Telefax +49 [30] 68 86-15 17 E-Mail info@auer.de Austria MSA AUER Austria Kaplanstrasse 8 A-3430 Tulln Phone +43 [22 78] 31 11 Telefax +43 [22 78] 31 11-20 E-Mail msa-austria@auer.de Switzerland MSA AUER Schweiz Unterdorfstrasse 21 CH-8602 Wangen Phone + 41 [43] 255 89 00 Telefax + 41 [43] 255 99 90 E-Mail msa-schweiz@auer.de European Head Office & International Sales [Africa, Asia, Australia, Latin America, Middle East] MSA EUROPE Thiemannstrasse 1 D-12059 Berlin Phone +49 [30] 68 86-555 Telefax +49 [30] 68 86-15 17 E-Mail contact@msa-europe.com
www.msa-europe.com www.msa-gasdetection.com

Suprema Manual GB Rev 4.00

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Suprema Manual GB Rev 4.00

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Suprema Manual GB Rev 4.00

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SUPREMA Fire and Gas Warning Unit

Order No.: 10088495 / Edition 4.0 / September 2007

Description of the System

Operation of the System

4.3.4.3 4.3.5 4.3.5.1 4.3.5.2 4.4

4-35 4-36 4-36 4-39 4-40

6-15 6-15 6-16 6-18 6-19 6-19 6-20 6-22 6-22

Maintenance and Service

SUPREMA Sensor Data Sheets

Marking, Certificates and Approvals according to the Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)

9-6 9-7 10-3 10-6 14-4 17-2

1.2 Liability Information

1.3 Areas of Installation and Use of the SUPREMA

Monitoring functions are called for in the following areas:

1.4 Sensors Which Can Be Connected to the Unit

SafEye 2 and 4 MCI

Table 1-1: Sensors available for connection

1.5 Software Status

Table 1-2: Software status ATEX and TV SIL 3

2.2 Features of the System

2.3 Construction of the Unit

Figure 2-1: Block circuit diagram of a system layout (non-redundant)

2.4 Safety Concept

Description of the System

3. Description of the System

MRO Module: MIB Module: MFI Module: MSI Module:

Connection modules etc.

3.2 Expansion Stages

Description of the System

3.3 System Design Variants

3.4 Data Exchange between the Modules

Description of the System

3.5 Bus Protocol

3.6 Descriptions of the Modules

MSI Module: MDA Module:

Description of the System

Description of the System

Description of the System

3.6.2 Data Processing/MCP Module (Central Processing Unit)

Description of the System

3.6.3 Display + Operation/MDO Module (Display + Operating Unit)

Description of the System

3.6.4 Digital + Analog Output: MGO/MRC TS/MRO/MRO TS/MAO Modules

Description of the System

3.6.5 Power Supply, Bus Connections, Connecting Technique

Description of the System

Description of the System

Description of the System

Description of the System

3.7 System Power Supply

3.7.1 EXT Terminals (External Power Supply, 24 VDC)

3.7.2 INT Terminals (MSP Module, 24 VDC, 150 W)

Description of the System

3.7.3 BAT Terminals (Backup Battery Power Supply)

3.7.4 Features of the System Power Supply

3.7.5 Power Supply Plans

Description of the System

The voltage change over is delay free.

Table 3-1: Voltage Changeover